Home

"user manual"

1. Receive the expected message ABON Next Step No 01 a y Ray end escape ree code lt lt times Send Retry amp count Receive Receive a Other result code than O fO or Error y Abort Step No 02 mex _v Retry Send disconnect three command times Send amp Retry count Receive Receive a result code End Abort 156 Transmission Control Mode Setup Section 4 3 Example 2 Step No 00 ial eons qa ear etry three times acne Retry count Receive Matrix I eae Receive 7 9 Receive 1 234 Receive 4 6 8 or others Error J y y END Abort Abort Go to 01 Step No 01 Send di paanan lt Retry three times i Send amp Retry count Receive C Matrix Result cod Receive 1 234 Receive 4 6 7 8 9 or others Error 9 y y y END Abort Abort When configuring the steps the enough consideration is necessary not only for the normal course the process is completed in normal but for the error course the process is terminated by error The error courses are often set to be aborted intermittent process stop all together However if the abort is set as the simple other than normal course the
2. Dall Conme Me Ora PIC eere 2s ce fond et ak Ge otha oe dene bth kot eka doe bees Bs 2 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Software 0 0 0 cece eee eee 230 SCAT Ds wan tas a aan sone Ae he Be ea ae wae eee mame male ewan RA 2 SHUG OW Ns wuss en te de seks tae e hs caw ee shee See eee eR See eae ox 25 Outlineor User Interiaces20NersiMecacee ies cadhecdediea cbse eda wae ee SECTION 3 Protocol Mal O x 3 4 sa 0 04 54 es Hale Hawes be ok ws J l Protocol Macro Outline see reee ad a dea wane Galatea eee eo 3 2 Sequence Attributes Common to All Steps 0 0 0 cee B29 SEP ACIDULES sa becdweeiede BETAS EY pase ed oe Eee weedeat eee 3 4 Communication Message Attributes 0 0 0 eee eee ap Crean Matices t vamedwnws Limes bobo hdawk hates e Sere hee eae as 3 6 Examples of Standard System Protocols 0 0 cece eee 3 7 Example of Communications Sequence 0 cee eee 3 8 Executing a Created Communications Sequence CS CJ 4 3 9 Executing a Created Communications Sequence C200HX HG HE 3 10 Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas 0 0 0c eee owu mn n m 14 17 20 21 24 25 26 33 37 41 42 45 45 46 46 57 58 75 84 95 112 116 118 121 128 134 vii TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 4 Using the Protocol Macro Function 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 Applicable Range of the Protocol M
3. 100 bytes Transmission Control Mode Setup Section 4 3 For the CS CJ With the CS CJ protocol the maximum number of receive bytes per step is 1 000 bytes in the RTS CTS flow control Xon Xoff flow control or delimiter control as in the case where these control modes are not specified The max imum number of bytes for the send receive message handled by the protocol macro can be set in a range from 200 to 1 000 bytes by setting the allocated DM area for the PMSU Note on the selection of the contention control mode When the contention control mode is set the send request code is automati cally sent at the beginning of the sequence the successive process has to be set in the sequence e When the communicating partner does not have a priority Execute the communications process after the receipt of partner s receive permission code StepNo Command Send message Receive message Next process Error process Receive Receive Next Goto00 permission code Send amp Receive e When the communicating partner has a priority Send the receive permission code if the received data is not the partner s receive permission code Step No Command Send message Receive message Next process Error process Receive Receive permis Next Goto02 sion code Senda Receive 02 Send amp Receive Receive permis Data receive Next Abort sion code 3 sm baas O o e BR 159 Ladder Programming Method Section 4 4 4
4. C200HE CPU 32 E 42 E 32 ZE 42 ZE CQM1H CQM1H CPU51 61 See note 3 Note 1 When using the CS1D H set the device type as follows CS1D H with unit Ver 1 1 CS1D H Pre Ver 1 1 CS1D H CS1H H 2 CX Protocol Version 1 0 does not support the C200HX HG HE 3 When using CQMiH series PLCs use the C200HG CPU43 from the C200HX HG HE Series as the CPU Unit 1 3 2 Supported PMSUs CS series PLCs Installation Model Serial communications ports Serial Communications l CS1W SCB21 V1 RS 232C port x 1 RS 232C port x 1 Boards Inner Board Installed in the CPU Unit CS1W SCB41 V1 RS 232C port x 1 RS 422A 485 port x 1 Serial Communications Installed on the CPU Rack CS1W SCU21 V1 RS 232C port x 1 RS 232C port x 1 Unit CPU Bus Unit or CS Expansion Rack CS1W SCU31 V1 RS 422A 485 port x 1 Supported PLC Models and Personal Computers Section 1 3 Mounting the Serial Communications Mounting the Serial Communications Board on the CPU Unit Unit on the CPU Rack CPU Rack CPU Unit Power Supply Unit Serial Com munications Units NJ series CJ series and CP series PLCs Classification Installation Model Serial communications ports Serial Communi CJ series CPU CPU Rack or CJ1W SCU21 V1 RS 232C port x 1 RS 232C port x 1 cations Unit Bus Unit CJ Expansion Rack CJ1W SCU22 CJ1iW SCU31 V1 RS 422A 485 port x 1 CJ1W SCU32 RS422A 485 port x 1 CJiW SCU41 V1 RS 232C port x 1 CJ1iW SCU42 RS 422A 485 port x
5. lt c gt ABCDE W 5 3 Setting the header error check code and terminator e For the header or terminator various special codes such as CR LF STX or ETX are used according to the communications destination device Always set on the message the same header or terminator as the destina tion device e There are several different kinds of error check code such as SUM LRC CRC CCITT that may be used by the communications partner Make sure that the error check code set in the message corresponds to that used by the communications partner e Most external devices can send or receive only ASCII codes In this case convert the hexadecimal code into ASCII before sending and convert received data from ASCII to hexadecimal conversion before storage Con sider the data format and reading writing direction which allows sending receiving of the destination device and convert it into a data format which can be handled with the data conversion available variable before sending and receiving 3 5 Creating Matrices Matrices are set when more than one receive messages are expected to be received or when users want to change next process for each receive mes sage Up to 15 types of message can be set in a matrix case No 00 to14 In a matrix next processes such as End Next Goto or Abort are set for each one of the up to 15 types of receive expected message Other must also be set to enable processing when some m
6. 6 1 5 Saving a Project n To save an existing project under a different project name or save a new project under a new name right click the Project Icon and select Save as from the pop up menu Use the following procedure to save the project under a different name 1 2 3 1 Select Save as from the File Menu or right click the Project Icon and se lect Save as from the pop up menu The Save as Dialog Box will be dis played on screen 2 To change the current folder for another one select the folder from File Save in in the drop down list Then change the Save as type Field to CX Protocol project file psw 215 Editing Protocols Section 6 2 Input the project name in the File name Field To overwrite a project select the project from the list 3 Left click the Save Button or press the Enter Key Left click the Cancel Button to close the Save as Dialog Box without saving the project 6 1 6 Closing a Project To close a currently open project select Close from the File Menu or left click the Close Button from the project window Closing a project will require confir mation if the project has not been saved since its last edit Select Yes Button to save the project 6 2 Editing Protocols 6 2 1 Displaying a Protocol List Use either of the following procedures to display a protocol list for the current project e By double clicking the Project Icon in the project workspace and double clicking the Protocol List
7. 3 Setthe area and the range of the area to be transferred 4 Left click the Upload Button Transfer of the data will start 12 5 3 Comparison with Data in PLC Use the following procedure to compare the data of the PLC data table with the data in the PLC after connecting the PLC online 152 352 1 Open the PLC data table in the area to be compared To designate the range to be compared highlight the range 2 Right click a cell in the PLC data table and select Compare with PLC via Online from the pop up menu or from the Online Menu in the PLC mem ory window Compare Memory Ez The area currently open is displayed gt Check the area to be transferred Cancel Designate the range of the area to be transferred All All data of the selected area Visible area only The range of data currently Fo mpare Range displayed in the window t All Selection will be available only if the range is f Wisible area only selected in step 1 m Selection 3 Set the area and the range of the area to be transferred 319 I O Memory Transfer and Comparison Section 12 5 4 Left click the Compare Button The comparison of the data will start One of the following messages will be displayed according to the comparison result Data Coincident Data Monitor Fa P e m r 1 Mo differences found in compare Data Not Coincident Data Monitor Ea 7 Differences were found during compare Do you
8. Al Send initialization command Communications port No 7 serial port No 2 destination unit address E1 Inner Board Sequence No 100 Constant Constant RSET 000100 Communications Port 000101 Enable Flag RSET 000101 Communications Port 000102 Enable Flag 000000 191915 A20207 RSET 000000 191915 A20207 Communications port No 7 serial port No 2 destination unit address E1 Inner Board Sequence No 101 Send the dial number The first word of the send data Constant Communication data Communications port No 7 serial port No 2 destination unit address E1 Inner Board Sequence No 102 Constant The first word of the received data stored 000102 352 Creating the Protocol Applications C200HX HG HE 00000 4 DIFU 013 00100 Port A Instruction Execution Flag 00100 28908 28908 00101 PMCR 1001 DM0010 DMO0000 00102 28908 Appendix A Send initialization command Execute sequence No 000 by using Port A Constant Dummy word Send the dial number Execute sequence No 001 by using Port A The first word number of the send data Dummy word Communication data Execute sequence No 002 by using Port A Constant The first word of the received data stored 353 Creating the Protocol Applications Appendix A 354 Appendix B PLC Setup and PMSU Settings PMSU Syste
9. Next go to the next step number Goto go to a designated step number or Abort abort the step to end the sequence Error Specifies the next process as follows when the step ends abnormally End end the process sequence Next go to the next step number Goto go to a designated step number or Abort abort the step to end the sequence Send Settings for the data to Consists of a header Note 1 address Note 2 length data message be sent when the Note 2 error check code Note 3 and terminator Note 1 fourth operand for CS CJ of the PMCR instruction command is Send or Send amp Receive Receive Settings for the data to message be received when the command is Receive or Send amp Receive When the command is Designate a receive message and next process for each of case Receive or numbers 00 to 15 Send amp Receive the At least one of 16 cases must be designated to Other for its matrix sets up the receive message type other than the designated receive message expected to be message received up to 15 sets to switch next process by comparing the data Data Constant ASCII data hexadecimal data or control code attribute of header and terminator 34 Specifications Section 1 12 pte i eseription Step Address Constant ASCII data hexadecimal data or control code For address the control code content attributes cannot be used and data attributes in send or receive Variable
10. Note Sequences belonging to the System protocols cannot be deleted 1 2 3 1 Selecta sequence to be deleted More than one sequence can be selected by pressing the Shift Key and selecting another sequence to extend the selection or by pressing the Ctrl Key and selecting another sequence to add to the selection 2 Left click the Delete Icon on the toolbar or press the Delete Key Alterna tively right click and select Delete from the pop up menu It can also be selected from the Edit Menu A sequence can also be deleted by selecting the Cut Icon on the toolbar or pressing the Ctrl X Keys It can also be se Al lected from the Edit Menu Alternatively right click to display the pop up menu and select Cut from the menu To undo the last delete action processed using the Cut operation left click the Paste Icon on the toolbar or press the Ctrl V Keys Alternatively right click to display the edit pop up menu and select Paste The pasted se quences inherit the sequence numbers existed before being cut If the se quence number already exists or if the number is outside the sequence number range the next available sequence number will be newly given to the pasted sequence mi 227 Editing Sequences Section 7 2 228 This section describes details of the setting and editing of steps 8 1 8 2 SEPS MNO ree Eea ddseyu eos dasa eke Nae ei ee el Ee Belek Slep Cetin SCrech Vite wa cs eae hates Geet ae oe aae S 1 2
11. OUTareat OUTacder OUTlent areaz Maddr2 Henz OUTareaz OUTacdr2 OUTlen2 Control parameter RTSICTS Control Receive ORM SAOCPF Control Modem control Yes Delimiter Send code Receive code Contention Send request code recy van time 10 sec recy Tosh time Send timah time Response method Scan No 00 RSE 001 Send amp Receive ME144F B5 nitial F1 Mo Matrix Goto 1 01 RSE 001 Send amp Receive 1 aec MDI44F 65 nitial F2 gt Mo Matrix Goto 2 0z RSE 7001 Send amp Receive 1 zec MDI44F 65 nitial F3 Mo Matrix Abort Comm sequence Mo 571 Conm sequence name Dial MD144F854 Link worde areal Macddrd Meni OUTareat OUTacdr1 OUTlen1 areaz Maddrz Menz OUTareaz OUTacdr2 OUTlen2 Control parameter RTSICTS Control Receive AOR SZO F Control Modem control Yes Delirniler Seud cude Receive cude Contention Send request code Recy wai time 90 se gt Recy finish time Send finish time Response method Scan Send Messege 00 RSE 001 Send amp Receive Dail 5 M01 44F6 F 1 Mo Matriz Goto 1 01 RSE 001 Send amp Receive g0 zec Dail 5 hiD1 44FB F2 Mo Matriz Goto 2 02 RSE 001 send amp Receive g0 sec Dail 3 lt hiD1 44FR R3 gt Mo Matrix Abort Note Message data may extend
12. Protocol Macro Stnictire 3 44so344 Sid bola So ieeebew hte uee ee ks 17 oal Sep STUC e ek aaie e bashes dod che wane a ethan ole Sed 19 l 7 Data Created by the CX Protocol nannan ied ee eee see aves 5 20 1 8 Main Screens of the CX Protocol 0 ccc eee ee ees 21 1 9 Overview of Project Creation 22 oy etn eas thane eee pees fees ee 24 1 10 Incorporated Standard System Protocol 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 25 1 11 Basic Procedure of the Protocol Macro Usage 0000 26 Lelie pOrtheC S O pener nitr ea n Ge cue eae donepucnsaleesas 26 l 1122 Forthe C200HX JHG HE srera rta a E Raa 29 I2 Specifications zrein one a e ws AE A dee ew eee 33 1 12 1 Protocol Macro Specifications 0 0 eee eee 33 1 12 2 Specifications of the CX Protocol 0 0 0 00 eee eee 37 1 13 Differences between Protocol Macros 0c cece eens 37 Overview of the CX Protocol Section 1 1 1 1 Overview of the CX Protocol The CX Protocol is the software for creating a procedure or protocol for sending or receiving data to or from general purpose external devices con nected to a Protocol Macro Support Unit PMSU through RS 232C or RS 485A 422 A protocol consists of a set of communications sequences CX Protocol trans fers a protocol to the PMSU specifies the sequence number of the protocol using the PMCR instruction on the CPU Unit and executes the communica tions sequence The communications sequence c
13. The CX Protocol can be started also by right clicking a Serial Communica tions Board Unit in the I O Table Window opened from the CX Programmer and selecting Start Special Application from the pop up menu In this case if Start Special Application Start Only is selected the CX Protocol will be started in the same manner as when started from the Win dows Start Menu i e no new project will be created lf Start Special Application Start with Setting Inherited is selected the CX Protocol will be started with a new project that inherits the Device Type and online offline status from the CX Programmer 45 Shutdown Section 2 4 2 4 Shutdown Use one of the following methods to shut down the CX Protocol 6 Select the Control Menu on the title bar and left click the Close Button Select the File Menu and left click the Exit in the menu x Left click the Close Button on the title bar Press the Alt F4 Keys A confirmation dialog box will be displayed if any data currently opened in the CX Protocol has not been saved Left click the Yes Button to save the changes Left click the No Button to dis card the changes The CX Protocol will close Left click the Cancel Button to abort the operation and return to the CX Protocol 2 5 Outline of User Interface The following is the basic screen configuration of the CX Protocol The stan dard system protocol screen that is displayed upon startup is always dis played in the Pr
14. e CS CJ Board D32000 to D32009 port 1 and D32010 to D32019 port 2 Unit m to m 9 port 1 and m 10 to m 19 port 2 m D 30000 100 x Unit No Unit No 0 to F 15 e C200HX HG HE PLC Setup data in DM 6550 to DM 6654 port B and DM 6555 to DM 6559 port A Data can be read and written from and to the above areas with a Pro gramming Device of the PLC or the PLC memory window of CX Protocol Refer to 12 2 Outline of PLC Memory Window for details 283 Transfer of Communications Port Setting Data to PLC Section 10 7 284 SECTION 11 Protocol Data Transferring and Printing This section describes details of the transferring converting and printing of protocol data 11 1 Transferring and Reading Protocol Data between the Computer and PMSU 286 11 1 1 Transferring Data from the Computer to the PMSU 286 11 1 2 Displaying Protocol Data within the PMSU 287 11 1 3 Transferring Protocol Data from the PMSU to the Computer 288 Hez Printing Protocol sag 2 3 he es ete od ache Pare see Bae ee edd Rees 291 U 21 Sete the Printets 2c c526neeokwesee hate E hate ek eee ed 292 L22 Pritine a ProloCol 24 62 g 1 0 ke da heat Soha Saad oe She ate Shae 0e 292 11 3 Importing Protocol Data from PST PSS Files 0 2 293 11 4 CS CJ Protocol and C200HX HG HE Protocol 0048 295 11 4 1 Downloading the Protocol 0 0 0 ccs 295 11 4 2 Converting the I O
15. starting address 4 1 Indeterminate Unit No Onse Contents Data forma Data 0 No of send data words 0002 fixed BCD 4 digit Unit No hexadecimal 00 to OF 2 digit e Receive data word assignment Third operand of PMCR instruction Receive data 0 No of send data words storage address 1 Measuring temperature rightmost 4 digit Channalo 2 Measuring temperature leftmost 1 digit Measuring temperature rightmost 4 digit i P 2 git Channel 1 4 Measuring temperature leftmost 1 digit i 15 Measuring temperature rightmost 4 digit _ Channel 7 16 Measuring temperature leftmost 1 digit offs Contents aatom ata No of receive data words BCD 0017 4 digit CHO Measuring temperature Differs depending on the tempera rightmost 4 digit BCD 4 digit ture measuring model Refer to the E5ZE Operation Manual CHO Measuring temperature leftmost 1 digit BCD 1 digit F denotes minus SN Measuring temperature DRK depending on the tempera rightmost 4 digit BCD 4 digit ture measuring model Refer to CH7 Measuring temperature the E5ZE Operation Manual leftmost 1 digit BCD 1 digit F denotes minus 132 Executing a Created Communications Sequence C200HX HG HE Section 3 9 Settings of the PMCR Instruction Set 101 on the rightmost 3 digits of this word because the sequence number of the measured value re
16. will be transferred to the PLC gai Range setting Specify an address Select All and a transfer range for the areas selected in the box above The data in that range will be transferred to the PLC Transter Range i All C Selection C Range eg 10 90 93 95 100 0 327 2 Right click a cell in the PLC data table and select Transfer To PLC via On line from the pop up menu or from the Online Menu in the PLC memory window 3 Setthe area and the range of the area to be transferred 4 Click the Download Button Transfer of the data will start Uploading Personal Use the following procedure to transfer the data of the PLC data table from the Computer from PLC PLC to the personal computer 1 2 3 1 Open the PLC data table of the area to be uploaded In order to designate the range to be uploaded highlight the range 318 I O Memory Transfer and Comparison Section 12 5 2 Right click a cell in the PLC data table and select Transfer From PLC via Online from the pop up menu or from the Online Menu in the PLC mem ory window The area currently open is displayed Check the area to be transferred i Designate the range of the area to be transferred All All data of the selected area Transter Range C All Wisible area only C Selection Visible area only The range of data cur rently displayed in the window Only if the range is selected in step 1 Selection is available
17. 2 Left click the Edit Button The HEX Entry Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Select a button that corresponds to one digit of the hexadecimal digit Up to eight digits may be entered They will be displayed at the top of the dia log box If the 9th digit is entered the 1st digit will be deleted Note Left click the CLR Button to clear all the special codes After clearing all the special codes input them again from the beginning Left click the DEL Button to delete the special code where the cursor is locat ed 4 Left click the Enter Button to accept the settings or the Cancel Button to leave the settings unchanged Delimiters Data can be transmitted through the delimiter control Left click the Delimit ers check box to either enable or disable the delimiter control If the Delimiters check box is not checked delimiter control will not be per formed If the Delimiters check box is checked the delimiter control will be performed The delimiter set in the send and receive code can be designated in Code ASCII or Hexadecimal Select one of them from the Delimiter Send Code or Delimiter Receive Code drop down list The input methods for the Code ASCII and Hexadecimal are the same as for the contention control Use the following procedure to set the timing for writing received data in the I O memory designated by the fourth operand of the PMCR instruction for the CS CJ and by the third operand of the PMCR instruction for
18. 9 AT DT 03 0 12 3 45 Set in the first word is the total number of words of the data to be sent 349 Creating the Protocol Applications Appendix A Example of the Setting for Four word Receive Data Stored in DM 0201 to DM 0204 e The received message described in the step number 00 of the sequence number 002 for the PLC which sent the SendOK message W 1 8 CR or CR LF a Terminator Number of received bytes The first word received CH DM0200 1CH addressed by the third operand of the PMCR instruction Read option non conversion forward direction writing e The received data actually written in the addressed word DM0200 DM0201 DM0202 DM0203 DM0204 5 0 52 10 15 2 Number of words to be received set automatically Example of Setting for Four Words Data Sending DM 0101 to DM 0104 e The send message described in the step number 01 of the sequence number 000 for the PLC which receives SendOK message R 1 8 CR or CR LF C Ooo Number of bytes to be sent Terminator The first word to be sent CH DM0100 1CH addressed by the second operand of the PMCR instruction Read option non conversion forward direction e The send data content to be actually stored in the addressed word DM0100 DM0101 DM0102 DM0103 DM0104 5 10 15 20 52 Set the total number of words of the data to be sent Setting the Transmission Control Mode Modem Control is designated as the transmission control mode fo
19. Aluminum foil tape 361 Wiring RS 232C Cable Connectors Appendix C Soldering Solder as described next 1 2 3 1 Place a heat shrinking tube around each wire 2 Pre solder each wire and to its connector pin 3 Solder each wire firmly in place Soldering iron Heat shrinking tube Internal diameter 1 5 r 10 4 Move the heat shrinking tube to the soldered section and shrink the tube by heating it Heat shrinking tube Assembling Hood Assemble the connector hood as shown below CS CJU Connected to FG Not connected to FG Aluminum foil tape Ground plate 362 Wiring RS 232C Cable Connectors Appendix C C200HX HG HE Aluminum foil tape Connected to FG Not connected to FG 363 Wiring RS 232C Cable Connectors Appendix C 364 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No W344 E1 14 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revised content O A February 1999 Original production 01 02 April 1999 Pages xi 2 5 24 25 38 114 268 333 339 and 343 Minor corrections which include those to the software version ladder program examples general wording etc 03 September 2001 Information on CJ series PLCs was added a
20. CJ1H CPU Duplex Systems CJ1H CPU CJ1G CPU Loop control CPU Units CS1D CPU Units for Simplex Systems CS1D Process control CPU Units CS series Basic I O Units NSJ series Expansion Units CPM1A series Expansion I O Units CS series Special I O Units CJ series Basic I O Units CPM1A series Expansion Units CS series CPU Bus Units CJ series Special I O Units CJ series Special I O Units CS series Power Supply Units CJ series CPU Bus Units CJ series CPU Bus Units Note A special Power Supply Unit must be used for CS1D CPU Units CJ series Power Supply Units XV Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY 1 The warranty period for the Software is one year from either the date of purchase or the date on which the Software is delivered to the specified location 2 If the User discovers a defect in the Software i e substantial non conformity with the manual and returns it to OMRON within the above warranty period OMRON will replace the Software without charge by offering media or downloading services from the Internet And if the User discovers a defect in the media which is attributable to OMRON and returns the S
21. MS 00 02 LRC 2A0D Go to 02 Monitor mode Case No 02 00 MS 00 03 1 LRC 2A0D Go to 03 RUN mode Case No 03 Others By using the matrix identify the difference in the status in the response data section in the above and change over the process according to the mode of the PLC Matrix Example Change over the process according to the ACK NAK reception In the following example the entire message structure is omitted and only data is indicated with 114 Creating Matrices Section 3 5 Step structure Step No 00 Send ENQ Send amp Receive Receive ACK Step No 01 Send amp Receive Receive Other Receive ACK Receive NAK Step No Repeat Command Retry Send Send Receive Response Next Error counter wait message message type process process 00 R 001 Send amp Receive ENQ ACK Next Goto 00 01 R 001 Send amp Receive 1s Message Goto 00 02 R 001 Send amp Receive EOT End Abort Matrix Case No Receive Next message process Set next processes End Next Goto or Abort for each one of the up to 15 types of receive 00 ACK Goto02 message 01 NAK Goto01 m For Other case set the next process to be executed when the message that was received is 7 not equal to any of the expected messages 15
22. Note Error Check Code For protocol macros the following 8 types of check code can be set Calculation Data type Reverse Initial value method direction see note 1 a see note 1 byte 1 byte Unavailable ASCII byte Available see note 2 106 Communication Message Attributes Section 3 4 Note 1 2 3 Calculation Data type Reverse Initial value method direction see note 1 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte cRCCCTT BIN 2 byte valle CRT BIN 2bye availabe 065535 note 3 1 ae ASCII Available note 3 2 3 ASCII Available 1 Swap between high byte and low byte of the error check code is possible for CS CJ and is also possible for C200HX HG HE when the Communica tions Board is the C200HW COML ILJ EV1 2 The host link SYSMAC WAY uses an error check code LRC ASCII 2 byte sequential direction 3 With CS CJ protocol macro Calculation Examples The following message items are used to calculate the check code when the initial value is O 00 52 44 38 39 il Calculation items 1 LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check This mode calculates the exclusive OR XOR of the characters of a set of data to create a check code 107 Communication Message Attributes Section 3 4 108 00 hexadecimal XOR 52 hexadecimal XOR 2 44 hexadecimal XOR 3 38 hexadecimal XOR 4 39 hexadecimal 17 hexadecimal Calculation result 1 byte Check Code LRC 2byte
23. Transmission control parameter Settings on the SYSMAC PST RTS CTS flow control None No RTS CTS flow control Send RTS CTS flow control only during sending Receive RTS CTS flow control only during receiving Send amp Receive RTS CTS flow control during both sending and receiving Xon Xoff flow control None No Xon Xoff flow control Send Xon Xoff flow control only during sending Receive Xon Xoff flow control only during receiving Send amp Receive Xon Xoff flow control during both sending and receiving Contention control No Yes Send request code either control code or ASCII hexadecimal Delimiter control No Yes Send request code either control code or ASCII hexadecimal Receive request code either control code or ASCII hexadecimal CX Protocol Window RIRAL TE z XON XOFF None H Cancel T Modem Contention Contention Send Request Code Code al Edit l Delimiters Delimiter Send Code css I a Delimiter Receive Code Code aj Eclit 1 Note that the RTS CTS flow control cannot be set at the same time as the Xon Xoff control 2 When using a 2 wire connection for the RS 422A 485 port use only mo dem control and do not select RTC CTS control in the transmission control parameters 3 With the CS CJ protocol macro each port is provided with a receive buffer 2 5 Kbytes max When receiving large amounts of data or when the communications sequence is set to the wait state a large
24. 1 2 3 1 Enter a message name 2 Retrieve each item already set and reorder them Example Edit the following in this dialog box lt h gt lt a gt ececececee lt C gt lt t gt Input data from this dialog box Note If data has not been input into any of the items header lt h gt address lt a gt check code lt c gt or terminator lt t gt left click the Edit Button of each field to display a data input dialog box and to enter data If data has been input in any one of these items the Insert Button for each one of them will become active 3 Set the data Combine the following to designate the data using the Message Data drop down list Hexadecimal ASCII Code Variable Example RX0 amp N 1 00 m ASCII data Variable ASCII data 4 Set the error check code and length calculation range items Items sub ject to calculation are shown in the following color in the Data Field Set as length calculation Red Set as check code calculation Blue Set as length and check code calculation Purple 251 Creating Messages Section 9 1 Use the following procedure to edit messages and to enter data 1 2 3 1 Left click the Data Field for a message and then left click the Enter Button E or press the Enter Key The Message Editor Dialog Box will be displayed Using this dialog box create data and edit messages 2 Enter a message name in the Name Field 3 Left click the Insert Butto
25. 28910 0 Step Error Process 1 Execution Flag 28909 Sequence Error Termination J Instruction Execution Flag 0 28908 t t Sequence Sequence Sequence termination restart execution Sequence Abort Termination Flag Q o Too 28910 i Step Error Process 1 Execution Flag 0 28909 Example 2 Step No 00 Step No 02 Error Sequence error termination Sequence normal termination End Sequence normal termination End Sequence Normal Termination J Instruction Execution Flag 0 28908 i Sequence Sequence Sequence execution termination restart re rr Error process at i the step No 00 To Sequence Error Termination Sequence End Termination Flag 28910 Step Error Process Execution Flag 28909 0 Instruction Execution Flag 28908 0 i i i Sequence Sequence Sequence execution termination res art Sequence Abort Termination Flag 0 28910 Error process at 7 the step No 00 Step Error Process 1 OoOo Execution Flag 28909 169 Ladder Programming Method Section 4 4 Note 1 The Step Error Process Flag is not a flag for the whole sequence but a flag to determine whether the error process is executed at a step in the se quence Therefore as in the previous example 2 if the consecutive step terminates normally after the error process execution during the sequence Step No 00 the Flag will remain unchanged at 1 ON Thus it should be kept in mine that
26. 3 1 1 Sequence Q am 3 og u i aQ Q 3 pa A N 58 CPU unit PMCR address Receive data address 4 Sequence number specification Section 3 1 Protocol Macro Outline The Protocol Support Tool allows users to freely create and edit protocols which are procedures for sending data to and receiving data from general purpose devices connected to the PMSU see note through RS 232C or RS 422A 485 The protocol macro is a function to implement the sending and the receiving messages by the execution of a starting instruction for the protocol macro PMCR instruction of the CPU Unit s user program For CJ2 CPU Units the PMCR2 instruction can be used in addition to the PMCR instruction For details of the PMCR and PMCR2 instructions for CS CJ series Units refer to the SYSMAC CS CJ Series Programmable Control lers Instructions Reference Manual W474 For details of the PMCR instruc tions for SYSMAC Alpha Series C200HX HG HE Units refer to the Programmable Controllers C20OHX HG HE CPULI_ ZE Operation Manual W322 PMSU Note The send receive message can be stored on and after the send or receive data address 1 Sequence No 001 j j General purpose external device Shared memory Peripheral anes Note In this section the Communications Board for the C200HX HG HE the Com Step 00 Step 01 Step 15 munications Board for the CQM1H the Serial
27. 4 us hexadeci mal conversion 7 us hexadecimal reverse conversion 7 us 6 The receive data conversion process time 2 ms one byte conversion time x number of conversion bytes One byte conversion time No conversion 1 us reverse conversion 4 us ASCII conversion 8 us ASCII reverse conversion 9 us hexadecimal conversion 17 us hexadecimal reverse conversion 17 us 188 Communications Response Time Performance Section 4 8 e Communications Response Performance Using the Link Word Area Illustrated below is the data flow when the link word area is used for the communications data storing area CPU Unit PMSU External devices PMCR 0110 PMCR 0000 instruction 0000 process 0000 Send data conversion process OUT Send data J area notification lt 4 gt lt gt 2 4 External device process Received Received IN area data writing data conversion process i i gt lt gt lt gt The communications response time is the total time from 1 to 8 in the above figure 189 Communications Response Time Performance Section 4 8 190 Number Function __ Time Required PMCR instruction execut ing notification process time Send data notification process time Send data conversion process time 4 Send data transmission time 8 External device process time Received data transmis sion time Received data conversion pro
28. 8 1 8 2 SEO 251 tag ot Se ea E ae Baa ieee ha a Ba rein it ae eee SEPEN J icavaicawedmobsde tas deta heneked now etek tae a Lede SECTION 9 Setting and Editing Messages and Matrix Lists 9 1 9 2 9 3 Creatine MCSSACES ocr ee E ERA EE ed DENE E ATEN Manix Credion eunate ea in a oY AN a TE EAN Message and Matrix Editing 6 3 ccc touged ae hioa eens Ee se eaa SECTION 10 Communications PLC Setup and Online Connections 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 Vill PEC Syse ConneuraOn ncocedectucenenne E tours teeta Senge les Communications Settings between Personal Computer and PLC Online Connections and Mode Changes 0 000 e eee eee ees Modem Connec oN 120 5 20 gag ated btata pad wo daanie sche Ameena wie eae bee ears VO Table Crean 4 0ii e ava nauae aera see T teehee heda a beans PMSU Communications Port Settings 0 0 0 0 cece Transfer of Communications Port Setting Data to PLC 151 152 154 157 160 171 173 175 184 201 203 204 208 209 211 213 214 216 219 220 226 229 230 236 239 240 254 255 259 260 261 268 270 279 280 282 TABLE SECTION 11 OF CONTENTS Protocol Data Transferring and Printing 11 1 Transferring and Reading Protocol Data between the Computer and PMSU 11 2 Printing Protocols 11 3 Importing Protocol Data from PST PSS Files 000 e ee eee 11 4 C
29. CP Series CPU Unit port Cable length IBM PC AT or USB port USB port Commercially compatible A type con B type con available USB nector nector 1 1 or 2 0 cable IBM PC AT or compatible USB port 9 CP1H Commercial CPU Unit USB cable Peripheral USB port Note If an RS 232C Option Board CP1W CIF01 is mounted it is also possible to use a XW2Z 200S 500S V CV RS 232C Cable to connect an RS 232C port on the computer to the RS 232C Option Board 43 Connecting to a PLC Section 2 1 C200HX HG HE Communications Cable used Cable length Connector on the Connector on the procedure computer PLC Peripheral bus CQM1 CIF02 33m 3 33m RS 232C Peripheral port port RS 232C XW2Z 200S V RS 232C XW2Z 500S V Connecting the CPU Unit to the peripheral port CPU Unit Peripheral port CPU Unit XW2Z 200S V 500S V RS 232C cable RS 232C port When creating a specific RS 232C cable join the connectors listed in the fol lowing table Connectors and Cables Component name D sub connector 9 pin XM2A 0901 connector OMRON Por site mle D sub connector 9 pin XM2D 0901 connector ie PC side female XM2S 0911 connector hood si 0911 connector hood Recommended Cable UL2464 paves 22 T onnecior teed o IFS RVV SB ee Ltd UL item AWG28P X 5P IFVV SB non UL item X 5P IFVV SB AWG28P X 5P IFVV SB non UL item UL item UL2464 SB 5P K AWG28 UL item Hitachi Cable
30. Data Address Data Communication Message Attributes Section 3 4 Examples of the Variable Reading from CPU Unit to PMSU No conversion R DOO00 T Byte count Reverse direction no conversion R D0000 3 Byte count ASCII conversion R D0000 e2 a Las ss 37 38 31 32 Byte count aaa Reverse direction ASCH conversion R D0000 6 i s es 34 35 96 37 38 agn 4 5 6 7 g Byte coun H EX conversion DMO0000 37 Sp 38 amp A DM0000 3 OMo001 35 4536 gt 34 56 78 T Bye count DM0002 _33 4534 Reverse direction HEX conversion DMoooo 37738 Z R DM0000 3 DMooot 35c 3e J gt 7a 56 34 T_Byte count DMo002 33 34 Writing from PMSU to CPU Unit No conversion W D0000 5 Byte count Note Reverse direction no conversion W D0000 5 Byte count ae ASCII conversion DMocoo W DM0000 3 DMO001 Byte count DM0002 Reverse direction ASCII conversion DMO000 W DM0000 3 DM0001 Byte count DM0002 HEX conversion amp W D0000 5 Byte count Note Reverse direction HEX conversion amp W D0000 5 Note Byte count Note 0 is stored in an empty bit in a word whose write data is less than 16 when writing to the CPU Unit When the receive data has variable length use the wildcard 105 Communication Message Attributes Section 3 4 No conversion W DM0000 31 3
31. For the CS CJ protocol macro Message Repeat Counter Set the number of times the step is to be repeated The count can be set by entering a constant 1 to 255 or by designating the address of a word When a constant is set in the repeat counter the value of counter N will be incre mented whenever the step is executed The Type includes Reset and Hold and the Counter includes Constant or Channel 1 2 3 1 Left click the Repeat Counter Field and then left click the Enter Button or E press the Enter Key The Repeat Counter Information Dialog Box will be displayed Repeat Counter Information EES Counter Constant fi C Channel R Edit 230 Step Setting Command Section 8 1 2 Set the initial value for the repeat counter N in the Type drop down list If the Reset is selected the step is executed the designated number of times after the value of counter N will be initialized to O If the Hold is selected the step will be executed the designated number of times while retaining the current value of the counter N To designate a repeat counter select the Constant Button and enter the number of times 1 to 255 the step is to be repeated in the Constant Field To designate a word channel to be read select the Channel Button and select the Edit Button to set the word address The Channel Dialog Box will be displayed R RO C Write WO Nt Ok Cancel Data Address Area EM Bank Channel o
32. Interrupt process Receive Fixed interrupt buffer task program O Received data Half duplex Other than Send process After Receive Full duplex During sequence execution writing process Conversion I O memory Data is written immediately after conversion Turns OFF when writing is fin ished and sequence has termi nated BeaitonFiag Interrupt task number _ _ XX hexadecimal for CS CJ or L When using a matrix Case num Subroutine number ber of the matrix for C2O0HX HG HE Otherwise 0 Step number of the sequence that was executed Note With the CS series Serial Communications Board received data cannot be stored in the EM area using the interrupt notification If this is attempted a protocol macro syntax error A42410 will occur Example When the step No 2 and the matrix case No 11 hexadecimal Interrupt task Subroutine No 2B hexadecimal 43 decimal Note With the CS CJ the interrupt task external interrupt task with the task num ber assigned according to calculation will be performed With the C200HX HG HE the interrupt task external interrupt task with the subroutine number SBN to RET assigned according to calculation will be performed Setting with the CX Protocol Response Type EE Cancel nterrupt Fixed fo C nterupt Receive Case The tnterrupt No to the PLC will be set to automatic for the comm board status Note When an i
33. Note Messages within the System protocols can be copied but the message becomes editable once pasted into a message list in a User category proto col 1 2 3 1 Select the icon of the message to be copied either from the send message list or the receive message list More than one message can be selected by pressing the Shift Key and selecting another message to extend the se lection or by pressing the Ctrl Key and selecting another message to add to the selection 2 Left click the Copy Icon on the toolbar or press the Ctrl C Keys Alterna tively right click to display a pop up menu and then select Copy in the pop up menu It can also be selected from the Edit Menu 3 Left click the Message List Icon in the project workspace or display the message in the project window and designate the destination where the message is to be pasted 4 Left click the Paste Icon on the toolbar or press the Ctrl V Keys Alterna tively right click to display a pop up menu and then select Paste in the pop up menu Paste can also be selected from the Edit Menu The pasted message will be positioned at the end of the corresponding message list Note Make sure that another Copy or Cut operation does not take place during this procedure as this deletes the original copy 9 3 4 Deleting a Message MINNI ge Use the following procedure to delete messages Messages within the Sys tem protocols cannot be deleted 1 2 3 1 Select the icon of th
34. ON during execution of a PMCR instruction and turns ON the RTS when data is sent Possible to turn the DTR signal ON or OFF at any timing using the Open or Close command for each step Once the DTR signal is turned ON using the Open command it will remain ON until it is turned OFF using the Close command Furthermore once the DTR signal is turned ON using the Open command it will remain ON even after a sequence is completed and another sequence is started Therefore the DTR signal can be used for controlling more than one sequence Transmission control mode for getting the correct send in point to point contention communication For sending or receiving a large quantity of data this procedure separates data into several frames with delimiters Set when the external device supports the Xon Xoff flow control Set when the external device checks the DSR status Must be used if the internal RS 422 port is to be used Must be used also if an external RS 422 RS 485 converter is connected to RS 232C port Set when the external device supports contention control Set when the external device supports delimiter control Sequence Attributes Common to All Steps Section 3 2 Note Unless modem control is set the DTR on the port of the PMSU cannot be Note turned ON When both modem control and RTS CTS control are set the DTR complies with modem control and the RTS and CTS comply with RTS CTS flow control
35. PMCR instruction 2N 1 120 Executing a Created Communications Sequence CS CJ Section 3 8 3 7 4 Contents of Sequence Measuring temperature read in sequence No 101 of Temp Controller E5ZE read protocol e Sequence attribute setting em O o Receive finish monitoring time Tfr Send finish monitoring time Tis e Step attribute setting Step 00 only Cem O O oes O OS Repeat counter K Counter 8 constant e Presence of send receive message Send message name lt SD RX _1 gt R 1 2 RX0 N 1 00 LRC H parity 0 2 Byte ASCII 2A0D TT OT Header Address Data Check code Terminator Receive message name lt RV RX _1 gt R 1 2 RX00 amp W 2N 1 LRC H parity 0 2 Byte ASCII 2A0D a Header Address Data Check code Terminator 3 8 Executing a Created Communications Sequence CS CUJ Note This section describes how to execute the communications sequence described so far using a CS CJ PLC It is necessary to transfer the protocol that was created to the Serial Communications Board Unit in advance How ever the previously mentioned communications sequence is registered in sequence number 101 of the incorporated standard system protocol so the following describes the procedure for executing sequence number 101 It is assumed that the standard protocol is under the initial status When the sequence is changed for example by the CX Protocol return to the origina
36. Refer to SECTION 5 1 SECTION 10 1 70 2 SECTION 10 1 70 2 Note Ports in parentheses are for the C200HX HG HE SECTION 5 1 SECTION 5 1 SECTION 5 2 SECTION 7 SECTION 5 2 SECTION 8 SECTION 5 3 SECTION 9 SECTION 11 1 A send message in a step can be designated by choosing its message Incorporated Standard System Protocol Section 1 10 1 10 Incorporated Standard System Protocol The CX Protocol together with the PMSU provides the following 13 types of incorporated standard system protocols There are 12 types for the Commu nications Board of the C200HX HG HE because it does not support Compo Way F The protocols can be displayed by selecting the System Tab of the project workspace Note To transfer standard system protocols to the PMSU or create a new protocol by partially modifying one of the standard system protocols first copy the required standard system protocol to another project file and then use the project file The standard system protocols themselves cannot be edited or transferred The standard system protocols have been installed into the PMSU at our fac tory Protocol name Function S Protocol for sending a CompoWay F command and receiving responses from the devices incorpo rating the CompoWay F protocol Slave function This protocol operates only with the CS Cu Controller Protocol for controlling an E5LIK Digital Controller via the PMSU Procedures for reading the MV E5_K read and
37. Response Timeout default S000rm Select ToolBus or Host Link Baud Format S600 x LAE Unit Hu ale mk ink A Set to 7 2 E if in host link mode and to 8 1 N if in toolbus mode These settings refer to the data length the number of stop bits and the parity E even N none CS1G H CPLI42 Program Connecting the Peripheral Port to the Modem Settings for the peripheral port are made in the PLC Settings Window of the CX Programmer The setting method is the same as for the host link port above Set the serial communications mode to Host Link or Toolbus When making connections with the toolbus for the CS CJ Series connections can not be made via the modem using automatic recognition of the baud rate Connections must be made using the toolbus settings in the PLC system set tings Set pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front side of the CS CJ series CPU Unit to ON to follow the PLC system settings and set the serial communications mode for the peripheral port in the PLC Settings to ToolBus With the C200HX HG HE there is no automatic recognition function for the baud rate Modem Connections Note Section 10 4 Connecting the PMSU Ports 1 2 to the Modem Settings for the communications port of the PMSU are made in the I O Table Window of the CX Programmer Set the serial communications mode to Host Link It is also possible to make the settings for the PMSU communications port and transfer
38. SD43 1 2A0D LRG H parity0 2Byte ASCII RGI lt hd lt ad UDA detection time t SD07 1 240D LRG H parityX0 2Byte ASCI SRGD lt h gt lt ad E aerar ania van a SD08 1 2A0D LRG H parityO 2Byte ASCII SRAID lt h gt lt ad gt Manip variable limit re SDi44 1 2A0D LRG H parity0 2Byte ASCII RO 2 SRSC a gt input data fitter rae SD45 1 2A0D LRG H parity 2Byte ASCII RGI lt hd lt ad4 SD 46 1 240D LRG H parit 0 2Byte ASCII RGI h gt a gt 2A0D LRC H parityX0 2Byte ASOD RG 2 lt h gt lt a gt pe SD S6 1 SDO4 1 SD42 1 SDO1 1 SDO211 o gt 2 2 2 m E Fa C C Pa 1 Pa i Pa Pa 1 SOO boo COO coo boo boo boo boo COO ooo ooo ooo boo boo boo COO ooo ooo boo boo boo eee ooo j i j j j Aat I t oe or I et G or t 4 2 2 gt 2 gg GBH KKK KHKHK HH HHHHHHHAHA R Alarm hysteresis reac SDT Temperature input sh Level O parameter re 3 Level 1 parameter re Level 1 parameter re 3 Level 2 parameter re c3 Level 2 parameter re rc 3 General purpose reat EA Eend Message List Receive Message Lis R Display of Cases in a Matrix Matrices are managed separately from sequences Matrices can be referred to by their names from each step in a sequence a ee eee e a Gees c Level 1 parame
39. The data table will be displayed Ix CS1H CPUGF imi CIO i A imi T i C imi IA a ni Data Area Workspace jii j e The area displayed will depend on the AA T PLC model and CPU Unit type ja e For more details about area names at refer to the 12 2 3 List of Areas Note These operations are not supported for an NJ series CPU Unit 12 3 2 Editing I O Memory Data Editing Data 1 2 3 1 Left click the cell of the address to be edited in the PLC data window Mul tiple cells lines or rows can be selected 2 Input or edit the data according to the display format The PLC data table can be displayed and edited offline or online The edited data can be transferred to a PLC that is connected online so that the data in the PLC will be changed Refer to 12 5 I O Memory Transfer and Comparison if the edited data needs to be transferred to the PLC Note The cells corresponding to read only areas e g parts of SR area are dis played in gray Editing cannot be performed in gray cells Data Storage I O memory data can be stored using either of the following methods e Saving in project Select Save in Project from File Menu 309 I O Memory Display and Editing Section 12 3 e Saving as a different file MEM file Select Save to File from File Menu Saving in Project 1 2 3 1 Select Save in project from the File Menu in I O memory window The Save Dialog Box will be displayed Dave Areas t
40. amp W 2N 1 in the receive message changes as follows DM0101 DM0103 DM0105 DM0107 DM0109 DM0111 gt DM0113 DM0115 6 When the system ends the execution of the sequence the Port A Instruc tion Execution Flag 28908 will turn OFF 3 9 5 Confirming the Operation If the process variable is not stored successfully confirm the following points e System error FALYC e Confirm that the PLC s Setup is set correctly e Bit 28909 Port A Step Error Processing Flag is ON e Confirm that the PLC s Setup is correct Especially confirm whether port A and port B are not designated conversely e Confirm that the line distribution Refer to the Communications Boards Operation Manual W304 to connect the line is correct e Confirm the communication rate frame and unit number of the E5ZE e No error but data are not stored e Confirm that the RUN indicator of E5ZE is lit For details refer to the E5ZE Operation Manual H076 Note When trace operation is executed from the CX Protocol from that point the Serial Communications Board performs a trace on chronological data in the send receive message up to 670 bytes Using this it is possible to confirm what kind of messages is sent and received at each step For details about traces refer to SECTION 12 Tracing and Monitoring 3 10 Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas PMSU status Sequence and step execution status are allocated to the fol lowin
41. confirmed from the ladder program The corresponding bits for the stored case number will only be set to 1 ON for the Execution Comple tion Receive Number Storage Flag when the matrix has been desig nated by the Receive Send amp Receive command It will be cleared to 0 if there is no matrix or another com mand is executed Current Repeat CS CJ CIO 1914 CS CJ and C200HX HG HE Stores When the When Count CIO 1924 n 14 the repeat count value N repeat sequence n 24 bits 00 to Cleared when either the sequence count is starts 07 starts executing STUP is executed refreshed C200HX HG HE the PMSU is restarted or step is CIO 284 CIO executed 285 bits 00 to 07 The current value N will differ according to the method for desig nating initial values Reset After starting that step and setting N to 0 execute the set num ber of retries Hold After starting that step set the number of retries while holding the value of N See note 3 143 Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas Sequence Set Repeat Count CS CJ CIO 1914 monitor Step error 144 Sequence End Completion Flag Sequence Abort Completion Flag Step Error Processing Exe cution Flag Trace Execution Flag Continuous Trace Start Stop Flag Shot Trace Start Stop Flag Forced Abort Flag Forced Abort Generated Flag CIO 1924 n 14 n 24 bits 08 to 15 C200HX HG HE None CS CJ ClO 1909 CIO 1919 n 9
42. cuted Note With the CS CuJ there is a time lag after send operations for the half duplex Clear Process Flush Command for Receive Buffer CS CJ only 64 refer to page 72 PMSU Send amp Receive process com mand Send buffer Send message Approx 60 us later Receive buffer Receive message Note Retry can be designated with Send amp Receive By executing the Flush command all the data in the receive buffer is cleared For example this is used in the full duplex mode before executing the receive process to clear data left in the receive buffer because of noise PMSU Receive buffer Flush command Clear execution This command can also be used for example in full duplex mode when a communications error occurs Without aborting switch the step in Goto exe cute the Flush command in the step clear the receive buffer and retry Retry Step Send amp Receive Normal completiorm Protocol Macro Outline Section 3 1 Integration of Variables One of the characteristics of sending and receiving data with the protocol macro function is the way that instructions variables for reading from and writing to I O memory in the CPU Unit can be integrated in the send and receive messages themselves Sending Example CS CJ CPU Unit PMSU Sequence No 001 Send message Sequence execution mee Send command I O memory Send address Send data Hexadecimal ASCII conversion Hexadeci
43. designate a target PLC model and perform the communications setup between the personal computer and the PLC b Using a Programming Device for PLC s CPU Unit perform the PLC setup according to a connected port PLC Setup of the Serial Communications Board PLC Setup of the Serial Communications Unit Allocated DM area D32000 to D32767 Allocated DM area D30000x100 Unit No D32000 to D32009 PLC setup of port 1 Unit No DM area D32010 to D32019 PLC setup of port 2 I0 D30000 to D30099 mioma PLC sein obon D32020 to D32767 Reserved by the system D30100 to D30199 m 10 to m 19 PLC setup of port 2 D30200 to D30299 m 20 to m 99 Not used D30300 to D30399 D30400 to D30499 5 D30500 to D30599 6 D30600 to D30699 8 D30800 to D30899 9 _ D30900 to D30999 B D31100t0 D31199 DP D31300t0 D31399 D31400 to D31499 D31500 to D31599 Example Setting the Default Communications Conditions m D30000 100xUnit No oe el _Portt Port Portt Port D32000 D32010 m 10 15 JO Start bit 1 bit Data length 7 bits Parity Even Stop bit 2 bits Came Protocol macro 27 Basic Procedure of the Protocol Macro Usage Section 1 11 Using the CX Protocol make the settings for communications ports 1 and 2 of the PMSU and transfer the settings to the PLC For more information refer to 70 6 PMSU Communications Port Settings and 10 7 Transfer of Communications Port Setting Data to PLC 3 External Device Settings Proce
44. for C200HE 1 to 3 Port B mode setting 0 Host link initial value 1 No RS 232 procedure 2 1 1 link for Slave 3 1 1 link for Master 4 NT link 1 1 5 NT link 1 N 6 Port B baud rate settings bps Protocol macro 00 1 200 initial value 01 2 400 02 4 800 03 9 600 04 19 200 Port B frame format settings Start bit Data length 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit 8 bits Stop bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 2 bits 2 bits 2 bits 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 2 bits 2 bits 2 bits Parity Even initial value Odd Without Even Odd Without Even Odd Without Even Odd Without Appendix B Once a 1 1 link with a Master has been set it cannot be changed Only valid when set separately 359 PLC Setup and PMSU Settings Appendix B Settings Related to Port A Word number DM 6555 00 to 03 Host link Port A communications conditions standard format set No procedure _ tings l PNN 0 Standard settings initial values Protocol macro Start bit 1 bit Data length 7 bits Parity even Stop bit 2 bits Baud rate 9 600bps 01 Set separately DM 6556 00 to 15 enabled 04 to 07 Host link CTS control enable disable settings No procedure 0 Without initial value l 1 With 1 1 link 08 to 11 1 1 link Master Port A 1 1 link area Once 1 1 link NT link 1 N 0 LROO to 63
45. n 19 bit 11 C200HX HG HE CIO 289 bits 10 14 CS CJ CIO 1909 CIO 1919 n 9 n 19 bit 10 C200HX HG HE CIO 283 CIO 283 bits 07 15 CS CJ CIO 1909 CIO 1919 n 9 n 19 bit 14 C200HX HG HE CIO 289 bits 09 13 CS CJU ClO 1909 CIO 1919 n 9 n 19 bit 12 C200HX HG HE CIO 286 bits 00 01 CS CJ ClO 1900 CIO n bits 01 09 C200HX HG HE CIO 289 bits 02 03 CS CJ CIO 1900 CIO n bits 02 10 C200HX HG HE CIO 289 bits 04 05 CS CJ CIO 1900 CIO n bits 03 11 C200HX HG HE CIO 289 bits 11 15 CS CJ CIO 1909 CIO 1919 n 9 n 19 bit 13 C200HX HG HE None CS CJ only Stores the attempts Set number of retries that are Si to execute that ae Cleared when either the sequence starts executing STUP is executed the PMSU is restarted or step is executed CS CJ and C200HX HG HE Set to 1 ON when sequence processing is completed or the sequence ends due to an error See note 4 CS CJ and C200HX HG HE Set to 1 ON when sequence processing is completed or is aborted due to an error 1 Sequence abort completed 0 Sequence abort not completed CS CJ and C200HX HG HE Set to 1 ON when step ends in an error When processing ends normally after retries it remains at 0 1 Step ended in error 0 Step ended normally CS CJ and C200HX HG HE Set to 1 ON when send or receive mes sage time series data is being traced using CX Protocol CS CJ and C200
46. or double click the PMSU Icon in the project window right pane 4 Left click the Trace 1 or Trace 2 for the CS CJ and Trace A or Trace B for the C200HX HG HE to select a desired item Right click to display a pop up Menu and point to Start Trace and select Continuous Trace or One shot Trace from the submenu Alternatively left click the Start Continu ES ous Trace Icon or Start One shot Trace Icon on the toolbar It can also be os selected from the PLC Menu Tracing conditions of the Communications Board will be displayed on the Status Field Once the trace is started Performing Continuous Trace or Performing One shot Trace will be displayed When the trace is stopped Trace Stop will be displayed 5 To stop tracing left click the Trace 1 or Trace 2 for the CS CJ and Trace A or Trace B for the C200HX HG HE to select a desired item Right click to display a pop up menu and select Stop Trace from the pop up menu m Alternatively left click the Stop Trace Icon on the toolbar It can also be se Ii lected from the PLC Menu 300 Tracing Transmission Lines Section 12 1 12 1 4 Reading Trace Data from PMSU The trade data in the buffer of the PMSU can be uploaded to the project by using the following procedure 1 2 3 1 Connect the PLC for online communications and set the PLC to Monitor mode or Program mode 2 Double click the PLC Icon 3 Left click the PMSU Icon for the communications port to be traced in the project
47. retried O on ZBO O aD c2 Sc Qo 2E oE 50 OO o op Next process Error process Note The Wait Flush Open and Close commands are for the CS CJ protocol mac ros They are not supported by the C200HX HG HE protocol macros Setup Parameters that Commonly Affect Steps in Each Sequence Description Sets the control mode for control signals including flow control Sets area in which data is shared between the PLC and the PMSU Sets monitoring time for send and receive process Sets timing of writing receive data into PLC s I O memory Setup Parameters for Each Step Setup content Send Receive Send amp Receive Wait Flush Open or Close Sets message to be sent for the Send command Sets message expected to be received for the Receive command peek Rl nga message and Sets messages to be sent and expected to be received for the Send amp Receive Message receive peek Rl nga command Selects the next process according to the content of the received message when the Matrix command is Receive or Send amp Receive and up to 15 messages can be expected to be received menea Counce The number of times iterating the step 0 to 255 Using this parameter N allows to j change the content of send and receive messages Rev comai Used only for Send amp Receive command y e the command when a retry cause such as an error occurs 0 to 9 times Send waitin Used only for Send or Send amp Receive comm
48. sending The time required for the received data transmission from the external device Use two to five times the calculated time because idle time exists between the receive characters The time required for the received data conversion from the external device based on the specified conversion mode which finishes at the end of data transfer Received data writing One cycle time maximum The time required to finish received process time data transfer to I O memory Note Although the data conversion process times of 2 and 6 vary according to the PLC operation status the maximum values can roughly be estimated by the following calculation formula 2 The send data conversion process time 10 000 us one byte conversion time x number of conversion bytes one byte conversion time No conversion 15 us ASCII conversion 40 us hexadecimal conversion 55 us 6 The receive data conversion process time 100 us one byte conversion time x number of conversion bytes one byte conversion time No conver sion 15 us ASCII conversion 30 us hexadecimal conversion 15 us Communications Response Time Performance Section 4 8 e Communications Response Performance Using the Interrupt Notification Mode Illustrated below is the data flow when the event area operand address ing is used and the response type is the interrupt mode CPU Unit Board Exter
49. 1 Connecting the Serial Communications Unit e Mounting to an NJ series and CJ series CPU Unit Power Supply Unit CPU Unit OOO0O0O ogo Serial Communications Unit Supported PLC Models and Personal Computers Section 1 3 e Mounting to a CP series CPU Unit CJ1W TERO1 CP1W EXT01 CJ series End Cover CP1H CPU Unit CJ series Unit Adapter Included with CJ series Unit Adapter Connect the Serial Communications Unit to one of these C200HX HG HE PLCs Product Installation Enhanced Specifications name functions see note C200HW COM04 E E pe OPU bus interface RS 232C port x 1 C200HW COM04 EV 1 a With the protocol macro function Installed in the cpy C200HW COM05 E RS 232C port x 2 Unit C200HW COMO5 EV1 a With the protocol macro
50. 1 words checksum At the same time fora bit 00 Serial Communications Board the Board only A424 ERR ALM indicator on the CPU Unit bit 09 will flash and the RDY indicator will _ flash at intervals of 1 s Auxiliary ects aay ies iz Word A424 bit 09 will turn ON For 68 bit O the Serial Communications Unit the RDY or ERC indicators will light C200HX HG HE Set to 1 ON when an error is detected in the Pro tocol data checksum At the same time the ERR indicator on the CPU Unit or the RDY indicator will flash CIO 268 bit 2 will turn ON Error is generated when the commu nications connector comes lose dur ing protocol data transmission or when the power to the PLC is OFF Using CX Protocol resend the pro tocol data Protocol Macro CS Board only CS Set to 1 ON when data read When Execution Error A424bit10 No_ write area exceeded error code 3 sequence Unit or protocol macro syntax error error starts C200HX HG HE Code 4 CIO 268 bit 11 C200HX HG HE Set to 1 ON for port B bit 12 any of the following No protocol port A macro function error code 1 sequence number error error code 2 data write area exceeded error code 3 or protocol macro syntax error error code 4 System Setting CS CJ CIO 1906 CS CJ and C200HX HG HE Set to Error CIO 1916 n 6 1 ON when a PLC Setup error n 16 bit 01 occurs in the DM Area Change the Board only A424 system settings and turn ON the bit 08 N
51. 12 01 O2 designated here will be used 1 Len IN Area Addr Len None A o jo Mone z o o Cancel Left click the Link Word Field of the sequence and then left click the Enter Button or press the Enter Key The Link Channel Information Dialog Box will be displayed Link 2 Len OWT Area Addr Len Perform Link 1 setting according to the following procedure Follow the same procedure for the Link 2 2 3 4 5 1 2 Select an appropriate area CIO WR LR HR AR DM from the IN Area drop down list in the Link 1 Field Select None if setting is not required Input the first word address of the IN Area of Link 1 in the Addr Field Input the number of words of the IN Area of Link 1 into the Len Field Set the area type beginning address and length for the OUT Area accord ing to the same procedure Either press the OK Button to accept the setting or press the Cancel But ton to leave the settings unchanged The areas and setting ranges that can be used for link words are shown in the following list PLC model C200HX HGIHE Area and ClO 0000 to 6143 CIO note 1 000 to 511 address thatcan WR 000 to 511 LR 00 to 63 be used for link HR 000 to 511 HR 00 to 99 word setting AR 000 to 959 AR 00 to 27 DM 00000 to 32767 DM 0000 to 6655 EM note 2 00000 to 32767 EM note 2 0000 to 6143 The sum of 11 01 12 02 The sum of 11 01 12 02 must be equal to or less than must be equal to or less th
52. 3 Double click the Communications Port Icon or right click the Communi iar cations Port Icon and select Edit Communications Port Settings from the pop up menu Alternatively left click the Communications Port Icon and select Edit Communications Port Settings from the PLC Menu The Communications Port Settings Dialog Box will be displayed with Port 1 2 if the CS CJ is used and Port A B if the C200HX HG HE is used These Dialog Boxes are the same in appearance 281 Transfer of Communications Port Setting Data to PLC Section 10 7 Communications Port Settings 7 x Fort 1 Communication Method situate ae Unit o Delay x 10 J Transmission Method Hai Duplex Maximum Length fae E F F Cis Enable Max PT Unit 4 5 Communication if Standard Comms Format Baud Rate 3600 Parity Even Data Length 7 Bits Stoo Bits 2 Bits Cancel Set the Communication Method Field to Protocol Macro If the standard communications conditions are used leave the Standard Comms Format check box in the Communication Field as is If the communications conditions are changed turn OFF the check mark of the check box and set the baud rate data length parity and number of stop bits Left click the OK Button to enter the settings Left click the Cancel Button to leave the settings unchanged Note Ifthe PLC is CS CJ and the Communication Method Field is set to Protocol Macro a communications baud
53. 4 Ladder Programming Method 4 4 1 CS CJ 160 e To avoid executing a PMCR instruction while another PMCR instruction is being executed the Communications Port Enabled Flag should be switched from the normally open input condition to the normally closed input condition e Perform the sequence execution result read process and the sequence error termination process under the condition that the Protocol Macro Execution Flag is cleared Note Before executing a PMCR instruction with the CS CJ Series ensure that the serial communications mode for the communications port to be used is set to protocol macro If a PMCR instruction is executed with the port set to Host Link SYSWAY messages that cannot be understood by the application will be output from the serial communications port Example Communications Protocol Macro Execution Port Enabled Flag Flag for port 2 of Serial Communications Communications Board port 0 Input condition 191915 A20200 4 PMCR 191915 DIFD 14 A Sequence execution result reading process Sequence error termination process Example The execution of the protocol Temperature Controller E5_IK Read System Sequence No 000 read process value CS1W SCB41 V1 Serial Communications Board Port 2 The Temperature Controller unit number is spe cified the send data of the process value read command is sent and the process value in the response is received in the specified word Se
54. 5 1 5 1 Creating Projects and Protocols 5 1 1 Creating a New Project Use the following procedure to create a new project Create a new project following the steps 1 and 2 below if the CX Protocol has been started from the Windows Start Menu or by right clicking a Serial Com munications Board Unit in the I O Table Window opened from the CX Pro grammer and selecting Start Special Application Start Only from the pop up menu Steps 1 and 2 will not be required if the CX Protocol has been started by selecting Start Special Application Start with Settings Inherited from the pop up menu A new project will be automatically created and the Device Type setting and online offline status will be inherited from the CX Programmer 1 2 3 1 Select New from the File Menu or left click the New Button from the tool Gi bar Alternatively a new project is created by pressing the Ctrl N Keys 2 The following window will be displayed Select the device type and network type Device Name NMewPLO Device Type C200HE Settings Network Type Ermas way Settings l Comment cancel _ For details of settings refer to 10 2 Communications Settings between Personal Computer and PLC 204 Creating Projects and Protocols Section 5 1 3 The following project window will be displayed when the device type is se lected 13 x 44 CxX Protocal PSwil Eile Edit View Protocol PLC Tools Window Help
55. Address Designate the address when a message is subjected to 1 N communications A constant or variable can be designated Using the repeat counter variable N for the variable can change the address for each sending and receiving Select the address type constant variable and enter data Example Type variable conversion none data R 1 2 screen display R 1 2 3 4 4 Length Sending Common to C200HX HG HE and CS CJ Receiving 96 Example Note Upon sending calculations are automatically performed for the message item corresponding to the length itself and adds the item Unit Number of bytes It is possible to set the range for the item to be calculated Protocol Macro for C200HX HG HE This length data is not checked upon reception Designate the length size one byte two bytes data type ASCII binary according to the communications designation of the device at the communica tions partner 1 byte binary initial value O screen display 0 1 Byte BIN The length calculation range is set in the Message Editor dialog Protocol Macro for CS CJ This length data is checked upon reception If there is no terminator designation an amount of message items corre sponding to the length number of bytes set in the expected message will be Communication Message Attributes Section 3 4 Note Example Note Example Note Expected message extracted from the receive buffer and processed as the r
56. CO MA VV SB 5P X AWG28 Ltd non UL item Wire path length Up to 15m Connection Signals on the Personal Computer Side C Pin number Symbo C a VG Grou a a G Data C E E zooo i es aoso C C E en Signal Ground 44 Installing and Uninstalling the Software Section 2 2 Wiring Cables The following diagram shows the wiring of cables connecting a PLC and com puter D sub 9 pin plug Male D sub 9 pin plug Female PLC Computer Connector hood FG Connector hood FG Shield 1 e ee Sette haseen 1 FG SD 2 2 RD RD 3 3 SD RTS 4 7 RTS CTS 5 8 CTS SG 9 5 SG 2 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Software The CX Protocol is installed from the CX One Installer For details refer to the CX One Setup Manual Cat No W463 which is provided with the CX One 2 3 Startup Be a23 Use the following procedure to start the CX Protocol 1 Left click the Start Button on the taskbar and select Programs Omron 2 Select the Omron folder Ce Protocol 3 Select the CX Protocol folder 4 Left click the CX Protocol program to start the CX Protocol When the P Cx Protocol CX Protocol is started the standard system protocol will be displayed 44 CX Protocol System Protocols File View Help alela ele alee SEs 2a E EE SSS System Protocols For Help press F1 ooo TS ee es e
57. COML indicators serial are not lit communications mode in the allo cated DM are m m 10 to F hexa decimal cyclic test serial commu nications mode connect the cycli cally wired con nectors and execute the cyclic test turn ON port 1 bit 06 and port 2 bit 14 of the n word Test status is reflected on n 9 n 19 lf the test results show an error replace the PMSU SDLI RDLJ Transmission error Bit 15 transmis System settings Review the COML indicators occurs sion error in the such as baud rate system settings are lit However allocated data or frame format Review the communications area n 8 n 18 are different from settings and cannot be per turns ON those of the desti program of the formed and com One of bits 0 to 14 Nation device destination device munications errors errors turns ON Bits do not match baud rate frame occur from time to due to baud rate format etc Allocated data time area n 5 n 15 exceeding the per missible range system settings with port settings mismatching stop bits etc are different from those of the desti nation device 178 Errors at the Protocol Execution Serial communications mode setting Serial communications mode is set to protocol macro Serial communications mode is set to protocol macro Problem Indicator display SDL_I RDL COML indicators are lit However communications cannot be per form
58. CTS flow control will be per formed only when receiving If the RTS CTS Field is set to Send amp Receive RTS CTS flow control will be performed for both send and receive processing Setting Sequences Note 1 2 3 Section 7 1 Xon Xoff Flow Control Data can be transmitted through the Xon Xoff flow control Select an Xon Xoff control method from the drop down list None Send Receive and Send amp Receive are available If the Xon Xoff Field is set to None Xon Xoff flow control will not be per formed If the Xon Xoff Field is set to Send Xon Xoff flow control will be performed only when sending If the Xon Xoff Field is set to Receive Xon Xoff flow control will be performed only when receiving If the Xon Xoff Field is set to Send amp Receive Xon Xoff flow control will be performed for both send and receive processing If both the RTS CTS flow control and Xon Xoff control are set for the CS CJ Series a Protocol Macro Syntax Error will be displayed when protocol macro is executed Modem Control Data can be transmitted through the modem control Left click the Modem check box to either enable or disable the modem control If the Modem check box is not checked modem control will not be performed If the Modem check box is checked modem control will be performed Contention Control Data can be transmitted under the contention control Left click the Conten tion check box to either enable or disable contention
59. CX Protocol System Protocols File Edit Yiew Protocol PLC Tools Window Help alela Hee s2 oaz EJ E japi Protocols Controller E5_K read SYSTEN Controller E5_K write SYST Temp Controller ESZE read S Temp Controller ESZE write Temp Controller E5_J Controller E5100 Intell Signal Processor K3T_ Bar Code Reader 500 520 Lazer Micro Meter 3Z4L o0 SYS visual Inspe Sys F200 300 350 450 499 SYSTEM D Controller 600 620 1 g SY Hayes modem AT commands 550 599 SYSTEM CompovWayiF B00 649 SYSTEM i Controller E5_K read H Controller E5_K write H Temp Controller ESZE reac H O Temp Controller ESZE vorite H Temp Controller E5_J H Controller ES100_ H Intell Signal Processor K3T H Bar Code Reader 500 5 H Lazer Micro Meter 324L Visual Inspe Sys F200 300 H O ID Controller 600 620 E Hayes modem AT comman H O Compoway F PIP PP PIRI RIP BRIBES 4 4 SP Compiler KIR Ma Ei PSW1 ajoj x For Help press F1 rf a P aa AStart 4 CX Protocol System QJ Exploring C BY Microsoft Word Documentt E B 3 44PM Note The system protocol varies with the System The contents of the protocol cannot be edited directly or displayed on screen in the right pane The contents can be edited or displayed by copying the system protocol to a user defined protocol but the protocol type changes to User once p
60. Description Variable Y Linear expres a O to 255 for C200HX HG HE sion or constant or O to 1 000 for CS CJ including the b 1 to 255 for C200HX HG HE repeat counter or 1 to 1 000 for CS CJ N Repeat counter value Wildcard Receive any length of data Word Word read Designated by Designated start designation I O mem the second address ory gt send operand for n The linear data C200HX HG expression aN HE or the third b which operand for CS includes the CJ of the repeat counter PMCR N can be instruction designated for Designated by the link word Designated directly Supports calculation of LRC LRC2 CRC CCITT CRC 16 SUM SUM1 and SUM2 LRC2 and SUM1 are only for the CS CUJ protocol macro CS CJ 1 000 bytes possible to set to a range between 200 and 1000 bytes Also possible to set to this range at a control of RTS CTS flow X on X off flow or delimiter C200HX HG HE 256 bytes Within 200 bytes of one step receiving message at a control of RTS CTS flow X on X off flow or delimiter Possible to trace chronological data of send receive messages CS CJ Data length that can be traced is 1 700 bytes characters C200HX HG HE Data length that can be traced is 670 bytes characters Possible to trace changes in the control signals such as step number RTS or CTS Differences between Protocol Macros Section 1 13 1 12 2 Specifications of the CX Protocol The following con
61. Flags when Overrun Errors Framing Errors and Parity Errors are Detected CS CJ and C200HX HG HE When any of the above errors are detected in the protocol macro function the information on the status of the reception data error will be stored in the reception buffer Whether or not the appropriate error flag will turn ON depends on the following conditions e When error information data is included in the data which matches the reception expected message When the receive operation is performed the reception buffer is searched for a reception expected message and if the data matches this it will be treated as reception data If this reception data contains error information all the error flags will turn ON In the following example 100 bytes of data matching the reception expected message were received 100 bytes Error Flag ON P Parity Error When error information data is included in the data which does not match the reception expected message If this data does not match the reception expected message and contains error information the data will be corrupted and the error flag status will not change For trace information all error information obtained from the reception buff er will be stored within the trace data capacity range CS CJ only In the following example data which did not match the reception expected mes sage contained a parity error Corrupt Error flags do not change Reception Buffer CS CJ
62. Framing Error CIO CIO n 8 n 18 1 Framing error 1908 1918 0 Normal Overrun Error ClO CIO n 8 n 18 1908 1918 Does not turn ON Timeout Error CIO CIO n 8 n 18 1908 1918 in C200HE HX HG protocol Command CIO CIO n 8 n 18 Error 1908 1918 FCS Check CIO CIO n 18 Error 1908 1918 macro mode 1 Overrun error 0 Normal Does not turn ON in C200HE HX HG protocol macro mode 1 Timeout error Tis Tfr or Tr 0 Normal Does not turn ON in C200HE HX HG protocol macro mode 1 Command error reception data constant compari son does not agree 0 No command error Does not turn ON in C200HE HX HG protocol macro mode 1 FCS check error check codes do not agree 0 Normal Does not turn ON in C200HE HX HG protocol macro mode 139 Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas Section 3 10 Communica Communica tions Board tions Board tions Unit Allocation Area Special Auxiliary Area Port 1 So 2 Port1 So 2 al Ee word word word word ray Ban Transfer Checksum None inl CIO Error Gen Error 283 erated Sta tus Port Communi cations Error CS Serial CS CJ Serial C200HX HG HE Communica Contents mon Exceeded Normal Transmis Tr Receive CIO CIO n 18 Exceeded sion Error wait monitor 1908 1918 Normal Gener ing time ated Sta Exceeded tus each port 12 Tfr Receive CIO CIO n 18 13 finish monitor 1908 1918 ing time Exceed
63. Macro Function for restrictions Creation of send frames and receive expected frames according to the desired communications frame specifications Enables creation of almost all send frames frames composed of commands data and so on and receive expected frames frames composed of responses and so on according to the communications frame message specifications of external devices Support for operation functions relating to communications Supports error check code calculation frame length calculation during trans mission process and numeral data conversion between ASCII and hexadeci mal Support for the send and receive time monitoring function Supports the receive wait monitoring receive finish monitoring and send fin ish monitoring functions This function lets you designate whether to finish send receive process or to start retry process when those monitoring times are exceeded Support for retry process Lets you designate only by designating the number of retries whether to automatically execute send receive retries when an error occurs aa a of variables for read write process with PLC into send frames and receive expected rames Enables integration of variables for read process from PLC s I O memory into send frames messages themselves Data in the PLC that has been read during transmission process can be used for addresses destinations or data This function also enables integration of variables for write pr
64. Matrix can also be selected from the Protocol Menu Note A new matrix cannot be created from any step Create it in the matrix list Creating a New Case for a Matrix Use the following procedure to create a new message in a matrix 1 2 3 1 Left click the Matrix List Icon in the project workspace and select and highlight the matrix for which a new case is created Alternatively double FEG click the Matrix Icon in the project window 2 Select Matrix Case by right clicking the matrix position in the project work space Alternatively select the Create from the pop up menu and select Matrix or select Matrix from the Protocol Menu i Case Number Receive Message Next Process EA oo Bad L Hi Other End 210 System Protocol Display and Editing Section 5 4 5 4 System Protocol Display and Editing 5 4 1 Displaying System Protocols System protocols are available for communications with OMRON s Units amp Systern such as the Temperature Controller Panel Meter Bar code Reader and Modem By clicking the System Tab on the bottom of the project workspace the system protocol list will be displayed By double clicking the Project Icon in the project workspace and double clicking the Protocol List Icon the pro tocol list will be displayed in the project window Alternatively the protocol list will be displayed by double clicking the Protocol List Icon in the project win dow a i ip p i oe BE ES
65. Memory Area 0000 0 ee 295 11 4 3 Converting C200HX HG HE Protocol into CS CJ Protocol 296 285 Transferring and Reading Protocol Data between the Computer and PMSU Section 11 1 11 1 Transferring and Reading Protocol Data between the Computer and PMSU 11 1 1 Transferring Data from the Computer to the PMSU N Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a protocol to another node or editing the I O area Doing either of these without confirming safety may result in injury N Caution Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before changing the operating mode of the CPU Unit Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation N Caution Check the user protocol for proper execution before actually running it in the Unit Not checking the protocol may result in an unexpected operation Use the following procedure to download protocols to the PMSU from the computer 1 2 3 1 Connect to the PLC online and set the PLC operating mode to Program mode 2 Double click the Protocol List Icon in the project workspace left pane to list the protocols in the project window right pane 3 Select a protocol to download More than one protocol can be selected by 286 pressing the Shift Key and selecting another protocol to extend the selec tion or by pressing the Ctrl Key and selecting another protocol to add to the selection Transferring and Reading Protocol Data between the
66. No conversion hexadecimal to ASCII conversion or ASCII to hexadecimal conversion Direction of read write can be designated Specifica X Y message tion X Effective address source or destination address method Y Data size 1 to 1 000 for CS CJ and 1 to 255 for C200HX HG HE Data size is equal to the number of bites on transmission path Word Word read Designated by Designated start designation I O the second address n memory operand for The linear send C200HX HG expression data HE or the third aN b which operand for CS includes the CJ of the repeat counter PMCR N can be instruction designated for Designated by the link word Designated directly Designated by the third operand for C200HX HG HE or the fourth operand for CS CJ of the PMCR instruction Designated by the link word Designated directly Wildcard x Receive any data address only for receive message Linear expres aN b a O to 255 for C200HX HG HE sion or constant or O to 1 000 for CS CJ b 1 to 255 for C200HX HG HE Word write receive data gt I O memory including the repeat counter or 1 to 1 000 for CS CJ N Repeat counter value 35 Specifications Step content Address attributes and data attributes in send or receive message Error check code The maximum length of the send or the receive message Trace function 36 Section 1 12
67. ON 2 OFF Set to 9 600 bps Note After changing the DIP switch settings turn OFF and ON the power supply once 3 9 3 Creating Ladder Programs The protocol is executed by the PMCR instruction of the PLC For details about related auxiliary area and data areas refer to page 134 e PMCR instruction specification e Function Calls the send receive sequence number registered in the PMSU and executing the send receive sequence of the corresponding sending reception sequence and sends receives data to from the gen eral purpose external device through port A or B of the PMSU e Meaning of Operand C Control data PMCR 15 12 11 8 7 0 _ Send receive sequence No 000 to 999 BCD Port designation 1 Port A 2 Port B S Send data first word number Set the first word at the data area where data required for setting is stored 130 Executing a Created Communications Sequence C200HX HG HE Section 3 9 Note When no send data is found be sure to set to 0000 Setting to another con stant or word generates an error ER Flag 25503 is ON and the PMCR instruction is not executed Send data of the number of words that are valid at S and the following are stored in S Actual send data is stored in S 1 and the following S Pee nee _ No of words that are valid including S S 1 Send data D Receive data storage starting address number Set the starting ad
68. OOS AT amp K3 Flow control Available For C200HX HG HE set to 0 not available ATSO 1 Automatic reception Available for 1 call ATS30 60 Abort timer ex 1 minute AT X4 Baud rate display Baud rate display busy dial tone detection AT amp DO DTR signal control Constantly ON AT amp Y1 Setting at power ON Load setting for profile 1 at power ON AT amp W1 Storage of present value area Stored as profile 1 contents in non volatile memory 272 Modem Connections Section 10 4 Connecting the PLC to the After the modem settings have been completed connect the PLC to the Modem Modem Settings for PLC Connections Port modem Connect the PLC to the modem referring to the example below Connecting to the Host Link Port or PMSU CS CJ Connector hood FG Connector hood FG ra e H Connecting to the Peripheral Port Connect a peripheral interface cable for IBM PC AT or compatible to the peripheral port of the PLC and connect the other end of the cable to a cable connected to the modem For details on peripheral interface cables refer to 1 4 System Configuration Create a connection cable Peripheral interface cable for IBM PC AT or compatible PLC D sub 25 pin male D sub 9 pin male Modem Connector hood FG ee RD a ATs po sq 20 8 om Communications conditions settings for the PLC port to be connected to the modem are made on a PLC Programming Device CX Programmer or per sonal compu
69. Other Abort D Note Set same header and same terminator for all the receive messages set by the matrix If headers or terminators are different by case number the system shall make a comparison for the received message based on the header and the terminator or the data length if the terminator is unavailable of a received message set as case number OO For example therefore if the header of case number 00 is and the header of case number 01 is 02 STX the system identifies that the comparison results in the unmatched even if the header of actually received message is 02 because it is different from the header of case number 00 115 Examples of Standard System Protocols Section 3 6 3 6 Examples of Standard System Protocols 3 6 1 Process Value Read Sequence of the Controller E5_K Read Protocol eet tenets ot seting Sequence inkwod o a I aon 0 E A Send message Header lt h gt PE SDIO aa oo Message editing lt h gt lt a gt 1 00 0000 lt c gt lt t gt Data Receplionmes Headers SO TA Terminators eao Error check code lt c gt LRC H parity 0 2 byte ASCII SRA Message editing lt h gt lt a gt 1 00 00 amp W 1 4 lt c gt lt t gt Data 116 Examples of Standard System Protocols Section 3 6 3 6 2 Modem Initialize MD24FB10V Sequence of Hayes Modem AT Commands Protocol ee a Sequence Link fLinkword Lk Wd oe con
70. PLC memory window If the PLC is connected online the I O memory data of the PLC can be moni tored Furthermore I O memory data edited in the PLC memory window can be transferred to the PLC The Board and Unit system settings can be per formed and the data can be transferred to the PLC 302 Note This window is not supported for an NJ series CPU Unit Outline of PLC Memory Window Section 12 2 Note 1 Do not monitor EM area used for file memory If monitoring is performed for this area it will become impossible to display any present values 2 Each I O memory area varies with the PLC or CPU model For details refer to the Operation Manual of the PLC in use 3 All I O memory data that can be transferred varies with the PLC mode For details refer to 12 5 I O Memory Transfer and Comparison 12 2 2 Main Functions 12 2 3 List of Areas The I O memory window has the following main functions e O memory display e O memory editing e O memory monitor e I O memory data transfer personal computer to PLC and vice versa e O memory data comparison The following table shows a list of I O memory areas that can be displayed or edited in the PLC memory window The abbreviations in the table are used in the PLC memory window CS CJ C200HX HG HE CIO I O Area Work Area Data Link IR I O Area and AR Area Area CPU Bus Area Special I O Unit Area Inner Board Area SYSMAC BUS Area I O Link Area C200H Special I O
71. PMSU uploading protocols and tracing data Click the right button and select a desired menu out CtritX Copy Ctri C Paste Gtrity elete Del cend Message Recewe Message 47 Outline of User Interface Section 2 5 2 5 1 48 Window Project Workspace Project Data will be displayed in the following hierarchy Sequences under the above protocol name sar ae Protocol List 7 amp Protocol Name i ___ gt Sequence o GS Name i i 27 Sequence O GS Name a Send Message i L List S KH Receive Message i i l u List __ feel Matrix List I 1 Ae Ge Lari ooo Matrix zh a h Protocol Name I Protocol Name shanna XT Trace List WE PLC E PMSU Unito H Unit F A Lists under the above protocol name A Project H Protocol List wh h gt Displays eal more Protocol than one mr Communications La Sequence a Send Message iT List a Receive Message List EE Matrix List Displays m only es Trace List one man Devices PLC in Board J 1 The data indicated to the right displays those in lower levels The data indicated to the right does not display those in lower levels Unit 16 from 0 to F Outline of User Interface Section 2 5 Project Window The following items will be displayed depending on selected data items i e the highlighted data in the project workspace Selected data in Item
72. Proto bar cols a z Download Com munications Port Settings Save Upload Commu H nications Port Trace tool bar Start one shot trace Start Continuous PLC status bar Off line PLC trace Mode EE ae 2 5 6 Status Bar The status bar displays the explanation of the menu or icon of the position where the cursor is located Download cammunications port settings Note Select the Tool Bar Icon by referring to the corresponding explanation of the icon displayed on the status bar 56 SECTION 3 Protocol Macro This section describes details of the protocol macro functions 3 1 Protocol Macro Outline s ani dacnct can caceread ore dhwea dl tute ntl feed ss 58 Shel cSequence Step SUuucttes 4 12d eeaucmuceear ees NERSE 58 3 1 2 Construction of Send Receive 0 ccc eee es 61 3 1 3 Transition Stage Between Steps 2 0 0 72 3 1 4 Setting Transmission Mode 0 0 00 cee eee 72 3 2 Sequence Attributes Common to All Steps 0 000000 0 eee 75 Jel ASD eee eA duro E E A E E TE E E 75 3 2 2 CX Protocol Setup Screen 0 0 0 ee 76 3 2 3 Transmission Control Parameter 0 0 00 e eee eee 76 3 2 4 Link Word Addressing i cscc wine a tua eat aclenad dace than 78 5 2 5 Response lyme c4 c45 doc chau aks eaehecdgeusgacdes deus 719 J20 Montornes TINE lt geen aiene ea ah Seats Ok ees ea Se 83 FE SSIEP AUMDUlCS tcc toe ecbtre ee E E ieee eee eealee 84 3 3 1 C
73. Protocol Copy it once and paste it into another project window to edit the data 2 The data imported from the PSS system setting file cannot be copied to the communications port for the CX Protocol 294 CS CJ Protocol and C200HX HG HE Protocol Section 11 4 11 4 CS CJ Protocol and C200HX HG HE Protocol The protocol macro for the CS CJ series PLCs is called the CS CJ Protocol and the protocol macro for the C200HX HG HE PLCs is called the C200HX HG HE Protocol With the CX Protocol the C200HX HG HE Protocol created with the SYSMAC PST can be downloaded to a CS CJ PMSU so that it can be used with the CS Cu In this case the I O memory area will be converted to one for the CS series In the same manner the CS series Protocol can be downloaded so that it can be used with a C200HX HG HE PSB With the CX Protocol either the CS CJ Protocol or C200HX HG HE Protocol can be selected when creating a new project file Since the commands and I O memory area designation are different between the CS CJ Protocol and C200HX HG HE Protocol observe the following pre cautions when downloading the protocol The standard system protocol of the CX Protocol is provided with the CS CJ Protocol 11 4 1 Downloading the Protocol Transferring C200HX HG HE Protocol to CS CJ CS CJ Protocol PMSU Transferring CS CJ Protocol to C200HX HG HE PMSU The C200HX HG HE Protocol can be transferred to the Serial Communica tions Board Unit fo
74. Protocol Data from the PMSU to the Computer and check the sequences steps and messages in the protocols Note Ifthe source code is not included with the protocol data and the data format of each message item is set to the constant control code ASCIl format that por tion will be displayed as follows tem With source code Without source code Protocol name Same as when transferring Same as when transferring from from computer to PLC computer to PLC Sequence name Same as when transferring Allocated automatically from computer to PLC NewSequence 1 NewSequence 2 etc Send message Same as when transferring a automatically name from computer to PLC _1 SD 1 _1 etc Receive message Same as when transferring srt aya name from computer to PLC _1 RV 3 _1 etc Matrix name Same as when transferring eres ees from computer to PLC Matrix Matrix 1 etc Constraint Same as when transferring Allocated automatically attributes in the from computer to PLC message 00 Hexadecimal to 1F Hexadecimal Control Code Example 00 Hexadecimal to NUL 1F Hexadecimal to US 20 Hexadecimal to 7E Hexadecimal ASCII Format Example to Q 31 to 1 ZF Hexadecimal Control Code Example ZF to DEL DEL to DEL 80 Hexadecimal to FF Hexadecimal Hexadecimal Format Example 80 to 80 FF to 80 11 2 Printing Protocols Each protocol can be printed with the following contents 1 2 3 1
75. Server OCX CX Server communications driver Failed to create the IO Table An error has occurred with the Reinstall CX Server OCX CX Server communications driver Failed to gain the access rights Attempting to download to protected Release access right by using CX Pro of the PLC PLC without sufficient access privi grammer lege Another application has locked Release the access rights of the PLC from access to the PLC or CX Protocol Another application has not become the condition to gain Disconnect from the PLC and then connect the access rights of the PLC to the PLC again Failed to load help contents The help file associated with Locate the help file and move back to appli CX Protocol is missing from the cation folder If the help file cannot be application folder found reinstall CX Protocol Failed to open communications Communications have failed with the PLC The device may Shut down any other application that may be accessing the PLC or switch them offline be busy Failed to Open the CX Server Connection has failed Reboot the computer and try again project file Failed to release the access Attempting to upload to protected Obtain the correct password or select a dif rights of the PLC PLC without sufficient access privi ferent PLC lege Failed to save the CX Server Connection has failed Reboot the computer and try again project file Goto number is too large The GOTO setti
76. Setting the Attnbutes cc ci asis ide ciatarcatedeabewiadesews OU he CML seg ate rage taco Becket sa AG oth ee ee Be hn ed ee hoes 8 2 1 Displaying the Step List 0 0 00 eee 5 2 2 NIOVING The Steps ses ddwak Gada et eay ad aie a Mow by aes yee S92 3 Weletine the SIcpS44ishsaad ad wa dda iis oe ea ede de ee ord S224 COPYN ING eS chaos esa sacha teens josey e wostabe SECTION 8 Step Setting and Editing 230 230 230 236 236 236 23T 237 229 Step Setting Section 8 1 8 1 Step Setting This section describes procedure for setting steps with the CX Protocol 8 1 1 Step Setting Screen For details about settings refer to 3 3 Step Attributes With Without Message repeat counter Retry count Send message response writing Error process Command Send wait time Receive message Next process Step Repeat Gommand Retry Send Wait Send Message Recv Message Response Next Error 00 RSET O01 Send amp Receive 3 Siagi 1 FOA A 1 TES Next Next 01 RSET O01 oend amp Receive J FEJ SOid2 1 miga d YES End Abort 8 1 2 Setting the Attributes The following table shows step attributes that can be set using the CX Proto col O Attribute Content Rapai Counts pene late Command Send Receive Send amp Receive Open Close 2 Rati Send Wait Time Ts Send Message Response Next End Next Goto Abort Error End Next Goto Abort Note 1 Default settings with the CX Protocol 2
77. Special Auxiliary Area SS O 1 Port2 Port1 Port2 oC oe word word word word aan mae Port Operating CIO CIO n 16 None None 1 Port operating 1906 1916 2 Port stopped Restart Flag A636 A636 A620 A620 ClO CIO 01 O to 1 Restart each port Bit 01 Bit02 Unit 289 289 No Bit No Bit 135 Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas Section 3 10 CS Serial CS CJ Serial Com C200HX HG HE Communica Contents Communica Communica mon tions Board tions Board tions Unit Allocation Area Special Auxiliary Area Auxiliary Special Auxiliary Area Port1 Port2 Port1 Port2 Port Port word word word word A B word word Protocol Protocol ClO ClO n 9 n 19 15 ClO ClO 12 1 Protocol Macro Macro Execu 1909 1919 289 289 macro Sequence tion Flag executing each port 0 Protocol macro Sequence abnormal execution Protocol CIO CIO n 9 n 19 OO0to CIO O8to CIO 12 to O No error Macro Error 1909 1919 03 286 11 286 15 1 No protocol Code each function port C200HX HG HE only 2 Sequence No error 3 Data read data write area exceeded error 4 Protocol data syntax error 136 Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas Type Sequence Monitor Step Error Communica tion Sequence No each port Execution Completion Step No code each port Execution Completion Step No Stor age Flag each port Execution Completion Step Matrix Case No
78. Specify the number of words of data to be retained in m If set to O or 1 the data received will not be retained and cleared to 0 The following protocol sends or receives data once and constantly or periodi cally executes the PMCR instruction for reading the received data according to the ladder program Stores the value at the time of reception failure m words Communications M sequence Clear Receive buffer 4 Reception failure Cleared value is stored ee e e e a a a u e e Receive area D 1 on When the receive area is retained Communications ts sequence Receive buffer Set A 1 Clear D 1 on 1 2 3 Receive area 4 I t t Reception failure l EA E E Set value is stored Functions of the Receive Data Storage Area Use the receive data storage area according to the following procedure 1 The 250 words of the PMSU receive buffer of the PMSU is cleared to 0 right after the PMCR instruction is executed Before the communications sequence is executed data starting from D 1 for the number of words D value 1 in the I O memory is overwritten on the receive buffer except at the beginning The receive buffer consid ers this as the initial value and waits for the results of Receive processing The contents of the receive buffer that exceed the number of words for D remain as the initial value of 0000 hexadecimal If the number of words is s
79. Unit Area and CompoBus D Area TKTaskFatAea oS waaa CdS wwoawa S Emmaa i Note The above areas are listed in the order of display in the data area workspace located in the I O memory window All I O memory areas displayed vary with the PLC model or CPU model 12 2 4 Starting and Quitting PLC Memory Window Starting PLC Memory Window and Displaying PLC Data Table 1 2 3 1 Right click the PLC Icon and select Memory from the pop up menu or from the PLC Menu 303 Outline of PLC Memory Window Section 12 2 Quitting PLC Memory Window 304 gs PLC Memory Fille View Window Help The following initial screen will be displayed Jox ae oe a a oono o eile CIO ee ee ee _ m mm Mi watt bimor iz Mddress Ready 2 Em Data Area Workspace e The area displayed will depend on the PLC model and CPU Unit type e For more details about area names refer to the area names list 2S5 1H CPUBF Program NUM Double click the name of the desired area in the data area workspace The PLC data table will be displayed The following example is the PLC data table of the CIO area of the CS CJ Series Select Exit from the File Menu in the PLC memory window The PLC memory window will close Outline of PLC Memory Window Section 12 2 12 2 5 Changing Display and Input Formats The display and input formats are selectable per I O memory area in the fol lowing methods provided that
80. Version 1 W504 Operation Manual SYSMAC CS CJ Series CS1W SCBL1 1 V1 CS1W SCUL 1 V1 CJ1W SCUL11 V1 CU1W SCUL 2 Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Unit Operation Manual SYSMAC CS CJ CP NSJ Series CS1G H CPULILIH CS1G H CPULILI EV1 CS1D CPULILIH CS1D CPULILIS CS1W SCULILI V1 CS1W SCBLILI V1 CJ2H CPU6L EIP CJ2H CPU6L CJ2M CPU1L CJ2M CPU3L CJ1H CPULJLIH R CJ1G H CPULILIH CJ1G CPULILIP CJ1G CPULIL CJ1M CPULIL CJ1W SCULILI V1 CP1L M LUULI LI CP1H XUOOLI L CP1H XAOUUOLI L CP1H YOUOULI L I CP1E EULIDU L_ CP1E NULUDLU L NSJU UULULI B G5D NSJU UULUL B M3D Communications Commands Reference Manual SYSMAC CJ Series CJ2H CPU6L I EIP CJ2H CPU6L CJ2M CPU1L CJ2M CPU3L Programmable Controllers Hardware User s Manual SYSMAC CJ Series CJ2H CPU6L EIP CJ2H CPU6L CJ2M CPU1L CJ2M CPU3L Programmable Controllers Software User s Manual W336 W342 W472 W473 Describes the procedures and operations of the Sysmac Studio including operations for functions function blocks and struc tured text programming Describes the use of Serial Communications Unit and Boards to perform serial communications with external devices including the usage of standard system protocols for OMRON products Describes the C series Host Link and FINS communications commands used with CS CJ CP series PLCs and NSJ series Controllers Provides an outline of and describes the design installation
81. a ladder program within the send receive message Sending and receiving will be carried out using the designated I O memory area It is possible to set the system to either write or not write the receive data in the buffer area having been converted under the designated conversion method after each step using the With Without Response Writing setting for step attributes When the receive process is executed following a step command which has been set to With Response Write the receive data in the receive buffer will generally be written to the CPU Units I O memory in one of the two ways shown below Set with the response type for sequence attributes For details refer to page 79 1 Scan notification mode With each CPU Unit scan receive data is written to I O memory Since the CPU Unit refreshes with each scan writing to the I O memory area will not take place simultaneously with receive process and there will be a time lag 2 Interrupt notification mode When data is received an interrupt is executed at the CPU Unit and the receive data is immediately written to the designated I O memory area Either the fixed number or the receive case number are possible for the interrupt program number Note After the sequence has been completed the data in the receive buffer will be read to I O memory by the scan notification method The I O memory address is set directly in the send receive message Since the CPU Unit refreshes with ea
82. alela see de a stem Protocols Ress O x Protocols se eo bi gt New Protocol List Trace List Traces VX Trace List 0 PLG Name Model GPU PLG NewPLC1 CS1H GPU6S3 For Help F1 ti UUM I tine Each new project is given a default name PSWL which is displayed in the title bar and may be changed prior to saving the project 5 1 2 Creating a New Protocol Use the following procedure to create a new protocol in the protocol list 1 2 3 1 Double click the Project Icon in the project workspace and select and ad highlight the protocol list Alternatively the protocol list is highlighted by et left clicking or double clicking the Protocol List Icon in the project window oi 2 Select Create by right clicking the Protocol List Icon in the project work aa space Alternatively point to Create from the pop up menu in the project window and select Protocol or select Protocol from the Protocol Menu 205 Creating Projects and Protocols Section 5 1 3 Select the protocol type by left clicking the CS CJ Protocol Icon or the C200HX HG HE Protocol Icon according to the protocol type 44 CX Protocol PSW File Edit View Protocol PLO Tools Window Help alejh S S 2 ne PSWi1 BBs New Protocol List AN Trace List H NewPLC1 Offline C51H CP JEn E Projects system e aE chase FI 5 1 3 Renaming a Protocol The new protocol under
83. applicable PLC model and communications settings Left click the OK Button The data can be edited with the CX Protocol The pro 293 Importing Protocol Data from PST PSS Files Section 11 3 tocol attribute will change to C200HX HG HE Refer to 11 4 CS CJ Proto col and C200HX HG HE Protocol for protocol attributes Note When Save is left clicked to save the imported file it will be saved as a CX Protocol file Once it is saved the file cannot be read with the SYSMAC PST Therefore if the file needs to be saved as a SYSMAC PST file select Save As and enter a different name When Save is selected a confirmation dialog box will be displayed Left click the OK Button if the data can be overwritten Use the following procedure to import data from a PSS file a 1 2 3 1 Select Open from the File Menu or left click the Open Icon on the toolbar Alternatively the file can be opened by pressing the Ctrl O Keys 2 The Open Dialog Box will be displayed Select a file type from the Type of File drop down list box 3 Select a PSS file from the list in the Open Dialog Box The current folder can be modified by selecting another folder from the Look in drop down list 4 Left click the Open Button or double click the selected file to open the file The contents of the PSS file will be displayed in the project window right pane F Ts4612273_ptl Faje e Protacoitist Protocols Note 1 This data cannot be edited with the CX
84. be retrieved from project files or from trace data files Oa Retrieving Trace Data from Trace List of Project Use the following procedure to retrieve trace data from the trace list in a project file 1 23 1 Left click the Project Icon to show the trace list 2 Left click the Trace List Icon 3 Double click the desired trace within the trace list Retrieving Existing PSS Trace Data Files Use the following procedure to open an existing PSS trace data file The trace data retrieved from the file cannot be added to projects 1 2 3 1 Select Open from the File Menu or click on the Open Icon from the toolbar 2 The Open Dialog Box will be displayed Check that the Files of type Field is preset to PSSDOS Trace Files ptr The current folder can be changed by selecting another folder from the Look in drop down list 3 Left click the Open Button or double click the selected trace data file to open the trace In order to close the Open Dialog Box without the trace data file opened left click the Cancel Button 301 Outline of PLC Memory Window Section 12 2 12 1 7 Printing Trace Data Traces can be printed directly from the CX Protocol Use the following proce dure to print a trace Send Waesace HEX Hecenve hlesseqe HEX step Miribe Rio Cis DTR DSR 0 1 2 3 1 2 3 Double click the Trace List Icon to list the traces in the project window i e the right pane Double click on a trace to d
85. can have a large effect on the longevity and reliability of the system Improper operating environments can lead to malfunction failure and other unforeseeable problems with the PLC system Be sure that the operating environment is within the specified condi tions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the life of the system 5 Application Precautions Observe the following precautions when using the PLC N WARNING Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury Always heed these precautions e Always ground the system to 100 Q or less when installing the system to protect against electrical shock e Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before attempting any of the following Performing any of the following with the power supply turned ON may lead to electrical shock e Mounting or removing any Units e g I O Units CPU Unit etc or memory cassettes e Assembling any devices or racks e Connecting or disconnecting any cables or wiring N Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of the PLC or system or could damage the PLC or PLC Units Always heed these precautions e Use the Units only with the power supplies and voltages specified in the operation manuals Other power supplies and voltages may damage the Units e Take measures to stabilize the power supply to conform to the rated sup ply if it is
86. cannot be recovered 216 Editing Protocols Section 6 2 6 2 4 Copying a Protocol Use the following procedure to copy a protocol Note System protocols can be copied but the protocol type will change to User once pasted into a new protocol list 1 2 3 1 Left click the icon of the protocol to be copied from the protocol list More than one protocol can be selected by pressing the Shift Key and selecting another protocol to extend the selection or by pressing the Ctrl Key and selecting another protocol to add to the selection 3a 2 Left click the Copy Icon from the toolbar or press the Ctrl C Keys Alter natively right click and select Copy from the pop up menu or select Copy from the Edit Menu 3 Display a protocol in the project window so that the copied protocol or pro tocols can be pasted into the protocol 4 Left click the Paste Icon from the toolbar or press the Ctrl V Keys Alter natively right click and select Paste from the pop up menu or select Paste from the Edit Menu The pasted protocols will be placed at the end of the protocol list 217 Editing Protocols Section 6 2 218 SECTION 7 Sequence Setting and Editing This section describes details of the setting and editing of sequences Tb Sets SCQUCHCCS 2 42 o allt Adak eee ees Pee ee Re ek eae ee ne 220 Tal Sequence Setuns SCreen s scictsnecNscicte ce teaaus aa 220 Tel Seine SCQUCMCeS lt 204 a baveutat shea tercedesew aie awe Aes 22
87. control If the Contention check box is not checked contention control will not be per formed If the Contention check box is checked contention control will be performed This means that in order to obtain the right to send a Send Request Code must be transmitted A send request code can be specified in Code ASCII or Hexadecimal Select a code from the Contention Send Request Code drop down list Select one from Code ASCII or HEX Code 1 Select Code from the drop down list 2 Left click the Edit Button The Code Entry Dialog Box will be displayed Code Entry 7 x 3 Select Special Code Up to four special codes may be entered Select the codes from the drop down list and left click the Insert Button to input the code s indicated 223 Setting Sequences Response Type 224 1 2 3 1 2 3 Note Section 7 1 Note Five or more special codes cannot be input Left click the Clear But ton to clear all the special codes and input them again from the be ginning Left click the Delete Button to delete the special code where the cursor is located Left click the lt lt or gt gt Button to move the cur sor position 4 Press the OK Button to accept the settings or press the Cancel Button to leave the settings unchanged ASCII 1 Select ASCII from the drop down list 2 Type in ASCII characters up to four characters in the right field Hexadecimal 1 Select HEX from the drop down list
88. data has been integrated into the reception settings message the PMSU will automatically write the data at the designated position in the message into I O memory when the PMSU receives the message CPU Unit PMSU PMCR instruction I O memory Send message I E CPU Unit PMSU Receive message _ aa T 6 I O memory Writes to I O memory 15 Protocol Macro Section 1 5 Creating Procedures for Sending and Receiving Communications Frames Messages 1 2 3 1 This function enables all the processing needed to send or receive a mes sage to be handled as one step and possesses all the commands step commands such as Send Receive Send amp Receive and Wait that are needed for each step CPU Unit PMSU PMCR instructio General purpose external device Step 0 Step 1 eee eee eet e eB eee haa noA a Ma a eB a a TET a a M a a a ee SP onnanwane 2 This step can be set so that the next process step end depends on the processing result of the previous step In particular it is possible to set the sequence so that the next process depends on the contents of one or sev eral set receive messages CPU Unit PMSU General purpose external device PMCR instruction see eee Ot 8 SH ET OVBIBTsZT eB BFF FSF SF FeO OB eweeoewwanwaae es ewan ae a Ce en Next step depends on contents of re ceived data i Step n depending on con oo tents of received data wee een ee we wee ee ewe eB
89. description cannot avoid these errors it is necessary to abort and to confirm the trans mission rate and line condition when the communication fails even in the third retry Sequence No 001 Dial Operation Repeat Command Retry Send Receive message Response Next Error counter count message type process process R 001 Send amp Receive Dial number 1 End Abort a hon 6 hon 7 eooo e faon a R 001 Send amp Receive One Dial number Abort e faon 8 hon mo 234 02 R 001 Send amp Receive 3 One Dial number 1 En Abort O 7 eooo 8 hon moe 346 Creating the Protocol Applications Appendix A Send OK Message Sending Data Receiving Mode Switch Line Disconnection Sequence No 002 Partner machine Step No 00 Step No 00 Send SendOK Retry three times Retry count Other than O or error Retry three imes Retry count Receive the Other than result code 8 or error Normal When the connection with the communications partner is established the system sends the message Sen dOK and waits the data from the partner machine The communications partner sends four words of data stored in DM 0100 to DM 0104 after the receipt of the SendOK message When the system receives the four words of data it writes them from DM 0200 and sends the escape code after the end of reception Then it switches the escape mode to receive the AT command from the online mode and sends the line
90. disconnection command Abnormal Most errors here are presumed to be a time up error of the monitoring time receiving error on the transmis sion wrong message reception or error check code error For these errors the retry process is set to three times If another error occurs the system will abort and check the modem s transmission rate and line condi tion 347 Creating the Protocol Applications Appendix A Following are configurations of both steps The sequence configuration of the sending PLC Sequence No 002 Message Sending Data Receiving Mode Switch and Line Disconnection Repeat Command Retry Send message Receive Response Next Error counter count message type process process R 001 Send amp Receive 3 SendOK Writing from Next Abort DM0200 W 1 8 R 001 Send amp Receive 3 Line disconnec 8 result code End tion command The sequence configuration of the receiving PLC Sequence No 000 Message Receiving and Data Sending Repeat Command Retry Send message Receive Response Next Error counter message type process process Ce ae ae a f Sendok Next Abort R 005 Send Contents of four End Abort words starting from DM0101 R 1 8 Configuring the Communication Messages Contents For the communications messages setup the send and receive data storing mode and the message format must be set up Send and Receive Data Storing Mode There are four kinds of send and receive data storing modes
91. eet iae ee les Otis Wee hue han WEG etl at aaa 45 Ded SMUIGOWME erenn ooh Bark a os Se hes ee ed eR Ea ee 46 2 5 Outline or User Intermace so 24 6a cata kenad ache hen daeed ea eads 46 ZOO WINGOW ss 4 26 4ak LeeLee Lee eee Lee Reuse ounce eu oes 48 Dee COMO MCN aera set ue be eote eis ete eee bee Od ee ee 51 2 5 3 Menu and Short cut Keys 0 0 cee 52 25 4 POP Up Mems s predad a ea a a A A dewadees 53 23909 ToolBar CONS ekaa O E a hie RE AE eE 55 2906 ISAS Balcones scones sessed si aaa E E 56 41 Connecting to a PLC Section 2 1 2 1 Connecting to a PLC When transferring protocol data created by the CX Protocol to Communica tions Boards or Units use the following Cables to connect the computer and PLC Connection to the CPU Unit can be made to either the peripheral port or RS 232C port of the CPU Unit A personal computer can be connected to the PMSU port if the port is set to the host link mode With the C200HX HG HE if one of the PMSU ports is set to the NT link mode this connection will not be possible communications CJ2 Port at computer Length mode Peripheral USB USB port 12 Mbps USB 2 0 Commercially avail 5 m max able USB cable A connector B connec tor port Conforms to D sub 9 pin male alla communica XW2Z 200S CV Use a static resis Note Network type USB 2 0 B connec tor Commercially avail 100 m Recommended able twisted ons cable between hub and nodes
92. end value is invalid The sequence start value is invalid col Macro Download cannot proceed PMSU does not support Proto col Macro Upload cannot pro ceed PMSU is not fitted to the cur rently selected PLC Not all selected Protocols will be compared PMSU is not fitted to the cur rently selected PLC Not all selected Protocols will be downloaded Protocol compare failed Communications have failed The total length is beyond the limit Communications have failed Retry operation Locate protocol spp and move back to application folder If protocol spp cannot be found reinstall CX Protocol Locate and open project psw Enter a valid value demonstrated by the error message Enter valid data for the Seq End setting Reduce the sequence value or reduce the sequence range A target must exist for a protocol Specify a target PMSU for the protocol Change the starting address and or the Length so that they are within the permitted range as demonstrated by the error mes sage The Length must be between 1 The Length specified is out of range Enter a valid value and 256 Attempting to download protocols to the PMSU while in Run mode or Monitor mode Select the Yes Button to switch the PLC to Program mode T Target for protocol must be set Total number of IN and OUT channels for Link Channel Areas 1 and 2 combined should be The CX Server project
93. error process An error at this stage may be caused by wrong PLC Setup or wrong wiring in which case it cannot be handled by the step description Therefore the abort is set for this error process Sequence No 000 Modem Initialization Repeat Command Retry Send Receive message Response Next Error counter count message type process process R 001 Send amp Receive 3 Initialization o En Abort en Note The partner machine creates similar steps and executes the initialization of the local modem 344 Creating the Protocol Applications Appendix A Sequence No 001 Dial Operation Step No 00 Send dial command Retry Send amp Receive three times Matrix Result code Receive 1 or 234 Receive 4 6 8 or others Error END Abort A il Step No 01 Send wait one minute Send dial command Retry three times Matrix Result code Receive 1 or 234 Receive 4 6 8 or others Error Abort Step No 02 Send wait one minute Send dial command Retry three times Matrix Result code Receive 1 or 234 Receive 4 6 7 8 9 or others err Normal When the modem is initialized the system dials the telephone number and secures the communication line with the partner PLC Besides the line connection completion 1 CONNECT there are several result codes for the dial command For example 7 BUSY is the connection failure because of the busy line In this case if the other step to red
94. female Built in Ether Net IP Ethernet port port see note 100Base TX or 10Base T Serial port RS 232C D sub 9 pin able icine hub Note CJ2H CPULI EIP and CJU2M CPU3L only Peripheral USB port Serial port RS 232C D sub connector B connector 9 pin male CJ2 CPU Unit CJ2 CPU Unit A connector 4 sub connector Commercially available USB cable 1 9 pin male D sub connector 9 pin female Peripheral USB port conforming to USB 2 0 B connector Serial port RS 232C 9 pin female D sub connector or Serial Option Board for CJ2M CPU3 Recommended cable XW2Z 200S CV 500S CV 1 Commercially available USB cable 5 m max for USB 1 1 or 2 0 Built in EtherNet IP port Built in EtherNet IP port y CJ2 CPU Unit 100Base TX twisted pair cable straight Switching hub 100Base TX twisted pair cable straight 42 Connecting to a PLC Section 2 1 CS CJ Communications Cable used Cable length Connector on the Connector on the procedure computer PLC Peripheral bus CS1W CN118 see note RS 232C Peripheral port CS1W CN226 CS1W CN626 XW2Z 200S V CPU Unit built in A iiaa Note The CS1W CN118 is used when connecting an RS 232C cable to the periph eral port Connecting the CPU Unit to the peripheral port CPU Unit CS1W CN118 226 626 Peripheral port CPU Unit D RS 232C port RS 232C RS 232C port
95. following table lists the units and ranges of monitor times that can be set 00 to 99 0 01 s 10 ms 00 to 99 0 1 s 100 ms 00 to 99 0010 99 Note Monitoring will not be performed if OO is input as the value 7 2 Editing Sequences 7 2 1 Displaying a Sequence List Use one of the following procedures to display a sequence list within a proto col ane e Double click the Protocol List Icon in the project workspace and then aan left click the protocol to display the sequence list in the project window pen e Double click the Protocol Icon that includes the desired sequence to dis play all the sequences within the protocol 7 2 2 Renaming Sequences Use the following procedure to rename a sequence that has been registered Note Sequences belonging to the System type protocols cannot be renamed 1 2 3 1 Left click an appropriate Communication Sequence or select an appro priate Communication Sequence and press the Enter Key The current sequence name will become editable 2 Type in a new name for the sequence and press the Enter Key It is possi ble to select and overwrite a portion of the current sequence name The new sequence name may not exceed 30 characters 226 Editing Sequences Section 7 2 7 2 3 Changing an Existing Sequence Number 1 2 3 1 Left click the Field within the sequence or select the Field and press the Enter Key The current sequence number will become editable 2 Type in anew sequenc
96. from the left the port D00101 on which the protocol will be executed 1 Port 1 Upper port 2 Port 2 Lower port a 4 1 17 means that the 16 17 1 words D00101 to U 4 274 8 eo Eee ee Send Data setting re a ee ere Re ce ee ey ees Receive Data Storage Location D00116 will be used as the t 2 means that the 1 2 1 word D00001 will receive area D00000 0002 be used as the send area i D00100 Kanel IQNIMOST T _ gee eee eee ee eee eee t D00101 4 diai 4 4 digt Jf ee oe Sete eS es Data of temperature input 5 t channel 0 measured For this sequence set the unit numbers temperature A Leftmost i The protocol communicates with E5ZE with unit papery TS mee me mmm i number 00 because the rightmost 2 digits are 00 D00115 Poa leat lalate aaa ieee 3 pone aa t D00001 0000 N ATAA P E E ETEA E E EE t t i t t t t Data of temperature input channel 7 measured i temperature t Note Observe the following precautions when using the PMCR instruction e In the following cases set the third operand of the PMCR instruction to the constant 0000 126 Executing a Created Communications Sequence CS CJ Section 3 8 3 8 4 Operation 1 2 3 e f an operand designated reading variable is not used in the sequence to be performed e f there is no send data word allocation when using the sta
97. in the project window e Press the Ctrl F6 Keys or select Next from the Control Menu to move to the next active window of the CX Protocol e The size ratio of the project workspace to the project window will automat ically be adjusted when displayed e The width of each item in the project window will automatically be adjusted when displayed e Click the or portion to select the hierarchy in the project workspace After the portion is clicked the portion will be displayed at the final hierarchy level in which case only the display of the project workspace will change while the display of the project window will not change ED NewPLO1 Offline C516 GPU42 a en Offline 651G GPL42 Click this Displays the lower level data Scrolling the Hierarchy Double click or press the Right Key while the focus is in the project work 50 space to scroll down the hierarchy The selected and highlighted data in the project workspace will shift down Press the Esc Key or select Parent in the View Menu to move up in the hier archy Outline of User Interface Section 2 5 Pop up Menu Click the right mouse button to display the pop up menu Eg PSW BED Communication Sequence Link Wo ce OOO New Sequence A new step is created after clicking the right mouse Cut Ctrl t button or pressing the Shift F10 Keys to select the corresponding item in the popup menu In this TOPY trito example Create Step i
98. initial value 1 LROO to 31 with a Master 2 LROO to 15 has been set it Maximum PT unit number for port A NT link 1 N cannot be 1 to 7 BCD for C200HE 1 to 3 changed 12 to 15 All modes Port A mode setting 0 Host link initial value 1 No RS 232 procedure 2 1 1 link for Slave 3 1 1 link for Master 4 NT link 1 1 5 NT link 1 N 6 Protocol macro DM 6556 00 to 07 Host link Port A baud rate settings bps Only valid when No procedure 00 1 200 initial value 01 2 400 02 4 800 set separately 03 9 600 04 19 200 Protocol macro 08 to 15 Host link Port A frame format settings No procedure Start bit Data length Stop bit Parity Protocol macro 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit Even initial value 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit Odd 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit Without 1 bit 7 bits 2 bits Even 1 bit 7 bits 2 bits Odd 1 bit 7 bits 2 bits Without 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit Even 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit Odd 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit Without 1 bit 8 bits 2 bits Even 1 bit 8 bits 2 bits Odd 1 bit 8 bits 2 bits Without 360 Appendix C Wiring RS 232C Cable Connectors Cable Processing End Connected to FG See the diagrams for the lengths required in each set 1 2 3 1 Cut the cable to the required length PO 2 Peel the sheath using a razor blade without damaging the shield weaving 40 mm RS 232C 25 mm RS 422 3 Remove the shield using scissors 10mm 4 Peel the core wire of each wire using a stripper
99. initial value data in the receive buffer before execution of a send receive sequence After execution of PMCR instruction The received data storage area will be used to store data received with a Receive operation when With Without Response Write is set to Yes e Flags Turns ON upon instruction execution if the Com Remains OFF in any situation not indicated under munications Port Enabled Flag for the designated ON communications port internal logic port is OFF Turns ON if the designated serial port physical port is not in protocol macro mode Turns ON if the data in C1 or C2 is outside the range Turns ON if an area in the send data and read Remains OFF in any situation not indicated under data has been set to not allow read or write ON Turns ON if an area in the receive data has been set to prohibit writing Executing a Created Communications Sequence CS CJ Section 3 8 e Data Contents o Aree CIO Area I O etc 0000 to 6143 Work Area W000 to 511 Holding Area HOOO to 511 Auxiliary Area A000 to 959 A448 to 959 Timer T0000 to 4095 Counter C0000 to 4095 DM Area D00000 to 32767 EM Area E00000 to 32767 See note EM Area including En_00000 to 32767 n 0 to C See note bank designation Indirect DM EM D00000 to 32767 See note binary E00000 to 32767 En_00000 to 32767 n 0 to C Indirect DM EM BCD D0O0000 to 32767 See note E00000 to 32767 En_00000 to 32767 n 0
100. instruction execution during PMCR instruction execution e Perform the sequence execution result read process and the sequence error termination process under the condition that the Instruction Execu tion Flag has been cleared Example 166 Instruction Execution Flag Input condition 28908 PMCR 28908 DIFD 14 A Sequence execution result reading process Sequence error termination process Example Execution of the protocol name Controller E5_K read Sequence No 000 Process value read Communications Board i The Temperature Controller unit number is spe cified the send data of the process value read command is sent and the process value in the response is received in the specified word RS 422A 485 _ Send data Eoo Receive data E5LIK Temperature E5LIK Temperature E5LIK Temperature Controller Controller Controller Unit No 00 Unit No 01 Unit No 31 Maximum 32 Units Ladder Programming Method Section 4 4 e The Send Receive Word Allocation Contents of the Sequence No 000 Process value read First word of i Number of send data words naaa 1 Undefined otse Contents data forma Data 0 Number of send data 0002 fixed words 4 digits BCD Unit No 2 digits BCD 00 to 31 Receive data ii Number of send data words storage words 1 Process value ee Number of receive data 0002 words 4 digits BCD Process val
101. is no Communications Attempting to stop a trace before it Start a new trace Check connections Trace in progress on this port has started for the selected port There is no Trace data available Attempting to access trace data for a Start a new trace for that port for the specified Port port that has no trace data This protocol cannot be found Object code temporary file is corrupt Try compiling downloading again and cannot be downloaded to the PMSU This protocol file is of zero Object code temporary file is corrupt Try compiling downloading again length and cannot be down loaded to the PMSU Transfer failed Communications have failed Check the connections and try again Troubleshooting Section 14 Error Wessage Symptom Causes aeon Unable to complete protocol Communications have failed Check the connection to the PLC and try compare again Unable to complete protocol Communications have failed Check PLC connections and try again upload Unable to establish communica Communications have failed Check the PMSU installation and try again tions to the PMSU as demonstrated by the error message Unable to establish communica Communications have failed Check connections and baud rate setting tions to the selected PLC Unable to register PLC Communications have failed Retry the connection or cancel the dialog Devices and check the PC to PLC communications settings U
102. maintenance and other basic operations for the CJ series CJ2 CPU Units The following information is included Overview and features System configuration Installation and wiring Troubleshooting Use this manual together with the W473 Describes programming and other methods to use the functions of the CJ2 CPU Units The following information is included CPU Unit operation Internal memory areas Programming Tasks CPU Unit built in functions Use this manual together with the W472 SYSMAC CS Series CS1G H CPULILJH CS1G H CPULILI EV1 Programmable Controllers Operation Manual SYSMAC CJ Series CJ1H CPULILIH R CJ1G H CPULILIH CJ1G CPULILIP CJ1G CPULILJ CJU1M CPULIL Programmable Controllers Operation Manual SYSMAC CS CJ NSJ Series CS1G H CPULILIH CS1G H CPULIL EV1 CS1D CPULILIH CS1D CPULILIS CJ1H CPULILIH R CJ1G H CPULILIH CJ1G CPULILIP CU1G CPULIL CJ1M CPULILI NSJU OULLI B G5D NSJU OULULI B M3D Programmable Controllers Programming Manual SYSMAC CS CJ Series CS1G H CPULILI EV1 CS1G H CPULILIH CS1D CPULILIH CS1D CPULILIS CJ2H CPU6L EIP CU2H CPU6L CJ2M CPU1L CU2M CPUSL CJ1H CPULILJH R CJ1G CPULILI CU1G H CPULILJH CJ1G CPULILIP CJU1M CPULIL SYSMAC One NSJ Series NSJU UULLI B G5D NSJU UULUL B M3D Programmable Controllers Instructions Reference Manual SYSMAC CP Series CP1H XOUUOLL L CP1H XALILILILI U CP1H YUULUL L CP1H CPU Unit Operation Manual NSJ Series
103. not stable e Provide circuit breakers and other safety measures to provide protection against shorts in external wiring e Do not apply voltages exceeding the rated input voltage to Input Units The Input Units may be destroyed e Do not apply voltages exceeding the maximum switching capacity to Out put Units The Output Units may be destroyed e Always disconnect the LG terminal when performing withstand voltage tests e Install all Units according to instructions in the operation manuals Improper installation may cause faulty operation e Provide proper shielding when installing in the following locations e Locations subject to static electricity or other sources of noise e Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields e Locations subject to possible exposure to radiation e Locations near to power supply lines e Be sure to tighten Backplane screws terminal screws and cable connec tor screws securely XXV Software Operating Procedures 6 6 XXVIII Caution e Do not attempt to take any Units apart to repair any Units or to modify any Units in any way The following precautions are necessary to ensure the general safety of the system Always heed these precautions e Provide double safety mechanisms to handle incorrect signals that can be generated by broken signal lines or momentary power interruptions e Provide external interlock circuits limit circuits and other safety circuits in additi
104. oe 270 10 3 3 PLC Operating Mode Changes 000 0c eee 270 10 4 Moden COnneCHONS 94 5 5 260654 ehina ta cee eiagu yo Ghee Rew de AEDES 270 TO OUI Sy eeaeee ante boas teste Coat hon eae ames 270 10 4 2 Settings at the PLC Side i s 23 ace case ceiasionden ewes a entien 271 10 4 3 Settings at the Personal Computer 0000055 275 10 4 4 Online Connection 0 0 0 eee 279 105 VO Table Creanon 7 5 bta we thane iene saad i be eae aad 279 L054 VO Tabler eena yee ees E oa eS 279 10 6 PMSU Communications Port Settings 0 0 0 ccc eee ee ees 280 10 7 Transfer of Communications Port Setting Data to PLC 282 10 7 1 Transfer of Communications Port Setting Data to PLC 282 10 7 2 Reading Communications Port Setting Data from PLC 283 259 PLC System Configuration Section 10 1 10 1 PLC System Configuration Left click the PLC Icon before making the following settings 1 2 3 1 PLC model communications between the personal computer and PLC and Board and Unit settings 2 Left click the required PMSU Icon Board Unit before performing the trace memory 1 A trace memory 2 B communications port 1 A or commu nications port 2 B settings Note Use icons in parentheses if the C200HX HG HE is used Trace memory 1 A 2 B Starts tracing reading Board icon PLC model Board communications port settings mam PLC icon Communi
105. of data sending or receiving When reading 8 words of data it is neces sary to execute the Send amp Receive command 8 times repeatedly Send message Example A frame of read command for the process variable Unit R X O Word O O FCS R Header Address Data Check code Terminator Send Message header h gt Terminator lt t gt Check code lt c gt Length lt 1 gt Address lt a gt m SEA 1 240D LRG H parity 2Byte ASCII BORO 32 Shots art Receive message Example A frame of the response to the read command for the process variable Unit d code Process variable Header Address Data Check code Terminator Receive Message Header lt h Check code 4c Length lt gt Address lt a gt THROD 1 a 2A0D Ez CH parity 2 Byte ASGID PUR 12 et Send Message Creation e Designating the unit number as 2 characters 1 byte beginning from the third operand second operand for C200HX HG HE of the PMCR instruc tion 1 1 byte 1 byte HEX to ASCII anis comersion 3 1 s 2 asen coge Unit number j 12 is specified as the address 3rd 2nd for C200HX HG HE operand gt Specify R 1 2 Means the number of bytes 2 bytes after ASCII conversion 3rd 2nd for C200HX HG HE operand designated word 1 word of the PMCR instruction Conversion to ASCII data 119 Example of
106. port of the PLC Masmum speed 9600 T Onl connect at this speed Cancel 8 Left click the Connection Tab and set the communications conditions OHAON ME5S614E_56K_FAX_DATA_MODEH Pro EJ General Connection Options Connection preferences Data bits id Communications conditions settings res e For host link connections Parity Even 7 bits even 2 stop bits e For toolbus connections Stop bits 2 8 bits no parity 1 stop bit Call preferences T Cancel the call if not connected within feo SECS Disconnect a call if idle for more than 20 mins Port Settings Advanced mea 278 I O Table Creation Section 10 5 Note These dialog boxes take priority in making the settings for the modem The settings made in the Driver Tab of the Network Setting Dialog Box see step 5 above will be ignored if they are different 9 Left click the Advanced Button The Advanced Connection Settings Dialog Box will be displayed 10 Make settings for error control and flow control Make the settings as fol lows e Use Error Control Only select Compress data e Use Flow Control Select Hardware RTS CTS Advanced Connection Settings Use flow control Required to connect IW Compress data f Hardware HTS CTS C Software OM 0FF M Wee cellular potaea Modulation type Standard Record a log file cancel e After the settings have been made double c
107. pressing the Shift Key and selecting another step to extend the selection or by pressing the Ctrl Key and selecting another step to add to the selection Left click the Delete Icon on the toolbar or press the Delete Key Alterna tively right click and select Delete from the pop up menu Delete can also be selected from the Edit Menu The step can also be deleted by left click ing the Cut Icon on the toolbar or by pressing the Ctrl X Keys Alternative ly right click to display the pop up menu and select Cut from the menu Cut can also be selected from the Edit Menu When canceling the last deletion using Cut left click the Paste Icon on the toolbar or press the Ctrl V Keys Alternatively right click to display the pop up menu and select Paste from the menu Paste can also be selected from the Edit Menu The pasted step will be positioned at the end of the sequence and the next step number available will be given to that step If another object is copied or cut during the above procedure the originally cut object will be lost Note Once a step has been deleted it cannot be recovered 8 2 4 Copying the Steps Use the following procedure to copy the steps within the step field or between the sequences Left click the icon of the step to be copied More than one step can be se lected by pressing the Shift Key and selecting another step to extend the selection or by pressing the Ctrl Key and selecting another step to add to the selecti
108. process stops there Add the description to switch from the error course to the normal course by setting Next and Goto as much as possible if the error cause is predicted and the process can be continued by the other steps even if the errors occur Besides if the error causes are identified the debug will be easy even when the recovery is impossible by describing the steps For example for a device such as a modem which returns the specific result codes the result codes can be set in the matrix in order to confirm the sent result codes and to ease the error cause identification 4 3 Transmission Control Mode Setup The Protocol Macro function supports such transmission control modes as the flow control Xon Xoff flow control by software and RTS CTS flow control by hardware delimiter control contention control and modem control Note that the system cannot freely control the signal line through another mode Examples of their general use are as follows e The external device is compatible with the RTS CTS flow control Select the RTS CTS flow control e The external device is compatible with the Xon Xoff flow control Select the Xon Xoff flow control e The connection in one to n configuration is used for the external de vice Select the modem control 157 Transmission Control Mode Setup Section 4 3 158 Note e The external device is a modem Select the modem control e The external device is a modem compatible with the RTS C
109. rate higher than that designated by the proto col macro specifications 88 400 bps max can be set However if this setting is actually made a PLC Setup error will occur and the CS CJ will operate at the default baud rate of 9 600 bps 10 7 Transfer of Communications Port Setting Data to PLC 10 7 1 Transfer of Communications Port Setting Data to PLC Use the following procedure to transfer the data on the communications port settings in the PMSU to the PLC 282 1 2 3 1 2 3 Connect the personal computer to the PLC for online communications Set the PLC to PROGRAM mode Left click the PMSU Icon for the corresponding communications port or left click the desired Communications Port Icon If a PMSU Icon is select ed data on the settings of both communications ports will be transferred lf a Communications Port Icon is selected the settings for that commu nications port will be transferred Transfer of Communications Port Setting Data to PLC Section 10 7 4 Left click the Download Communications Port Setting Icon from the toolbar or right click and select Download Communications Port Set ting from the pop up menu Alternatively select Download Communica tions Port Setting from the PLC Menu after selecting the desired communications port On completion of the transfer the message Communications port set ting download completed will be displayed Left click the OK Button N Caution Confirm that no adverse ef
110. select New Message from the pop up menu when the Message Ed itor Dialog Box will be displayed Specify each input item and order in the dialog box 2 Create the new message in the message list independently from the steps and input each item in either of the following method a Input the data for each item field beginning with the header Specify and input the order and items of the data in the data field b Display the Message Editor Dialog Box from the data field Specify and input the order and items of the order in the dialog box Creating a New Message in Send Message or Receive Message Field for a Step Use the following procedure to create a new message for a step 1 2 3 1 Right click the Send Message or Receive Message Field for a step and select New Message from pop up menu 2 The Message Editor Menu Dialog Box will be displayed Input the mes sage name in the Name Field Message Editor Ed x Name Message PSs Delete Message Data Constant Hex Edit Insert Terminator lt t gt Edt Insert Color Key E Normal Length Insert oa e i Code lt c gt fr lt I gt 1 A A 3 Create the message as appropriate Refer to 9 1 Creating Messages for details on how to construct a message 4 Left click the OK Button to accept the settings Click the Cancel Button to leave the settings unchanged 209 Creating Messages and Matrices Section
111. sor position Left click the OK Button to accept the special codes entered or the Cancel Button to leave the settings unchanged The input code that is set will be displayed in the Data Field of the Header lt h gt Dialog Box ASCII Select ASCII from the Type drop down list Input ASCII characters maximum of 4 characters in the Data Field The input ASCII characters will be displayed with a prefix and suffix in the message header field For example if is input will be displayed Hexadecimal Select HEX from the Type drop down list 2 Left click the Edit Button The Hex Entry Dialog Box will be displayed 243 Creating Messages Section 9 1 a CEECEE Pepe et es co ee a Enterect Entered O Bytes Max 4 Bytes 3 Input the required hexadecimal value by left clicking the button for each digit of that value Up to eight digits may be entered and they are displayed at the top of the dialog box If a ninth digit is entered the first digit will be deleted Note Left click the CLR Button to clear all codes and start again Left click the DEL Button to delete the last code entered 4 Left click the Enter Button to accept the settings or the Cancel Button to leave the settings unchanged The input code confirmed by left clicking the Enter Button will be displayed in the Data Field of the Header lt h gt Dialog Box The input code will be displayed with a prefix P and suffix f in
112. terminated normally control will be passed to the next step according to the next process settings If a receive matrix is set in a receive message control will be passed to the next step according to the setting that determines the error processing in the event of abnormal termination The following four processes can be set Processing details Goto When this step is abnormally terminated control will be passed to the step number designated in Next When this step is abnormally terminated the next step will be exe cuted End When this step is abnormally terminated the sequence will be ter minated Abort When this step is abnormally terminated the step will be aborted and the sequence will be terminated 12 0 Left click the Error Process Field of the step and then left click the Enter E Button or press the Enter Key The Error Process Dialog Box will be displayed The display is the same as the one for the next process 2 Select Next Process from the Jump Field When Goto is selected input a step number in the empty field 3 Select the OK Button to accept the settings or the Cancel Button to leave the settings unchanged 8 2 Step Editing 8 2 1 Displaying the Step List Use one of the following procedures to display the step of the sequence e Double click the Protocol Icon in the project workspace and then left click a desired sequence for displaying the step The step will be displayed in the project
113. the C200HX HG HE and also to set the method for notifying the setting to the PLC This setting will be valid only when the write area is designated by the oper and of the PMCR instruction and when the setting of the with without response writing is set to Yes The notification types include Scan Interrupt Fixed See note and Inter rupt Receive Case See note With the CS the Interrupt Fixed and the Interrupt Receive Case are applicable to the Serial Communications Board and with the C200HX HG HE they are applicable only to the Communications Board They cannot be used for the Serial Communications Unit for the CS Cu Setting Sequences E 1 2 3 Setting Monitor Times Tr Tfr Tfs Note Note Section 7 1 1 Left click the Response Field of the sequence and then left click the Enter Button or press the Enter Key The Response Type Dialog Box will be displayed Response Type Notification Type Scan A C Interrupt Fixed o C Interrupt Receive Case The interrupt Mo to the PLO will be set to automatic for the comm board status Cancel 7 x __ Cancel 2 Select one of the notification types Scan Interrupt mode Fixed or In terrupt mode Receive Case When the Interrupt mode Fixed But ton is left clicked designate the external interrupt task number for the CS CJ or the interrupt subroutine number for the C200HX HG HE in a range from 0 to 255 3 Left
114. the C200HX HG HE Protocol the commands Wait Flush Open or Close and the check codes LRC2 SUM1 1 byte 2 bytes used exclusively for the CS CJ Protocol will cause errors dur ing compilation Therefore create a protocol without using them If the I O memory area extends beyond that for the C200HX HG HE an error will occur If so correct the protocol 295 CS CJ Protocol and C200HX HG HE Protocol Section 11 4 11 4 3 Converting C200HX HG HE Protocol into CS CJ Protocol Download the C200HX HG HE Protocol with source code to the CS CJ PMSU and upload the protocol to change its attributes to those for the CS CJ Proto col CX Protocol Download Protocol with source code a onl E Upload to change to the CS CJ Protocol CPU Unit 296 SECTION 12 Tracing and Monitoring This section describes details of PLC memory area monitoring and the transmission line tracing 12 1 Tracing Transmission Lings eoira os bs PAs be oe Fe ode GR aS 298 Patel Tracie Method 52 025 075 ch ceeds ee tls caces te theweedawa es 299 12 122 Tacer elated Bitsustauciaavuaoetshecas area ve deetees 300 12 1 3 Starting and Stopping a Trace 0 0 eee 300 12 1 4 Reading Trace Data from PMSU 008 301 12 1 5 Adding and Saving Trace Data to Project File 301 12 126 Rethevine Trace Data ssc snd aed rins ho ha oon ee Meats 301 2 7 Pinions Trace Data s2 once iat detent dawns beatae 302 12 2
115. the CPU Unit to the built in RS 232C port Note Can be connected to the PMSU port if the port is set to the host link mode Connection to a IBM PC AT or compatible computer Peripheral port connection RS 232C port connection Peripheral port RS 232C port on the on the CPU Unit CPU Unit or PMSU port host link mode CS1W CN226 2 Om CS1W CN626 6 0 m XW2Z 200S V 2 0 m XW2Z 500S V 5 0 m Note When using the RS 232C Cable to connect to a CPU Unit peripheral port as shown below use the CS1W CN118 Xxw2z O00O S RS 232C Cable CS1W CN118 Mrara Peripheral port When combining the CS1W CN118 with the RS 232C Cable connections cannot be made using the Toolbus Make connections using Host Link SYSWAY System Configuration Section 1 4 CP Series Computer port CPU Unit port Cable length IBM PC AT or USB port USB port 5 m max Commercially compatible A type con B type con available USB nector nector 1 1 or 2 0 cable IBM PC AT or compatible USB port 9 CP1H Commercial USB cable CPU Unit Peripheral USB port NJ Series Direct USB Connection Computer CPU Unit port Cable length IBM PC AT or USB port USB port 5 m max Commercially compatible A type con B type con available USB nector nector 1 1 or 2 0 cable IBM PC AT or compatible e USB port NJ series CPU Unit Commercial 5B capo Te Peripheral USB port Direct Ethernet Connection Computer CP
116. the data field For example if 2AOD is input 2A0D will be displayed Terminator lt t gt Use the following procedure to set the terminator data that indicates the end 244 of the message Select one of the following data types ASCII Hexadecimal or Code 1 2 3 1 Left click the Terminator lt t gt Field and then left click the Enter Button or E press the Enter Key The Message Terminator lt t gt Dialog Box will be dis played The dialog box can also be displayed from the Message Editor Dialog Box Refer to the previous Header lt h gt section Creating Messages Section 9 1 Message Terminator lt t gt Cancel Select a terminator type from the Type drop down list and set the Data Field For inputting the Code ASCII or Hexadecimal refer to the previous Header lt h gt section 2 Left click the OK Button to accept the settings or the Cancel Button to leave the settings unchanged Check Code lt c gt Use the following procedure to designate an error check code calculation method The check code types LRC LRC2 CRC CCITT CRC 16 SUM 1 byte SUM 2 bytes SUM1 1 byte SUM1 2 bytes SUM2 1 byte and SUM2 2 bytes are available Data types available are binary and ASCII Ini tial values and conversion directions can be designated Note Only for the CS CJ protocol macro 1 2 3 1 Left click the Check code lt c gt Field and then left click the Enter Button or E press th
117. the default name New Protocol will be displayed in the project window Use the following procedure to rename the protocol 1 2 3 1 Left click the Protocol Name in the project window or select the Protocol Name and press the Enter Key The current protocol name will become an editable field Es Pawi H Protocol Name Start Sequence End Sequence Ei Mew Protocol ggg 199 2 Input the new protocol name and press the Enter Key The new protocol name must not exceed 30 characters Ea Paw 2 Protocol Name Start Sequence End Sequence oad 089 206 Creating Projects and Protocols Section 5 1 5 1 4 Setting the Protocol Sequence Number Range Use the following procedure to specify the sequence numbers that are used by the specified protocol within a range between 000 and 999 The range of sequence numbers used by system protocols cannot be changed 1 2 3 1 Left click the Start Sequence associated with the protocol in the protocol list Alternatively select the Start Sequence and press the Enter Key The current start sequence will become an editable field Ez Peay ea Protocol Mame Start Sequence End Sequence G Temp J00 ogg 2 Input the starting number and press the Enter Key 3 Input the end number and press the Enter Key Input the value within a range between 000 and 999 into the Start Se quence or End Sequence Fields for the associated protocol 5 1 5 Setting the Board and Unit Set the PMSU through w
118. the falling edge Bit Port 2 190009 This bit is invalid during one shot traces Word n bit 09 One shot Trace Port 1 190002 The one shot trace starts on the rising edge and is terminated Start Stop Bit Word n bit 02 on the falling edge This bit is invalid during continuous traces Port 2 190010 Word n bit 10 Trace Execution 190912 ON Continuous or one shot trace being executed Completion Flag Word n 9 bit 12 OFF One shot trace is stopped by a full buffer when One shot Port 2 191912 Trace Start Stop Bit is still ON Word n 19 bit 12 C200HX HG HE Flag Pon Etectveaddress swe lt Continuous The continuous trace starts on the rising edge and the trace is Trade Start Stop terminated on the falling edge Bit This bit is invalid during one shot traces One shot Trace The one shot trace starts on the rising edge and is terminated Start Stop Bit 28905 on the falling edge This bit is invalid during continuous traces Trace Execution 28600 ON Continuous or one shot trace being executed Completion Flag Port B 28601 OFF One shot trace is stopped by a full buffer when One shot 12 1 3 Starting and Stopping a Trace Use the following procedure to start and stop a trace 1 2 3 1 Connect the PLC for online communications and set the PLC to Monitor mode Ali 2 Double click the PLC Icon 3 Either left click the PMSU Icon of the communications port to be traced in the project workspace left pane
119. the receive process will be used as the receive message buffer This data can be extracted using During the send process which includes the Send the receive process command Send amp Receive and other commands the receive process will continue and data will be sent to the receive buffer Therefore after the send process and other commands have been completed this data can using the receive process be used as the receive message Transmission modes for the Protocol Macro are set in the following way m D30000 100 x Unit No CS CJ Serial Communications Allocated DM et a 0 Half duplex default Series Board area 1 Full duplex Serial Communications Allocated DM m 18 0 Half duplex default Unit area 1 Full duplex 3 2 Sequence Attributes Common to All Steps Set the sequence attributes as described in the following 3 2 1 Setting Description een control X on X off flow control RTS CTS flow control modem paramere control delimiter control or contention control Shared memory area between the PLC and the Board Unit Response type Timing for writing received data Monitoring time Time for monitoring send and receive process 75 Sequence Attributes Common to All Steps Section 3 2 3 2 2 CX Protocol Setup Screen Link word addressing Transmission control mode Response type Receive wait monitoring time Tr Receive finish monitoring time Tfr Sequence name z eae finish monitoring time Tfs Ee
120. the step to display a pop up menu Select New Message from the menu 2 The Message Editor Dialog Box will be displayed Input a message name in the Name Field 3 Refer to 9 1 Creating Messages for creating messages 4 Left click the OK Button to accept the settings or left click the Cancel But ton to leave the settings unchanged The receive matrix cannot be newly created or monitored in the Receive Mes sage Field of the step It can be created or monitored only in the receive matrix list The send message or receive message can be edited in the Send Message Receive Message Field of the step Use the following procedure to edit the messages 1 Right click the Send Message or Receive Message Field of the step to display a pop up menu Select Edit Message from the menu 2 The Message Editor Dialog Box will be displayed Refer to 9 7 Creating Messages for editing messages 3 Left click the OK Button to accept the settings or left click the Cancel But ton to leave the settings unchanged Step Setting With Without Response Writing 1 2 3 Next Process q 1 2 3 Section 8 1 Sets whether received data is to be stored in the I O memory area of the PLC This setting is valid only when received data is stored by the fourth operand for the CS CJ series or third operand for the C200HX HG HE of the PMCR instruction e Response Yes Received data is stored in the I O memory area of the PLC A response type must
121. to CX One version 4 03 Improvements from Version 1 81 to Version 1 9 The following functionality has been added in upgrading the CX Protocol from version 1 81 to 1 9 New Units Supported The following Units are now supported CJ Series Serial Communications Unit CJ1W SCU22 CJ1W SCU32 CJ1W SCU42 Upgraded Functions The EM Area banks that can be directly specified have been expanded from 0 to C hex to 0 to 18 hex X X N Caution If you attempt to access EM banks OD to 18 hex from any Unit other than the CJ1W SCU22 32 42 a data read write area exceeded error will occur in the protocol status This will occur even if EM banks OD to 18 hex are supported by the CPU Unit Improvements from Version 1 8 to Version 1 81 The following functionality has been added in upgrading the CX Protocol from version 1 8 to 1 81 New Units Supported The following CPU Units are now supported CI2H CPUGBI6TI667O5164 Improvements from Version 1 71 to Version 1 8 The following functionality has been added in upgrading the CX Protocol from version 1 71 to 1 8 New Units Supported The following CPU Units are now supported CJ2H CPU68 EIP 67 EIP 66 EIP 65 EIP 64 EIP Improvements from Version 1 70 to Version 1 71 The following functionality has been added in upgrading the CX Protocol from version 1 70 to 1 71 New Units Supported The following CPU Units are now supported CJ1H CPU67H R 66H R 65H R 64H R Windows Vista Supported Imp
122. to the shorter frame length acei Hee Response Timeout s 2 d n T Increase the response monitor time if the time elapses before the establishment of network connections 0 H 4 Left click CX Net in the Tool Menu 266 Communications Settings between Personal Computer and PLC Section 10 2 5 Select Add Device from the Project Menu Make settings for Network Type and Network Settings as shown below sete Change PLC i x Device Hame PLCOo0 Device Type CS16 CJ1G Settings Network Type Toolbus Sethirigs l Comment fe Cancel Help Network Settings T oolbus Network Driver Modem Ae Source address Hensar fe Set to 0 for local network communications FINS Destination Address Metwork E j Node Set the node address to 0 Piai E Birit a Hade fe Mode fo Frame Length Response Timeout s f 004 2 Hast imk Ori tnaGer Hema Operating Lee 1 0 C H 267 Online Connections and Mode Changes Section 10 3 6 Close the CX Net CX Programmer Right click the PLC Icon in the project workspace and select Change from the pop up menu Alternative ly select Edit from the Edit Menu 7 Change the Network Type in the Change PLC Dialog Box to PLCOOO Settings C Settings Change PLC i xX for PLC100 Device Name PLC100 Device Type CS1G 016 Settings Netw
123. type e Use the link word area e Use the direct addressing 184 Communications Response Time Performance 4 8 1 CS CJ PMCR 0110 0000 D0000 D1000 Section 4 8 The previous four modes are different in data transmission mode between the CPU Unit and the Board Unit There are three kinds of data transfer modes from the CPU Unit to the Board Unit while there are four kinds of data transfer modes from the Board Unit to the CPU Unit The communications response time varies according to the combination of those modes HUN dO Use the event area Use the event area EEEEEs Use the interrupt mode Use the link word area Use the link word area q Use the direct addressing Use the direct addressing a pueog wWoddns 090 01d e Communications Response Time Using the Event Operand Addressing CPU Unit D0000 gt D1000 Area Illustrated below is the data flow when the communications area addressed by the third and the fourth operand of the PMCR instruction is used PMCR instruction process PMSU External device Send data conversion process x gt lt 7 External 1 3 device process Received Received data data writing conversion process gt lt gt q gt lt 7 6 5 4 The communications response time is the total time from 1 to 7 in the above figure 185 Communica
124. want to view these differences naw By left clicking the Yes Button the address of the data in the PLC will be displayed in parentheses When there is data that is not coinci dent the data for the PLC side will be displayed in parentheses 320 SECTION 13 Error and Error Log Display This section describes details of the displaying of errors and the error log 321 Error and Error Log Display Section 13 Current Error and Error Log Display This section provides information on functions that display or clear the current errors and error log These functions are available only when the PLC is con nected online The errors and error log are displayed in the error log window A message can be displayed in the PLC Errors Window by executing the MSG instruction Note These operations are not supported for an NJ series CPU Unit Displaying Errors 1 2 3 1 Connect the PLC online 2 Right click the PLC Icon and select Error Log from the pop up menu or from the PLC Menu e The following Errors Tab will be displayed in the PLC Errors Window Fa PLO Errors a ie E Pile c Grens oele Errors Error Log Messages Wo Error Clear All CSG 7PU45 Program Clock Mot Monitoring e All the errors currently resulting are displayed in the Errors Tab in the PLC Errors Window e The display of errors will be automatically refreshed whenever a new error occurs e Each error is displayed with its error typ
125. when the following retry factors occur e The send finish monitoring time Tfs receive wait time Tr or receive finish monitoring time Tfr is up e A transmission error CS CJ bit 15 in word 1908 1918 n 8 n 18 is ON C200HX HG HE 28304 or 28312 is ON occurs upon reception e The received message is different from the one that was setup e An error occurs with the error check code In this example the monitoring time is set as shown below For the calculation method of the monitoring time refer to 4 5 Calculation Method of Monitoring Time One minute when redialing lt Ts Tis gt 0 02 seconds i Sending Tr Tfr a a e m me om w 0 01 seconds 0 02 seconds Receiving a am m ee e 1 The retry count can be set only for steps in which Send amp Receive command is set 2 If both the repeat counter and the retry count are set the counter will not increment while the step is being retried by the retry count number When the retry factor is resolved or the step is executed by the retry count number the counter will increment 351 Creating the Protocol Applications Appendix A Creating the Ladder Program The ladder program to execute the created protocol is described and transferred to the PLC An example of the ladder program is shown below CS CJU 000000 DIFU 013 000100 Port 2 Instruction Communications Port Execution Flag Enable Flag 000100 191915 A20207
126. window e Double click the Sequence Icon that includes the step in the project win C a dow to display the step list that contains all the steps within the sequence 8 2 2 Moving the Steps The order of steps can be changed by moving the selected step Use the fol lowing icons to reorder the steps Note Steps within the System protocols cannot be edited 1 2 3 1 Select a step and use the Up Icon on the toolbar to move up the step by level It can also be moved by selecting the Move from the pop up menu that can be displayed by right clicking 2 Select a step and use the Down Icon on the toolbar to move down the step by level It can also be moved by selecting the Move from the pop up menu that can be displayed by right clicking 3 Select a step and use the Top Icon on the toolbar to move the step to the top level It can also be moved by selecting the Move from the pop up menu that can be displayed by right clicking IMI It a HINI T 236 Step Editing LLIT T Section 8 2 4 Select a step and use the Bottom Icon on the toolbar to move the step to the bottom level It can also be moved by selecting the Move from the pop up menu that can be displayed by right clicking 8 2 3 Deleting the Steps Use the following procedure to delete the steps Note Steps within the System protocols cannot be deleted 1 2 3 1 Left click the icon of the step to be deleted More than one step can be se lected by
127. workspace i e the left pane of the window or double click the PMSU Icon in the project window i e the right pane 4 Left click and select the Trace 1 or Trace 2 Icon if the PLC is the CS CJ or Trace A or Trace B Icon if the PLC is the C200HX HG HE Right click and select Trace transfer PLC to personal computer from the pop up ss menu Alternatively left click the Trace transfer PLC to personal com A puter from the toolbar or select the same item from the PLC Menu The selected trace data will be displayed Use the scroll bar on the bottom of the window in order to scroll the trace data left and right 12 1 5 Adding and Saving Trace Data to Project File An uploaded trace can be added to and saved as part of a project by using the following procedure 1 2 3 1 Upload the trace from the PMSU as described in 12 1 4 Reading Trace Data from PMSU 2 The trace will be displayed and automatically added to the project 3 Select Save or Save As from the File Menu and save it as project file psw Use the following procedure to add information to the properties of the trace 1 2 3 1 Right click in the field where the trace is displayed Select Properties from the pop up menu The Trace Properties Dialog Box be displayed 2 Input the information on the trace and left click the OK Button Left click the Cancel Button to close the dialog box without saving the information 12 1 6 Retrieving Trace Data Trace data can
128. 0 Step Error Proces 1 ee ee ee Step Error Proces 1 sing Execution sing Execution Error process at the step No 00 Sequence Sequence execution termination Flag 190914 0 Flag 190914 0 Error process at the step No 00 Sequence restart nd L Note 1 The Step Error Processing Execution Flag is not a flag for the whole se quence but a flag to determine whether the error process is executed ata step in the sequence Therefore as in the above example 2 if the consec 165 Ladder Programming Method 4 4 2 C200HX HG HE Section 4 4 utive step terminates normally after error process execution during the se quence step No 00 the Flag will remain unchanged at 1 ON Thus it should be kept in mind that this Flag is not always useful as an error termi nation flag for the whole system Use the Forced Abort Flag while keeping the following points in mind A sequence under execution can be forced to stop by using the forced abort switch When the switch is changed from OFF to ON using the ladder program or Programming Console the protocol macro function changes the Forced Abort Flag from OFF to ON and then changes the Protocol Macro Execution Flag and the forced abort switch from ON to OFF Therefore do not turn the forced abort switch from ON to OFF using the ladder program or Programming Console e The Instruction Execution Flag should be set to the normally closed input condition in order to avoid another PMCR
129. 0 Tez CIN SCGUCHCES eera eE Cee ee eee haa Aee ed eee es 226 7 2 1 Displaying a Sequence List 0 0 cece eee 226 P2720 RENAMING SCQUENCES seeren ep ee eA he EY eee EEE ake AA 226 7 2 3 Changing an Existing Sequence Number 221 7 2 4 Copying Pasting Sequences 0 0 221 T22 Deletne Seguente asiri on eira eee oe hee nee 221 219 Setting Sequences Section 7 1 7 1 Setting Sequences 7 1 1 Sequence Setting Screen Refer to 3 2 Sequence Attributes Common to All Steps for details on setting Sequence name Transmission control method Receive wait time Tr Send finish time Tfs Response type Receive finish time Tfr Link word setting Ee EXAMPLE psw Communication Sequence Link Word ce 000 Procces value read set Scar J Sec J Sec J Sec ce OO Lamp set point read a Set Scan J Sec J Sec J Sec ce O02 Manipulated variable read a set Scan 4 EC J EEC 4 EEC ce O03 Set point read get acan J EC J FEC J EC ce O04 Alarm value read set ocan J Sec J Sec J Sec ce 005 Propo band Inte Deri time read set oC ar JEC J FEC J EC ce 006 Cooling coefficient read cet can J EC J EEC J EC ce OOF Dead band read set SC ar J Sec J Sec J sec 7 1 2 Setting Sequences Settings that can be made for sequences using the CX Protocol are shown in the following table Content Link Word Link 1 None CIO WR LR 2 HR AR DM EM Address Refer to Link Word Designat
130. 100 e Wor W 11 3 4 e Refresh 80 d a Data in receive message is written in OTe DM 0103 to DM 0104 DM0129 Settings Allocation with the CX Protocol Link Channel Information 20 x IN Area Addr Len IN Area Addr Len None fo fo None fo o Cancel OUT Area Addr Len OUT Area Addr Len None fo fo None fo fo 3 2 5 Response Type The response type will be valid only when there is an operand designated parameter in a receive message The response type designates when to write the receive data to the I O memory designated by the fourth operand for CS CJ or third operand for the C200HX HG HE of the PMCR instruction and how to notify this write process to the CPU Unit One of the following three methods can be used 79 Sequence Attributes Common to All Steps 1 2 3 When response writing is set to Yes under step attribute setting When response writing is set to No under step attribute setting When sequence has terminated Note Note When response writing is set to Yes under step attribute setting When response writing is set to No under step attribute setting 80 Section 3 2 1 Scan Notification Method Writes the data in the receive buffer into the I O memory when the data is scanned see note for the CPU Unit after conversion Turns OFF the PMCR Instruction Execution Fla
131. 2 33 34 35 36 37 7 4 ov 3 4 5 g 7 Note The system stores all the data that were received on DM0000 and after HEX conversion 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 i i amp W DM0000 g ng 4 5 6 7 Note No conversion The system reads 5 bytes of data to discard them Use when data 5 need not to be stored in the relay area and no error ispermissdle for anydata contents When converting to hexadecimal convert data other than numerical data in the following way e The negative sign is recognized as a minus value and the highest digit is stored as F hexadecimal e The decimal point is ignored when the data is stored e Symbols and characters other than O to F are stored as 0 hexadecimal Receive data string Variable ASCII to After conversion Example hexadecimal oo HEX 2D 31 32 4 W DM 7 DM0001 FO 01 HEX 31 32 33 2E 34 35 23 45 l DMo000 ASCII 12 3 45 stings Fee a DMOO00 _ 34 06 DM0001 oo 10 When converting from hexadecimal convert data other than numerical data in the following way e The negative sign is treated as a symbol and stored as 0 hexadecimal e The decimal point is ignored when the data is stored eee and characters other than 0 to F are stored as 0 hexadecimal W DM a gt i z i DMOO000 01 23 DMO001 _45 00 HEX 31 32 33 2E 34 35 T 34 DMo000 ASCI 12 3 45 sone eae DMOOO00 10 34 DM0001 o6 00
132. 2 46 asa heats hn data Awa ed we OE Ae eee aoe XXVI Operating Environment Precautions 0 0 00 cece eee eee XXVI Application Precautions 2 00 3 F440 b4 kay ol ew ee EERE xxvii Software Operating Procedures 0 0 ccc cece ee eee eens xxviii XXV Intended Audience 1 2 3 4 XXV Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel who must also have knowledge of electrical systems an electrical engineer or the equivalent e Personnel in charge of installing FA systems e Personnel in charge of designing FA systems e Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities General Precautions N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING The user must operate the product according to the performance specifica tions described in the operation manuals Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amuse ment machines safety equipment and other systems machines and equip ment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms This
133. 2C RS 232C General purpose external device General purpose external device General purpose General purpose General purpose external device external device external device Port 2 Types of PMSUs oo Communications function Model Name Communications Prot Cvclical port rate NT link oe macro test n O Oo 9 0 CS1W SCB21 V1 Serial RS 232C pot Oo OO O Communications RS 232C port 1 a ee CS1W SCB41 V1 Boards RS 422A 485 port 2 see ae 11 System Configuration Section 1 4 Communications Communications function Model Name port Protocol NT link Cyclical macro test omen FS eck oo en OL a a a E csiwscuerys poe tS fT ee RS 422A 485 port 1 CS1W SCU31 V1 RS 422A 485 port 2 Serial Jourwesouar vi e e enn OT OT PU e ERNS CJ1W SCU22 RS 232C port 2 PF oO gt 2 9 nits RS 422A 485 CJ1W SCU31 V1__ port 1 CJ1W SCU32 RS 422A 485 port 2 RS 232C RS 232C port 1 1 CJ1iW SCU41 V1 CJ1W SCU42 ean 422A 485 port 2 General Host com Devices to be connected Spartina puter pre PT None external gramming devices devices Note Cannot be used with two wire models 12 System Configuration Section 1 4 For the C200HX HG HE The following figure shows the system configuration of the PMSU and exter nal devices The RS 232C port provides 1 1 connection and the RS 422A 485 port provides 1 N connection CPU Unit C200HW COMO06 EV1 Communications Board on a
134. 5 3 Creating a New Message from the Message List Use the following procedure to create a new message from the message list 1 2 3 1 Double click the Protocol Icon in the project workspace and select and highlight the receive message or send message list Alternatively double iT click the Receive Message List Icon or Send Message List Icon in the project window E 2 Select the send message or receive message references by right clicking the Send Message List Icon in the project workspace Alternatively select the Create from the pop up menu in the project window and select the send message or receive message references or select the send message or receive message references from the Protocol Menu Send Message Header lt h gt Check code lt c gt Length lt I gt Address lt a gt Data ay bless age E 3 Left click Data and left click the Enter Button or press the Enter Key The Message Editor Menu Dialog Box will be displayed For details of how to create a message refer to 9 1 Creating Messages 5 3 2 Creating a New Matrix rs Use the following procedure to create a new matrix 1 2 3 1 Left click the Protocol Icon in the project workspace and select and high light the Matrix List Alternatively double click the Matrix List Icon in the project window 2 Right click either the Matrix List in the project workspace or right click the project window select Create from the pop up menu and select Matrix
135. 9 None None 1 Forced abort 1909 1919 executed 0 All other times ClO ClO n 9 n 19 None None 1 Sequence wait 1909 1919 ing 2 Sequence not waiting ClO ClO O to 1 Wait 1900 1900 release None py oe RTS Signal ClO ClO n 17 03 None None 1 ON control sig Status 1907 1917 0 OFF nal monitor DTR Signal Status Local Node Reception Busy Waiting to Receive 138 CTS Signal Status Remote Node Reception Busy Waiting to Receive CIO CIO 1907 1917 n 17 04 None None 1 ON 0 OFF DSR Signal ClO ClO n 7 n 17 None None 1 ON Status 1907 1917 0 OFF CIO 1907 CIO 1917 n 17 07 None bial 1 ON 0 OFF CIO CIO n 17 None il 1 Local node 1907 1917 reception busy 0 Local node waiting to receive CIO CIO n 17 None None 1 Remote node 1907 1917 reception busy 0 Remote node waiting to receive Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas Section 3 10 Type CS Serial CS CJ Serial Com C200HX HG HE Communica Contents Communica Communica mon tions Board tions Board tions Unit Allocation Area Special Auxiliary Area Special Auxiliary Area Area Port1 Port2 Port1 Port2 a od word word word word pan mae Transfer No Error ClO CIO n 18 i to CIO 00 to All O Error Gen 1908 1918 283 03 erated Sta 0 No tus Port C AER Parity Error CIO CIO n 8 n 18 CIO 1 Parity error Error 1908 1918 283 0 Normal I Does not turn ON in C200HE HX HG protocol macro mode
136. 917 n 7 n 17 bits 03 04 06 07 C200HX HG HE None CS CJ CIO 1907 CIO 1917 n 7 n 17 bit 10 C200HX HG HE None CS CJ ClO 1907 CIO 1917 n 7 n 17 bit 08 C200HX HG HE None Section 3 10 Initial ization CS CJ only Set to 1 ON when the At sequence is waiting due to the WAIT power command being issued Wait status can be set from OFF to ON and move to the next step by using the Wait Release Flag in the ladder program See note 6 CS CJ only Set from 0 to 1 when the sequence WAIT command is released CS CJ only Reads the status of the transfer control signals DTR DSR CTS RTS for each port 1 High 0 Low CS CJ only Indicates the reception status of the remote note when the Xon Xoff flow control and RTS CTS flow control are set for the transmis sion control parameters Xon Xoff flow control clears the reception buffer when the sequence starts so the remote node reception status is O 1 Remote node busy reception buffer is full therefore reception no possible 0 Remote node waiting reception possible CS CJ only Indicates the reception status of the local node at the PMSU when Receive is executed when the Xon Xoff flow control is set for the transmission control parame ters 1 Local node busy reception not possible as reception buffer is 4 5 2 kbytes min 0 Local node waiting reception possible as reception buffer is 1 5 0 5 kbytes max
137. ASCII 00 52 44 38 39 31 37 OD LRC 2byte ASCII 00 52 44 38 39 37 31 OD LRC ibyte ASCII 00 52 44 38 39 17 OD Note LCR2 is the 2 s complement of the LCR calculation result SUM This mode adds arithmetically the characters of a set of data to create a check code Users can designate either of the directions for storing the SUM as with variables 00 Hex settex Ho 38 Hex Discarded a 39 Hex tha e A SUM 107 Hex result E AE D S t byte ee EEEE 2 bytes Check Code SUM 1 byte ASCII 2byte 0052 44 38 39 30 37 OD SUM 2 byte ASCII 4byte 0052 44 38 39 30 31 30 37 OD SUM 1 byte BIN 1byte 00 52 44 38 39 07 OD SUM 2 byte BIN 2byte 00 52 44 38 39 01 07 OD SUM 1 byte ASCII 2byte 00 52 44 38 39 37 30 0D SUM 2 byte ASCII 4byte 00 52 44 38 39 31 30 37 30 OD SUM 2 byte BIN 2byte 00 52 44 38 39 07 01 OD Note SUM1 is the 1 s complement bit reversal of SUM SUM is the 2 s complement of SUM CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check Code This mode regards the whole data as a bit string message polynomial divides this string by the fixed constant generative polynomial and de fines the remainder as the check code Communication Message Attributes Section 3 4 CRC detects errors better than the vertical parity or horizontal parity and is used widely in LANs etc For example the SYSMAC LINK uses CRC CCITT Various kinds of CRC can be used The calcul
138. CU series PLCs the bits are read as binary data There are three types of variables as shown below For each variable users can set the attribute which designates the direction forward or reverse direc tion to read or to write the data to be converted 1 ASCII Data Conversion Hexadecimal Data Conversion When ASCII data conversion is performed the designated data is read as Hex hexadecimal data and each digit is converted to its ASCII code num ber Consequently the size of the data will be double that before conver sion When Hex data conversion is performed the designated data is read as ASCII data and each byte of the data is converted to a hexadecimal value Consequently the size of the data will be half that before conversion The specifications for the conversion vary with the designated data read write designations and direction designations For conversion examples refer to page 105 Read write direction a ree Unconverted variable X Y X Y Y bytes of data from the address designated by X are processed without conversion Variable converted to X Y X Y Y 2 bytes of hexadeci Y bytes of hexadecimal ASCII mal data from the data is converted into address designated by ASCII data equivalent to X are converted to Y Y 2 bytes before stor bytes of ASCII data age with the address designated by X as the beginning hexadecimal Variable converted to amp X Y amp X Y Y 2 bytes of A
139. Communications Board for the CS and the Serial Communications Units for the CS CJ are all referred to as the PMSU Protocol Macro Support Unit Sequence Step Structure One sequence consists of up to 16 steps One step includes one command Send Receive Send amp Receive Open Close Flush or Wait for CS CJ only and one or two messages Send Receive or Send amp Receive Step transition is designated by the next process error process within the step Step mechanism outline for Send Step mechanism outline for Receive or Send amp Receive Wait Flush or Open amp Close Next process Next process Error process Protocol Macro Outline Section 3 1 1 2 3 1 Sequence specific data common to all steps Description Transmission X on X off flow control RTS CTS flow control modem control control parameter delimiter control or contention control Shared memory area between the PLC and the PMSU Monitoring time Time for monitoring send and receive process Response type Timing for writing received data 2 Step specific data Description Command type Receive Send amp Receive Command Send Receive Send amp Receive Wait Flush Open or Close Repeat counter The number of times to iterate the step 1 to 255 Send message The contents set here are sent as a message Receive The message that was message actually received is com pared with the data set here Matrix Selec
140. Communications Sequence Section 3 7 e Designating the word number of the measured temperature as 1 digit of the repeat counter N 1 byte N 0 7 HEX to ASCII conversion 3 4 ASCII code JA When N 1 word number 15 00 Specify N 1 1 is specified 1 bytes Repeat counter s value Conversion to ASCII data As a result create the send message as follows of um a x o fede ol res Header Address wee sles Wain Terminator amp R 1 2 RXO 5 N t 00 LRC HParity 0 2byte ASC 2A0D Receive Message Creation e When reading the data of the measured temperature from the word desig nated by the fourth operand third operand for C200HX HG HE of the PMCR instruction 2N 1 without fixing the length Note N means the value of the repeat counter Eg om J E oom 4th operand 3rd for C200HX HG HE gt Specify amp W 2N 1 pam Data length byte Word set by 4th 3rd for C200HX HG HE operand of PMCR instruction 2N 1 Conversion to HEX data Create the receive message as follows M red ef ut alafo o a ros Header Address Data Check code Terminator R 1 2 RXOO amp W 2N 1 LRC H Parity 0 2 byte ASC 2A0D Means that the system reads the data between RX00 and the check code converts the data from ASCII to Hex and writes the converted data to the address of the fourth third for C200HX HG HE operand of the
141. Communications Settings between Per sonal Computer and PLC 276 Modem Connections Section 10 4 5 Left click the Modem Tab and make settings for the modem driver the present address and the destination telephone number Network Settings S YSMAC WAY l xX Network Driver Modem Select the driver for the modem Left click here to dis play the dialog box re ferred to in step 7 Modem p Standard 56000 bpe K56Fles Moder Configure Eurent Location Left click here to dis play the dialog box referred to in step 11 Configure May Location Connect To Country Code United States of America 1 Area Code E Telephone Number E Cancel Help Use the following procedure to make settings for the modem and the present address 6 Left click the Configure Button to the right of the Modem selection box The following screen which is used to set the properties for the modem will be displayed 277 Modem Connections Section 10 4 7 Left click the General Tab and set the baud rate for communications be tween the personal computer and the modem OMRON_ME5614E_56K_FAX_DATA MODEM Pro EJ General Connection Options 34 OMRON_MES614E_S6K_FAX_DATA_MOD Port COM Speaker volume l Set the baud rate for commu fo H High nications between the personal computer and the modem This setting should be the same as that for the commu nications
142. Computer and PMSU Section 11 1 he Protocol Compile Download X Dinen password protection M Include Source Information Compile podaj Downoad stop DAL Downloaded OOO OO Ks 4 Select Download Protocols from the Protocol Menu or left click the Download Protocol Icon on the toolbar The Protocol Compile Download Dialog Box will be displayed Note Transfer a protocol to the PMSU only after selecting a protocol Close Prior to download a password can be applied to protect the protocol Se lect the Protocol password protection check box to enable password protection Enter a password in the Password Field up to eight charac ters Enter the password in the Confirm Field When adding a source code select Include Source Information If the source code is not to be added the amount of data transferred to the PMSU will be small but the protocol data that is read to the personal com puter when performing read PLC to computer will vary Refer to the note on page 291 Left click the Compile Button Errors or alarms that occurred during com piling will be displayed in the output window bottom left of the screen When the compile is normally completed the Download Button will be come active Left click this button Transfer status will be displayed on the indicator Press the Download Cancel Button to stop transfer processing When the transfer is completed the message Download Completed OK will be d
143. E with no conversion amp W 11 5 2 The system writes 2 bytes of receive data to the input area 1 of the link word s 5th word with hexadecimal conversion amp W LROO60 3 The system writes 3 bytes of receive data to LROO60 with conversion to hexadecimal form Section 3 4 Items available Send Receive Address Communication Message Attributes Section 3 4 How to set X and Y Specification BE available Receive E How Wildcard Can be set only in With to the address part or ee a in the set data part of the address part 2 bytes X receive message can be received from e Setting the wildcard any address in the address part With 5 _ The system designated in the receives all the address part 5 bytes messages without Can be received from checking the any address address data Setting the wildcard in the data part The system receives all data without checking the received data N repeat counter repeat ear value How Linear expression including N yN x R 1 2 to repeat counter The system set larly repeatedly reads 2 Y number of bytes starting at bytes word No third 1 255 operand of the PMCR instruction Repeat counter 1 for CS CJ or value word No second Coefficient operand of the 0 255 PMCR instruction 1 for C2O0HX HG HE to send as ASCII Wildcard Can be set only in amp W 1 the data part of the The system rec
144. ECV CMND or other PMCR instruction being executed by changing the set ting of C1 bits 12 to 15 or wait until the port becomes available As a PMCR instruction execution condition set the Communications Port Enabled Flag to normally open Wait until the protocol data transfer is com pleted or transfer the protocol data using the CX Protocol Errors at the Protocol Execution Serial communications mode setting Serial communications mode is set to protocol macro Problem Indicator display SDLI RDLJ COML indicators are not lit Electrically not connected SDUI RDLJ COML indicators are lit However communications cannot be performed Status information Bit 15 Protocol Macro Execution Flag in the allocated data area n 9 n 19 turns ON when PMCR instruction is executed However data cannot be properly sent or received Bit 15 Protocol Macro Execution Flag in the allocated data area n 9 n 19 turns ON momentarily or does not turn ON at all Bit 10 Sequence Abort Termination Flag in the protocol allocated data area n 9 n 19 is ON Bit 15 Protocol Macro Execution Flag in the allocated data area n 9 n 19 remains ON when PMCR instruction is executed without setting the monitor time for each sequence Send data is being sent but no response is received from the destination device Send processing is not executed Bit 10 destination bu
145. Example LRC horizontal parity 0 2 Byte ASCII p Data type Default BIN or ASCII Check code Note Set the calculation range of the error check code lt c gt in the Data Field of the Message Editor Dialog Box Length lt l gt Use the following procedure to set the length the number of bytes of the mes 246 man Cancel sage The data length is automatically calculated in send processing accord ing to the Length lt l gt setting in a frame The length lt l gt data will be added when data is sent The Length types of 1 byte or 2 bytes are available and the Conversion types of BIN or ASCII are available 1 2 3 1 Left click the Length lt l gt Field for a message and then left click the Enter E Button or press the Enter Key The Message Length lt l gt Dialog Box will be displayed The dialog box can also be displayed from the Message Ed itor Dialog Box Refer to the previous descriptions for the Header lt h gt Conversion tf BIN Cf ASC Select a length type from the Size drop down list For 1 Byte the length is set to one byte For 2 Bytes the length is set to two bytes 2 Enter the length in the Default Field The range is O to 255 for 1 Byte or 0O to 65535 for 2 Bytes Creating Messages Section 9 1 3 Select the BIN conversion type or ASCII conversion type from the Conver sion Field 4 Left click the OK Button to accept the settings or the Cancel Button to leave the setti
146. Field for a Step Use the following procedure to create a new message for a Step 1 2 3 02 1 Right click the Send Message or Receive Message Field for a step and select New Message from pop up menu 2 The Message Editor Menu Dialog Box will be displayed Input the mes sage name in the Name Field Message Editor x lt lt gt Delete 7 I Message Data Color Key Constant Hex Ecis ES Bi Normal Header lt h gt g rei Terminator lt t pas lt a gt Edit Insert Edit reer _ edt ieee Wil check Length lt I gt C Edit Chek Co de Check Code lt c gt i E E Eat Cancel 3 Create the message as appropriate Refer to 9 7 Creating Messages for details on how to construct a message 4 Left click the OK Button to accept the settings Click the Cancel Button to leave the settings unchanged Creating a New Message from the Message List Use the following procedure to create a new message from the message list 1 2 3 1 Double click the Protocol Icon in the project workspace and select and highlight the receive message or send message list Alternatively double ai click the Receive Message List Icon or Send Message List Icon in the project window 240 Creating Messages Section 9 1 2 Select the send message or receive message references by right clicking the Send Message List
147. Flag A21900 is ON the FAL instruction will be executed Protocol Macro 1 Execution Flag 191915 0 Sequence Sequence Sequence execution termination restart 1 i 00100 0 1 cycle The process value in D00201 is ransferred to D00300 r Sequence normal termination Step Error Processing Execu tion Flag 191914 0 FAL instruction is executed Sequence error termination 1 Step Error Processing Execution Flag 191914 0 Application of the Receive Data Storage Area before PMCR Execution The receive buffer is cleared to O right before a communications sequence is executed at the time of PMCR execution Therefore if a ladder program that constantly reads the process data as shown in the following example is cre ated the process value data will be momentarily cleared to O if data cannot be read due to a reception error There is a function that reads and sets data from the I O memory area of the CPU Unit for a number of words of the first m in the receive area right before the communications sequence is executed This is done in order to hold the received data when a reception error occurs With this function the process value data will not be cleared to 0 and the data that existed just before recep tion failure can be retained 162 Ladder Programming Method Example Always ON Communications Protocol Macro Set Port Enabled Flag Execution Flag H Flag When the receive area is not retained Section 4 4
148. General purpose external device General purpose external device General purpose external device General purpose external device Types of PMSUs Only Models Having the Protocol Macro Function Communications Function Communications Protocol No NT link a rosin atin 0 A orto CB00HW COMO4 c Oo E EV1 RS 232C pot Oo o o o o C200HW COMOS rome men a ff E EV1 HO f of of of n T Bao C200HW COMO6E PES at ee ot ee at E EV 1 RS 232C port B com l purpose puter pro purpose with Com Devices to be connected external gramming external PLC PT munica devices devices devices tions Units Note 1 C200HW COMLILI EV1 Enhanced function model 2 Not available for two wire models 13 Protocol Macro Section 1 5 1 5 Protocol Macro 1 5 1 Protocol Macro Outline Protocol macro is a function that creates macros for communications proto cols that conform to specifications for communications between general pur pose external devices that have a serial communications port Generally the protocol macro performs two kinds of function e Creation of communications frames messages e Creation of procedures for sending and receiving communications frames messages Creation of Communications Frames Messages 1 2 3 1 Communications frames referred to here as messages and which can be understood by general purpose external devices can be created a
149. HX HG HE Turns from 0 to 1 when a continuous trace is started using CX Protocol Turns from 1 to O when the trace stops CS CJ and C200HX HG HE CX Protocol shot trace starts when it turns from O to 1 When the trace buffer is full the PMSU is cleared See note 5 CS CJ and C200HX HG HE Turns from 0 to 1 when Protocol Macro processing stops Depending on the timing processing may be com pleted CS CJ only Set to 1 ON when the Forced Abort Flag is used from the user program When the Forced Abort Flag is set to ON when the sequence is in the final stages the sequence will either end or be aborted Section 3 10 When sequence ends When sequence is aborted Whena reception compari son error occurs Using CX Protocol Using CX Protocol User set When Forced Abort is generated When sequence starts When sequence starts When sequence starts When trace is completed Using CX Protocol When shot trace is com pleted User set When sequence starts Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas Miia r Wait Sequence Wait ing Flag Wait Release Flag Transfer Transfer Control control sig Signal Monitor nal monitor Remote Node Busy Waiting to Receive Local Node Busy Waiting to Receive CS CU CIO 1909 CIO 1919 n 9 n 19 bit 09 C200HX HG HE None CS CJ CIO 1900 CIO n bits 00 08 C200HX HG HE None CS CJ CIO 1907 CIO 1
150. Icon the protocol list will be displayed in the project window e By double clicking the Protocol List Icon in the project window all the protocols in the protocol list will be displayed on screen Dpp ppt oe gi Eh php pgi T 6 2 2 Renaming a Protocol in the List Use the following procedure to rename a registered protocol Note System protocol names cannot be changed 1 2 3 1 Left click the Protocol Name setting in the protocol list or select the Pro tocol Name setting Press the Enter Key 2 The current protocol name will become an editable field Input the new pro tocol name and press the Enter Key The new protocol name must not ex ceed 30 characters Note Once a protocol has been deleted it cannot be recovered 6 2 3 Deleting a Protocol from the List Use the following procedure to delete a protocol Note System protocols cannot be deleted 1 2 3 1 Left click the icon of the protocol to be deleted from the protocol list More than one protocol can be selected by pressing the Shift Key and selecting another protocol to extend the selection or by pressing the Ctrl Key and selecting another protocol to add to the selection 2 Left click the Delete Icon from the toolbar or press the Delete Key or left click the Cut Icon from the toolbar or press the Ctrl X Keys to delete the protocol The project can be deleted by right clicking and selecting Delete from the pop up menu Note Once a protocol has been deleted it
151. Icon in the project workspace Alternatively select the Create from the pop up menu in the project window and select the send message or receive message references or select the send message or receive message references from the Protocol Menu Send Message Header lt h gt Gheck code lt c gt Leneth lt I gt Address lt a gt Data gy bless age E 3 Left click Data and left click the Enter Button or press the Enter Key The Message Editor Menu Dialog Box will be displayed For details of how to create a message refer to 9 1 Creating Messages 9 1 2 Message Setting Screen For details about message settings refer to 3 4 Communication Message Attributes Length Check code Message name Header Terminator Error check code Length Address Data OET th Check code lt c gt Length lt 1 gt Address lt a gt m SOOO 1 2400 _ CH parity 0 k2 Eyte ASCID PRTI dht ape 1 ot Sag gi 2400 LRG H parity 0 2Byte ASGID PROB fh gt t lt c ape 1 a SOW a 2400 LRG H parity 0 2Byte ASCID PRIA dht art 1 aha DAT d Ym loan 1 Om fU nee ee i POD A tori fh sed ovat 1 9 1 3 Contents of Messages The settings that can be made for messages using the CX Protocol are shown in the following table Content Check Code lt c gt Type None LRC LRC2 1 CRC CCITT CRC 16 SUM 1 byte SUM 2 bytes SUM1 1 byte SUM1 2 bytes SUM2 1 byte SUM2 2 bytes O to 255 if Type is 1 byte 0 to 65535 if T
152. J ClO CS CJ and C200HX HG HE Error When When Error Code 1909 CIO 1919 code contents and information are error sequence n 9 n 19 bits listed on page 147 Protocol Macro occurs starts 00 to 03 Error Codes C200HX HG HE CIO 286 bits 08 to 11 or 12 to 15 Sequence Communication CS CJ ClO 1910 CS CJ only The processing com When monitor Sequence No ClO 1920 n 10 munication sequence number will be sequence n 20 bits set when the sequence execution starts 00 to 11 starts C200HX HG HE It is also set when a Sequence Num None ber Error occurs error code 2 It is cleared when STUP is executed or the PMSU is restarted Execution CS CJ ClO 1911 CS CJ and C200HX HG HE Sets When When Completion Step CIO 1921 n 11 step numbers 0 to 15 0 to F hexa step is sequence No code n 21 bits decimal when execution is com executed starts 08 to 11 pleted C200 HX HG HE Cleared when either the sequence CIO 287 CIO starts executing STUP is executed 288 bits 04 to 07 or the PMSU is restarted Execution CS CJ ClO 1913 CS CJ only Each bit corresponding When When Completion Step CIO 1923 n 13 to step numbers 0 to 15 bits 00 to step is sequence No Storage Flag n 23 bits 15 for which execution is complete executed starts 00 to 15 will be set to 1 ON Once a bit has C200HX HG HE been set it will remain set ON dur None ing the sequence and after comple tion so bits corresponding to steps
153. K emea Timer Tts Value Time Unit OK E Ei 1 second Cancel HE OK emea 3 3 Step Attributes Set the sequence attributes as described below 3 3 1 CX Protocol Setup Screen With Without Repeat counter mene mesae response writing Error process Send wait time Command Retry count Receive message Next process Step Repeat Command _ Retry Send Wait Send Message Recv Message Response Next Error a 001 RSET 001 send amp Receive 3 Soag Rv TES Next Next D al FSET 00 send amp Receive d Sot 1 Faiga YES End bort For the details of setup method refer to 8 1 Step Setting 84 Step Attributes 3 3 2 Setting Parameter Command Retry count Description Sets the number of times that the step is repeated The system increases the value of the repeat counter N at every step Sets one of the follow ing seven kinds of command Send Sends data Receive Receives data Send amp Receive Sends and receives data Wait see note Keeps the step on standby Until the Wait Clear switch is turned ON from the CPU Unit Once the switch is turned ON the step shifts to the next process Flush see note Clears all the data within the receive buffer Open see note Turns ON the DTR signal at the desired timing The DTR sig nal is held ON after the sequence has ter minated and after the port is re enabled using the STUP instruct
154. M 39 2 OOD Receive Messege fm l 2 RO j L 2 J HE 40 33 32 EZ 88 W4 30 30 320 22 H H 34 step Humber 0 o 0 o i 0 J 0 0o 7 1 ATS LTS DTA DSA e Transmission or reception data and signals are traced from left to right starting from the leftmost point The figures at the top row represent 10 byte units The send message is shown above and the receive message below Both send and receive messages are in ASCII statements followed by hexa decimal data The step number is displayed If the PLC is the C200HX HG HE the letter 6 m II e or P will be displayed in the step number The RTS CTS DTR and DSR signals are indicated in red above the dot ted baseline and in blue below the dotted baseline In addition to the above tracing items the trace number execution sequence number and communications error will be displayed if the PLC is the CS CJ The trace number changes with the change of the sequence number If a communications error occurs the screen will display the letter P F or O Note 1 The ON or OFF state of the control signal is not sampled correctly Use the state result for reference only The sampling of the ON or OFF states of the RTS CTS DTR and DSR signals starts when the transmission or reception of a single character of data has been completed Changes in signals without transmission or re ception data or changes in signals while a single cha
155. Message List SEd Matrix List 3 ani a9 Wlatrin 5 3 EX1 Protocol List HS Controller E5_K read ES Trace List fee bP NewPLCi If the establishment of online connections is unsuccessful the following screen will be displayed Check the communications settings Cx Protocol AN Fated to connect to the PLO Try reconnecting to the PLE Lancel Note The personal computer and PLC must be connected to each other for online communications before the following items are performed Transfer of communications port setting data from PMSU Data transfer from PLC to personal computer e Transfer of communications port setting data to PMSU Data transfer from personal computer to PLC e Transfer of protocol data from PMSU Data transfer from PLC to personal computer e Transfer of protocol data to PMSU Data transfer from personal computer to PLC e Transfer of protocol list data from PMSU Data transfer from PLC to per sonal computer e Start stop and transfer of tracing data Data transfer from PLC to per sonal computer e O table creation e O memory display editing e Error log display 269 Modem Connections Section 10 4 N Caution Online connection of the CX Protocol cannot be made to a PLC which is con nected online to SYSMAC CPT or SYSMAC PST Simultaneous online con nections cannot be made regardless of whether there is only one personal computer i e the communications port is the same or there a
156. Monitoring Time The calculation method of monitoring time for the operand addressing with out response writing is shown here Referring to this calculation method cal culate the monitor times for the operand addressing with response writing link word addressing and direct addressing When actually setting the moni tor times as sequence data be sure to provide sufficient allowance CPU Unit PMCR 01E1 0001 D00000 D0000 D01000 PMCR instruction process Protocol Support Board Send data conversion process External device gt D1000 Received data writ Received data conversion process 3 External device process Number Function Time Required PMCR instruction s process time Send data conversion process time External device process time Received data transmission time Send data transmission time Depends on the Unit Board being used Depends on number of conversion bytes Number of data characters x num ber bits in one character trans mission rate Depends on the external devices process Number of data characters x one character bit transmission rate Internal process time from the start of PMCR instruction to the end of the send data transfer Time from the end of the send data conversion based on the specified conversion method to the start of the send data to the external
157. NSJ5 TQULI B G5D NSJ5 SQULI B G5D NSJ8 TVULI B G5D NSJ10 TV_IL B G5D NSJ12 TSLIL B G5D NSJ5 TQLILI B M3D NSJ5 SQLIL1 B M3D NSJ8 TV_IL B M3D NSJW ETN21 NSUW CLK21 V1 NSJW IC101 Operation Manual SYSMAC CP Series CP1H X40DL 1 1 CP1H XA40DL1 L CP1H Y20DT D CP1L L14DL L CP1L L20DU L CP1L M30DL L CP1L M40DL L CP1H and CP1L CPU Unit Programming Manual CXONE ALULIC V4 ALULID V4 CX Programmer Operation Manual W339 W393 W394 W474 W450 W452 W451 W446 Describes the installation and operation of the CS series PLCs Describes the installation and operation of the CJ series PLCs Describes programming and other methods to use the functions of the CS CJ NSJ series PLCs The following information is included e Programming e Tasks e File memory e Other functions Use this manual in combination with the SYSMAC CS Series Operation Manual W339 or SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual W393 Describes the ladder diagram programming instructions sup ported by CS CJ series or NSJ series PLCs When programming use this manual together with the Opera tion Manual or Hardware User s Manual CS1 W339 CJ1 W393 or CJ2 W472 and Programming Manual or Software User s Manual CS1 CJ1 W394 or CJ2 W473 Provides the following information on the CP Series e Overview Features e System configuration e Mounting and wiring e O memory allocation e Troubleshooting Use this manu
158. NT link 1 N DM 6646 a i to 07 RS 232C port baud rate setting 00 1 200 initial value 01 2 400 02 4 800 03 9 600 04 19 200 el to 15 RS 232C port frame format settings Start bit Data length Stop bit Parity 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit Even initial value 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit Odd 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit Without 1 bit 7 bits 2 bits Even 1 bit 7 bits 2 bits Odd 1 bit 7 bits 2 bits Without 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit Even 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit Odd 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit Without 1 bit 8 bits 2 bits Even l 1 bit 8 bits 2 bits Odd 1 bit 8 bits 2 bits Without DM 6647 00 to 15 RS 232C port send delay time settings 0000 initial value to 9999 BCD unit 10ms DM 6648 00 to 07 Unit number settings for RS 232C port host link mode 00 initial value to 31 BCD 357 PLC Setup and PMSU Settings Appendix B Settings Related to Peripheral Port Wordnumber Bt Function initial values factory set DM 6650 00 to 03 Peripheral port communications conditions standard format settings 00 Standard settings initial values Start bit 1 bit Data length 7 bits Parity even Stop bit 2 bits Baud rate 9 600bps 1 Set separately 04 to 11 Reserved for system 12 to 15 Peripheral port mode settings 0 Host link initial value 1 No RS 232C procedure ings bps DM 6651 e to 07 Peripheral port baud rate settings bps 00 1 200 initial value 01 2 400 02 4 800 03 9 600 04 19 200 ie to 15 Peripheral port frame format settings Start bit Data l
159. Only With the protocol macro function each port has a reception buffer of up to 2 5 kbytes To receive a large volume of data at one time or when the trans mission sequence is waiting use a reception buffer with a large capacity If the reception buffer is already full and data is received data will exceed the 2 5 kbytes of capacity and will overwrite existing data in the buffer For this rea son always be sure to use the flow control setting With the full duplex system the reception buffer will be cleared immediately before the sequence is executed The reception buffer receives data while both Send and Receive commands are being executed and the data is treated as macro data 149 Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas Section 3 10 Relationship between the Flow Control and the Maximum No of Words of Reception Transmission Data CS CJ Only One Serial Communications Board or Unit has a reception buffer of 2 5 bytes Flow control will be set to start at the point when the reception buffer contains approximately 2 bytes of data and flow control will be released when approxi mately 0 5 bytes of reception data have been processed Set the reception buffer so that it can receive a maximum of 2 kbytes of recep tion data at a given time and by setting the Receive command to receive a maximum of 1 000 bytes O3E8 hexadecimal of transmission data at any given time it is possible to store data in units of 1 000 bytes 500 words max
160. Outline of PLC Memory Window 0 00 e cece eens 302 12 2 1 PLC Memory Window and PLC Data Table 302 I2 2 2 Mam Funcions o52 csdw eek cea aa cane eae decease 303 ee EITO MA hedtes Pec ci hia ees oe oes eed oe ead aaa te cone 303 12 2 4 Starting and Quitting PLC Memory Window 303 12 2 5 Changing Display and Input Formats 305 12 2 6 PLC Memory Window Settings 0 000 c eee eee 306 12 3 I O Memory Display and Editing 2 ccc eee eee 309 12 341 Displaying I O Memory a 050c20 oe saws eed se da tee eek 309 12 3 2 Editing VO Memory Data ssa raiki radun meea Ta a benand ae 309 12 3 3 Writing Same Data to Successive Addresses 4 310 12 4 I O Memory Monitor 0 240 5 4 e2r08 48 a9 oa nenna anaona 312 12 4 1 Monitoring Whole I O Memory 0 0000 ee eee 313 t242 Address Monitor sesion tr dk aAA E a wad A 314 12 4 3 Finding Force set or Force reset Bits 0000000 316 12 5 I O Memory Transfer and Comparison 0 000 cece ee 317 12 5 1 Precautions for Transfer of Data to PLC 317 1225 2 Data Transi 2 be os kee eee ae eh eke eee ei ese 318 12 5 3 Comparison with Data in PLC 20 0 0 0 ee eee eee 319 297 Tracing Transmission Lines Section 12 1 12 1 Tracing Transmission Lines Transmission or reception data and signals of a maximum of 670 characters that the Board
161. PMCR PMCR 1456 instruction 0000 process 000 Send data conversion process OUT ee CN data area notification lt External device process Received IN area data conversion process lt gt q gt lt gt q gt The communications response time is the total time from 1 to 8 in the above figure 197 Communications Response Time Performance Section 4 8 198 al Time Required PMCR instruction About 40 us The time from the start of PMCR executing notification instruction to the end of the process time instruction notification to the PMSU Send data notification One cycle time maximum The time required for the data trans process time fer based on the PMSU request Send data conversion Depends on the number The time required for the data process time of conversion bytes conversion based on the specified conversion mode which finishes at the start of data sending to the external device Send data transmission Number of data charac The time required for the data i ters x one character bit transmission to the external device transmission rate Use double the calculated time because idle time exists between send characters Received data transmis Number of data charac The time required for the receive sion time ters x one character bit data transmission from the external transmission rate device Use two to five times the cal
162. S PRECAUTIONS 4054 wscsaiiare sobre e EN 1 tended Audien e prs ieee enero acs or A R Ge a eee ei ea 2 General Precauuions tswcwia de coats beck hi eas eee ead dette ha Sea ee wks 3 Saket PreGAuUlONS sos4cNs ciediwiter eee et few ae hie Roe et es AES dee 4 Operating Environment Precautions 0 0 00 aaae 5 Appleation Precauti ns ys vice v2 ruriri TETE ERAS Ree nes 6 Software Operating Procedures es 3 49 kid aw Soo SMES eo BSS ORR a ai SECTION 1 PNULOOU COON Han ae ooh ed Se lel Overview or the CX Protocols lt Mu casts cache cathe taewatieee ganda gieda E2 Peau aetra samen Madeley een Resta ee E0G t Pate see ee AT 1 3 Supported PLC Models and Personal Computers 00 0c eee 124 Sytem Conn suru agua cies cairn Mea a a a eae ou eee en eae ES PROtOCOl MiO erana Be hee ie OR ie ee ORR ee eee ees l6 Protocol Macro Struc ure i543 4 dati k tee Lacie tree a oes OG BSA ows l 4 Data Created Dy the CX Protocoli 5 0 csws fhe nd isiat baked Gia eh akan oes 1 8 Main Screens of the CX Protocol 0 enana aana eee eens 19 Overview Ol Project Creation 3 54 rnaen hanes ts dares Buse E are toe 1 10 Incorporated Standard System Protocol 0 0 0 eee ee 1 11 Basic Procedure of the Protocol Macro Usage 0 200s Td Specifica ONS se asthe dh eee hee cba eke cae eee eared oe 1 13 Differences between Protocol Macros 00 cee ee ees SECTION 2 Installing Uninstalling Starting Ending
163. S CJ Protocol and C200HX HG HE Protocol 000 0c eee SECTION 12 Tracing and Monitoring 12 1 Tracing Transmission Lines 12 2 Outline of PLC Memory Window 12 3 I O Memory Display and Editing 12 4 I O Memory Monitor 12 5 I O Memory Transfer and Comparison SECTION 13 Error and Error Log Display SECTION 14 Troubleshooting SECTION 15 HeD 62636456654 s5e0 itait Appendices A Creating the Protocol Applications B PLC Setup and PMSU Settings C Wiring RS 232C Cable Connectors Revision History 285 286 291 293 295 297 298 302 309 312 317 321 329 337 34 355 361 365 1X TABLE OF CONTENTS About this Manual The CX Protocol is Support Software for the protocol macro functionality This manual describes the installation and operation of the CX Protocol and includes the sections described below This manual is intended for the following personnel Personnel in charge of installing FA devices Personnel designing FA systems Personnel managing FA facilities a a CXONE ALLILIC V4 ALLILID V4 CX Protocol Operation Manual W344 this manual Describes the use of the CX Protocol to create protocol macros as communications sequences to communicate with external devices This manual CXONE ALLILIC V4 ALLILID V4 W463 Installation and overview of CX One FA Integrated Tool Pack CX One Setup Manual age Sysmac Studio
164. SCII data Y bytes of ASCII data is i from the address desig converted into hexadeci nated by X are con mal data equivalent to verted to Y bytes of Y 2 bytes before storage hexadecimal data with the address desig nated by X as the begin ning 99 Communication Message Attributes Section 3 4 Variable Format 100 X Y pi R DM0000 2 Data size on the transmission path Conversion direction Conversion attribute Blank Unconverted Read Write option R Read from the PLC W Write to the PLC The linear expression including N or the wildcard or indirect designation by the Read option R Reads from PLC Reads bits 0 to 11 of word as 3 digit BCD when using C200HX HG HE series PLCs or as binary when using CS CJ series PLCs Effective address The first word The linear expression including N or the linear expression including N or the wildcard Blank Forward direction z Reverse direction ASCII conversion amp Hexadecimal conversion Note 1 How to designate a word How to designate Symboltobe Exampe a word designated When linear When linear expression expression including N 0 including N 2N 1 Operand None Cannot be set R 2N 1 designation Link word O1 11 O2 12 R O1 R O1 2N 1 designation Direct designation CIOLILIL R DMO000 R DM0000 2N 1 WROL note 2 LRLILI note 3 HRLIL ARLI DMUILILIW EMU Ll Word 2 For CS C
165. SYSMAC CX Protocol Ver 1 9 CXONE ALCILIC V4 ALLIUD V4 OPERATION MANUAL SYSMAC CX Protocol Ver 1 9 CXONE ALL JC V4 ALL L D V4 Operation Manual Revised January 2012 Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided with them Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam age to the product DANGER Indicates information that if not heeded is likely to result in loss of life or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage N WARNING Indicates information that if not heeded could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage N Caution Indicates information that if not heeded could result in relatively serious or minor injury damage to the product or faulty operation OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The abbreviation PLC me
166. Sequence number sequence name each sequence settings 2 Settings of all the steps in table format 291 Printing Protocols Section 11 2 3 Send receive message name and message settings 4 Matrix name and contents of the matrix case 11 2 1 Setting the Printer Set the printer settings using the Print Setup Dialog Box With the CX Proto col use the following procedure 1 2 3 1 2 oo o Select Print Setup from the File Menu The Print Setup Dialog Box will be displayed Select a printer from the Name drop down list Use the Properties Button to set the printer Select a paper size from the Paper drop down list in the Base Field Select a paper feed method from the Paper Source drop down list Select either Port or Land in the Paper Field Left click the OK Button to confirm the settings or the Cancel Button to leave the settings unchanged For further details about the printer settings refer to the instruction manual of the printer 11 2 2 Printing a Protocol Use the following procedure to print a protocol 1 2 3 1 2 292 Double click the Protocol List Icon to list the protocols in the project win dow right pane Select a protocol to print More than one protocol can be selected for print ing by pressing the Shift Key and selecting another protocol to extend the selection or by pressing the Ctrl Key and selecting another protocol to add to the selection Printout images of protocols
167. TS flow control or the Xon Xoff flow control Select both the modem control and the RTS CTS flow control or the Xon Xoff flow control e The external device compatible with the RTS CTS flow control or the Xon Xoff flow control is connected in 1 N configuration Select both the modem control and the RTS CTS flow control or the Xon Xoff flow control The RTS CTS flow control sets the CTS signal from the receiving terminal to OFF to stop the data sending temporally when the receiving speed exceeds the processing in a no procedural communication When the receiving pro cess finished it sets the CTS signal to ON again to resume the sending This control is a kind of hardware flow control The signal line of RS 232C cable is used The Xon Xoff flow control sends the Xoff 13H signal from receiving termi nal to temporarily stop data sending when the receiving speed exceeds the processing capacity in no procedural communications When the receiving process becomes available it sends the Xon 11H signal to start the data sending again This is a kind of software flow controls However the Xon and the Xoff signals are control codes therefore they might be included in the sending data if it is binary On the contrary the Xon and the Xoff signals may be mixed in the data Thus this control is not used for a binary data communi cations The modem control is a specific function to the Protocol Macro function It sets DTR sig
168. This area is cleared when the power is turned ON It can also be cleared using the STUP instruction or Port 1 Port 2 System Setting Changes Flag Auxiliary Bit The area is also cleared when the next sequence is executed WAIT command is issued Release Flag is ON or When sequence starts Reads Reads status status Reads When status busy is released Reads When status busy is released 145 Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas Section 3 10 Transmission Error Generated Status 146 Note CS CJ ClO CS CJ When a transmission error When 1908 CIO 1918 occurs the corresponding flag is set sequence n 8 n 18 bits to 1 ON Bits 00 to 14 are repre starts 00 to 15 sented by bit 15 The cause of the C200HX HG HE error or the cause of Send amp Receive CIO 283 bits 00 command retries will be represented to 03 08 to 11 in bits 00 to 15 See note 7 1 When communications retries are executed by the Protocol Macro an error will be recorded in bits 00 to 14 but Transmission Error Gener ated bit 15 will remain at O OFF Even if another error occurs during retries the cause of the error will be held Bits 00 to 15 are cleared when either the sequence starts executing STUP is executed or the power is turned ON C200HX HG HE When a transmis sion error occurs in a Protocol Macro error codes 1 2 3 will be stored in bits 00 to 03 or bits 08 to 11 Bit 07 is representative of
169. U Unit port Cable length IBM PC AT or Ethernet port EtherNet IP compatible port IBM PC AT or compatible OS fC E thernet port NJ series CPU Unit Ethernet EtherNet IP port Note If an RS 232C Option Board CP1W CIFO1 is mounted it is also possible to use a XW2Z 200S 500S V CV RS 232C Cable to connect an RS 232C port on the computer to the RS 232C Option Board 10 System Configuration Section 1 4 For the C200HX HG HE Connect the peripheral port on the CPU Unit to the built in RS 232C port Note Can be connected to the PMSU port if the port is set to the host link mode Connection to a IBM PC AT or compatible computer Peripheral port connection RS 232C port connection Peripheral port on the CPU Unit RS 232C port on the CPU Unit or PMSU port host link mode see note 9 pin CQM CIF02 Connecting Cable XW2Z 200S 2 0 m XW2Z 500S 5 0 m Note For IBM PC AT or compatible computers a conversion connector from D sub 25P female to 9P female is required for the personal computer side con nector 1 4 2 Connecting the PLC to External Devices For the CS CJ The following figure shows the system configuration of the PMSU in the PLC and external devices The RS 232C port provides 1 1 connection and the RS 422A 485 port 1 N connection CS1W SCU21 V1 Serial Communications Unit CS1W SCB41 V1 Serial Communications Board CPU Unit Port 1 RS 232C I _ RS 422A 485 k Oo RS 23
170. V Sequence of Hayes Modem AT Commands Protocol 117 3 7 Example of Communications Sequence 0 00 eee eee eee 118 S 1 sequence Setup Content drewnie CMa edhe ee ae eet oe OE aa 118 Fele Step setup COMEN 54 4 Ad cer ad ets etree hate Ske aed haere eats 118 3 7 3 Send and Receive Messages Creation 0 0000 119 3 7 4 Contents of Sequence oi 02 dae Se ee eae Sok hoes ae oa 121 3 8 Executing a Created Communications Sequence CS CJ 121 ISl Device Connecti esaeren neee tE ane atA see Dina a ea 122 S022 Imaal Meisa er hora a A E E eee ted 122 3 8 3 Creating Ladder Programs 0 00 eee eee 123 328 4 Operation 22 isc A stares ov Reser e teeta reese RNET EAE 127 3 8 5 Confirming the Operation 0 0 0 0 cc cece eee 128 3 9 Executing a Created Communications Sequence C200HX HG HE 128 3 9 1 Device Connection eseuc tee ee ees ae ee ee ee 129 Fo ANIA SCL tie eee a tee oe E te og each eee ee 129 3 9 3 Creating Ladder Programs i iiaut e555 ce5 4 oh eund eehws hake es 130 Iowe ANCA Oea a An a ee AD Gee ee eae are 133 3 9 5 Confirming the Operation 0 0 0 0 cece cee eee 134 3 10 Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas 0 0 0 0 e eee ee 134 3 10 1 Special Auxiliary and Allocated Areas 00 0000 134 3 10 2 Description of Each Area 0 00 ce eens 140 57 Protocol Macro Outline 3 1
171. X Protocol Setup Screen a4t cedau duvet ou chtscebds ahd 4 84 S062 Pe Os ash aoe hes aoe eda see ee eae owes E 85 3 955 Repeal Counter eases eosta na pann e toe heme are eaea 87 Jod Command wien bee de nick hoe a atedon 4 Gatahes oe weakest 89 329504 Roy COUN nceweie saa e et aed a Os wee ee ate eee ey ees 91 59 0 Hnd Walt Times o 5 40 Ene E TENE AEN 92 3 3 7 Send Message Receive Message siccsiy ot ewe Cee eae eats 8 92 3 3 8 With Without Response Writing 0 93 3 3 9 Next Process Error Processes cue cease darian tans Pa eo A 93 3 4 Communication Message Attributes 0 0 0 0 0c eee 95 3 4 1 CX Protocol Setup Screen 20 0 ene 96 De CAMS I ce A gcedt a 6 oo trae ian Oita ene oan Bonen eee 96 FAD AdSense os choad eteN wads Pagan dela slag ae days 96 Sasa Lense ct a Oct wats Hie eh water ee Gan we aera eee eee 6 96 Sede Ate cae ote tee a esa eee eee aee a ee ee ee ee 97 5 4 6 Error Check Code 2 4 4 4 5 enhddawck do techn eee So a 98 Sede ENNO nis cee ace toa ohare keene oer a 98 3 4 8 Message Item Data Attributes 0 0 0 0 cee eee 98 3 4 9 Supplemental Notes on Message Setup 004 110 52 Crean MICS 4 aud Scheie ee yews ee ew seis 112 3 6 Examples of Standard System Protocols 00 anaana ana 116 3 6 1 Process Value Read Sequence of the Controller E5_K Read Protocol 0 0 0000 116 3 6 2 Modem Initialize MD24FB10
172. a Mill be destroyed Select tes to CLLESR ALL AREAS and Remove Erer Select Wo to Femove Error ONLY Ho Cancel e Left click Yes to clear all memory areas of the CPU Unit The memory areas will be initialized e Left click No to clear the error display only The memory areas will not be initialized 323 Error and Error Log Display Section 13 Displaying the Error Log Use the following procedure to display the log of errors that have resulted Left click the Error Log Tab in the error log window The following error log will be displayed Fa PLC Errors FEE fret E3 File Cpotiong Help Errors Error Log Messages Non fatal 14150 UZB OROUE IQ TEE Error E q41598 035243 O00EF OID Yernheation Error Er Ja 1271558 03 5458 OROUE IO Yernhcation Error ia SB A J4 1241598 03 54 27 80F1 Memory Error Eg 5 12 158 0364 28 OOF Menniory Error h JB 1271558 0357 04 ORODE I0 Yerhication Error pe 12 15 58 0357 26 M410 System larm FAL Error 1 Z gt Masinnum Log Capacity 20 Clear all Cath CPUE Monitor Clock 14 06 42 e The items of errors displayed in the Error Log Tab are the same as those in the Errors Tab Refer to the previous subsection for details e Left click the Clear All Button The error log will be cleared e A maximum of 20 errors can be recorded in the error log If the 21st error results the oldest recorded error will be deleted Note When in CPU Standby fatal error errors wi
173. a on the PLC Constants can not be set here Set a word even if it is not necessary 3 9 4 Operation The following describes the system s operation when executing the ladder program shown in 3 9 3 Creating Ladder Programs 1 2 3 1 When starting to execute a PMCR instruction the system transmits the in formation set in the operand of the PMCR instruction such as the starting sequence number and communications data storage area and turns ON the Port A Instruction Execution Flag 28908 2 The PMSU reads the communication sequence with the appropriate se quence number set in the PMCR instruction 3 The system sends RXO Channel No 00 as the command measuring the temperature of the Temperature Controllers designated channel to the unit number 00 of the E5ZE Temperature Controller stored in DM0001 4 The system receives RX00 as the response from the Temperature Con troller 00 means the end code from the E5ZE with unit number 00 to store the next measured temperature into DM0101 and DM0102 through the PLC scan 133 Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas Section 3 10 5 The system increments the value of the repeat counter by 8 times repeat edly Every time the repeat counter is incremented the following contents are changed e The word number of the Temperature Controller designated by N 1 in the send message changes between 0 and 7 e The DM area storing the measured temperature designated by
174. a valid value between 0 and 31 range The communications port set A Programming Console may be Check the new port settings and try again tings for this port are currently accessing the PLC being changed by another device The following list of item s have Attempting to remove a matrix or Check the message or matrix references references to the selected message from the project that is within each step that refers to each mes object which you tried to Delete referred to by steps within the project sage matrix If desired remove the step Cut Remove all references and try again first The maximum length must be The specified communications port Enter a valid value between 200 and 1000 bytes _ setting is out of range The PLC must be in PRO An attempt was made to download Change the operating mode of the PLC to GRAM mode to download the the communications port settings to PROGRAM mode communications port settings the PMSU while the PLC was set toa mode other than PROGRAM mode The sequence number is The sequence number specified is Specify a sequence number not used by already in use by the same as another sequence the other sequences in the protocol The sequence number must be The sequence number is out of Increase the range of the sequence by in the range xxx to yyy inclu changing the sequence start or end num sive bers for the protocol Increase the sequence end first There
175. acro Function 000 eee Protocol Creation PrOC CS Sil ois a tetew ts a hn a Sass we ae aie Rts A Transmission Control Mode Setup 0 0 cece eens Ladder Programming Method 0 0 0 cece eee eee Calculation Method of Monitoring Time 0 00 00 cece eee Operation OniitinahlOn 6 2 3 2caseadineianwenean eee Hee eee an hos Errors at the Protocol Pxecutoniici ccsi0 0csceouseeedsiyacorre eesti Communications Response Time Performance 00 0c eee eee Cycle Time PermoOrnnanee scr ic8 acth aortic td eooes and ert OSes BS ees a Swe SECTION 5 ODJect Creams sas cusicesesassacinoenedas sewers 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 Creatine Projects and Protocols 2 444 lt vs 4 40s de gts saa oat eRe a oe Ee oes Creatine SEGUENCES and SlEPSisi c3 4 43 tod ude ba woe cae bd ato ard dere cea eaa Creating Messages and Matrices nnn baie bwatadesbabatiade stad System Protocol Display and Editing 0 cc cece ee ees SECTION 6 Project and Protocol Editing eee 6 1 6 2 Pati TO cts acces hae tea a beers daa d ot on Leet eee Sem Eding Protocols 2414s seu tics dekh se ee bebe ete stele hee hoes SECTION 7 Sequence Setting and Editing cccccees 7 1 7 2 SCUINS SEQUCICCS ia ni n Pe Ek este aware wa tea tse ee oe ee Paitin Sequences 4164 421 oh an ae haw enue hell abe ek Gare at cer T SECTION 8 Step Setting and Editing ccc cece cece c eee
176. ad command with a header address check code and terminator and then receives a receive message a string containing a response to the read com mand with a header address check code and terminator Protocol Macro Support Unit Command _ gt gt Send message Example Measured value read command oo rxoo Fes gt e HeaderAddress Send Data Check Code Terminator Send send RS 232C or RS 422A 485 Receive message Example Response oo Rxot Fes jal Header Address Receive Data Check Code Terminator Receive receive General purpose externa device 17 Protocol Macro Structure Section 1 6 The sequence determines according to the result of process whether to send the same send message again called retry or execute the next process reading process value from the Temperature Controller linked to another address etc for example Structure of one step For Wait Flush Open Protocol for Send Receive Send amp Receive commands Close commands Sequence No 000 999 max 60 oe per protocol e quence No 2 Command Note 1 Command Note 1 Message Note 2 Next process Transmis sion control parameter Link word To be Error N Not retried Monitoring timer Response Type Step 15 Max Step 15 Max Message lists See note 2 Send message list A T T T T ee a ee Receive message
177. ading is 101 Execution start 28908 Set here the address for storing the data to Data of temperature input chan nel O measured temperature Instruction Execution be transmitted to the PMSU Flag ede S N Set here the address for storing the data to be returned from the PMSU Instruction execution this example sets DM0100 so that the data error flag that were measured are stored on and after Set on the leftmost digit the port ee on which the protocol is executed 1 Port A Lower port 2 Port B Upper port oat anancalaiunindecnDNIGGaEe i Receive Data Storage Location 4 Send Data setting aes Spiele tala dt cel hen d 17 means that 17 words of ten ig rg E ee 1 DM0100 to DM116 are used as Dood 0002 RS ena the receiving area 0001 0000 For this sequence set the unit numbers here Sian oom i be eee tee eee eee The protocol communicates with E5ZE with unit DMO0101 Bishimost fdigi L L L L ee ee _ number 00 because the rightmost 2 digits are 00 DM0102 LLefimost t aigit i DM0115 Ritimos at Pe nro A AR oa DM0116 j Data of temperature input chan nel 7 measured temperature De od k a a a a a o O o a Note Observe the following precautions when using the PMCR instruction e f transmitting no data to the PMSU f 1101 0000 Doo is Set the constant 0000 when transmitting no data e If storing no data to the data are
178. adon Se ee ee Pars 2 Select Fill Data Area from the Grid Menu The Fill Memory Area Dialog Box will be displayed Fill Memory Area Value 7 lB C Binan C Einam Coded Decima Decimal C Signed Decimal E i Pane Heradecimal ral Status Value Visible area only H o Cancel Note In this example the Fill Range settings should not be changed 3 Select the input format and enter the Value Field In this example Hexa decimal is selected and FFFF is entered 4 Left click the Fill Button The data set in step 3 will be written to the cell designated in step 1 311 I O Memory Monitor Section 12 4 w D a w 6 DOO G PO UOGA ae l DOG n Writing Same Data to Use the following procedure to write the same data to the whole data table Whole Bit Areas or currently opened or the displayed range of the data table i e the range dis Display Areas played in the window 1 2 3 1 Select Fill Data Area from the Grid Menu The Fill Memory Area Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Make the area Fill Range Value and Status Value settings Fill Memory Area Value same data is written C Binary C Binan Coded Decima C Decimal C Signed Decimal Hesadecimal Fill Range Cll Status Value By selecting All the same TE data will be written to all G viable aeg only ie the selected areas By selecting Visible area Selection C Cancel only the same data will TF be written to t
179. al staff ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions xviii Version Upgrades Improvements from Version 1 94 to Version 1 95 The following functionality has been added in upgrading the CX Protocol from version 1 94 to 1 95 New CPU Units Supported The following NJ series CPU Units are now supported NJ series CPU Unit models NJ301 1100 1200 Improvements from Version 1 93 to Version 1 94 The following functionality has been added in upgrading the CX Protocol from version 1 93 to 1 94 Support for Sysmac Studio Trial Version Improvements from Version 1 92 to Version 1 93 The following functionality has been added in upgrading the CX Protocol from version 1 92 to 1 93 New CPU Units Supported The following NJ series CPU Units are now supported NU507 130071400 1500 Improvements from Version 1 91 to Version 1 92 The following functionality has been added in upgrading the CX Protocol from version 1 91 to 1 92 New PLCs Supported The following CJ2 CPU Units are now supported CJ2M CPU1 1 12 13 14 15 31 32 33 34 35 Improvements from Version 1 9 to Version 1 91 The following functionality has been added in upgrading the CX Protocol from version 1 9 to 1 91 Support for Microsoft Windows 7 Note This upgrade accompanies the upgrade of CX One version 3 2
180. al together with the CP1H Programmable Control lers Programming Manual W451 Provides the following information about the NSJ series NSJ Controllers Overview and features Designing the system configuration Installation and wiring I O memory allocations Troubleshooting and maintenance Use this manual in combination with the following manuals SYSMAC CS Series Operation Manual W339 SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual W393 SYSMAC CS CJ Series Pro gramming Manual W394 and NS V1 V2 Series Setup Manual V083 Provides the following information on the CP Series e Programming instructions e Programming methods e Tasks e File memory e Functions Use this manual together with the CP Series CP1H CPU Units Operation Manual W450 and CP Series CP1L CPU Units Operation Manual W462 Provides information on how to use the CX Programmer a pro gramming device that supports the CS CJ series PLCs and the CX Net contained within CX Programmer SYSMAC CS CJ Series Provides information on how to program and operate CQM1H PRO E1 CS CJ series PLCs using a Programming Console C200H PRO27 E CQM1 PRO01 E Programming Consoles Operation Manual N WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in per sonal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and r
181. alue Field 3 Enter atime unit in the Time Unit Field 4 Select the OK Button to accept the settings or the Cancel Button to leave the settings unchanged 233 Step Setting Section 8 1 Setting the Send Receive Message Send Receive Message and Receive Matrix 1 2 3 Note Creating Send Receive Messages 1 2 3 Note Editing Send Receive Message in Send Receive Field 234 1 2 3 If a send message receive message or receive matrix has already been cre ated in the send receive message list or the receive matrix list a message or receive matrix can be selected from the Send Receive Message Field of the step Use the following procedure to select a send message reference for the step 1 Left click on the Send Message or Receive Message Field Example l Setting screen for a receive message Recyv Message I Rica t 1 r Messager Matrix 2 Left click a desired send message name receive message name or re ceive matrix on the drop down list Select the receive matrix from the Receive Message Field The receive matrix name is indicated with brackets lt gt A send message or receive message can be newly created in the Send Mes sage Receive Message Field of the step even when the messages are not created in the send message receive message list Use the following procedure to create a send message or receive message 1 Right click the Send Message or Receive Message Field of
182. an 500 words 128 words CIO indicates the I O area IR area and AR area EM bank cannot be used for link words 221 Setting Sequences Setting Transmission Control Method Section 7 1 Set the same transmission control method as that designated by the external device communications partner The transmission control method can be set to more than one method for example RTS CTS flow control and modem control 1 Left click the Control Field of the sequence and then left click the Enter Button or press the Enter Key The Transmission Control Dialog Box will be displayed 7 x ae i XON XOFF None Cancel Modem Contention Contention Send Request Code eo oe o O Delimiters Delimiter Send Code Cos Delimiter Recewe Code ode PP 222 2 Set the parameters in the Transmission Control Dialog Box 3 Left click the OK Button to accept the settings or left click the Cancel But ton to leave the settings unchanged If any of the following settings are made Set will be displayed in the Control Field of the sequence RTS CTS Flow Control Data can be transmitted through the RTS CTS flow control Select an RTS CTS control method from the drop down list If the RTS CTS Field is set to None RTS CTS flow control will not be per formed If the RTS CTS Field is set to Send RTS CTS flow control will be performed only when sending If the RTS CTS Field is set to Receive RTS
183. and a corrected to C200HX HG HE Pages 280 282 and 342 CX Net changed to CX Integrator Pages 282 and 301 Manual reference changed Page 303 Information added after screen shot Page 321 Reference in callout for first screen shot corrected Pages 342 to 347 Error messages added 07 July 2007 Pages xi xiii and 45 Updated CX One version to 2 1 Page xi and xii Added model numbers changed paragraph at top of page and added the CP Series and NSJ Series Page xix Added version upgrade information Pages xv and 5 Added CJ series CPU Unit model numbers Page 5 Updated CX Protocol version to 1 71 Page 9 Changed description of supported personal computers Page 37 Removed rows from table and added note Page 42 Added model numbers o dune 2008 Revision and changes associated with upgrade to OX Protocol verson 18 o9 February 2009 Revision and changes associated with upgrade to OX Protocol verson T81 367 Revision History 368 Authorized Distributor
184. and S the waiting time before starting to send data With Without Response Writing Specifies whether to write received data Sets the next step to which the step transits or the sequence exits if it ends normally Sets the next step to which the step transits or the sequence exits if it ends abnormally Error process 19 Data Created by the CX Protocol Section 1 7 1 7 Data Created by the CX Protocol The CX Protocol creates manages data by file unit called project Project files consist of the following data 1 project file Protocol list Protocol _ l p i Up to 20 protocols see note 1 POGO POEG Up to 1 000 sequences PLC Protocol list Protocol Trace list PLC Note 1 Protocol _ Sequence D 1 protocol Up to 60 sequences see note 2 m Sequence gt The first sequence number and the last sequence number are designated for each protocol m Sequence J Message M Send message list Message m Receive message list Message Message J Matrix list Matrix gt Up to 300 messages Up to 100 matrices Matrix Note 2 Sequence Step 00 Step 01 Up to 16 steps L Step 15 Project files are stored with a file extension PSW Note To transfer standard system protocols to the PMSU or create a new protocol by partially modifying one of the standard system protocols first copy the required standard system protocol to
185. and Matrix Editing cisa etd whee Mo easier ara ndena a 2939 9 3 1 Displaying Messages within the Protocol 255 9 3 2 Renaming a Messace 0 65454 caus Joho eee teak eee es 255 9 35 Copyins a Message cc 402 2 dike ed Er CENA nAAL EEA 256 0 5 4 Deleting a Message nrs cose ranean se Sears s ea awed 256 9 3 5 Displaying the Matrix within the Protocol 256 9 3 6 Displaying the Matrix Case within the Matrix 231 923 7 Copying the Matrix Case is wun ieee eine ax eee dens 257 9 3 8 Moving the Matrix Cas sesasi cacalnxc acs catdacheated amp 257 239 Creating Messages Section 9 1 9 1 Creating Messages 9 1 1 Creating a New Message Use either of the following procedures to create a new message 1 2 3 1 Right click the Send Message or Receive Message Field in the step list and select New Message from the pop up menu when the Message Ed itor Dialog Box will be displayed Specify each input item and order in the dialog box 2 Create the new message in the message list independently from the steps and input each item in either of the following method a Input the data for each item field beginning with the header Specify and input the order and items of the data in the data field b Display the Message Editor Dialog Box from the data field Specify and input the order and items of the order in the dialog box Creating a New Message in Send Message or Receive Message
186. and select I O table from the pop up menu T PLC 10 Table ey _ ol x Eile Options Help E CS1H H CPU66 0000 Main Rack Fte 0000 Rack 01 jy 0000 Rack 02 Hi 0000 Rack 03 0000 Rack 04 d 0000 Rack 05 dy 0000 Rack 06 0000 Rack OF CS1H H CPLIG6 Program E 4 Select Create from the Option Menu 5 After creating the I O table set CX Protocol offline once and then return to online status This enables the Serial Communications Unit information to be read by CX Protocol For details of I O table functions refer to CX Programmer Operation Man ual 10 6 PMSU Communications Port Settings Use the following procedure for the PMSU communications port settings ETT 1 2 3 1 Double click the PLC Icon in the project workspace left pane Eg EXAMPLE psw apne Board Type E SCB Not Fitted Serial Communications Unit Type Scu a CS1w SCUP1 No Unit 1 No Unit 2 No Unit 3 No Unit 4 No Unit 5 No Unit 6 No Unit 7 Ge oo oe ee ee oe ee e 280 PMSU Communications Port Settings Section 10 6 2 In the project window right pane double click the PMSU Icon for which as J the communications port settings are to be made Alternatively left click the PMSU Icon in the project workspace left pane Eg EXAMPLE psw E Status li Trace 1 ji Trace 2 Communications Port Type JE Communications Port 1 la Communications Port 2
187. another project file and then use the project file The standard system protocols themselves cannot be edited or transferred The standard system protocols have been installed into the PMSU at our fac tory Files that can be Read or Written by CX Protocol Type of file Content File Read extension CX Protocol SYSMAC PST CX Protocol project files consist of the PSW Yes Yes project files see note following Protocol data PLC communications conditions between PLC and personal computer communications port A B setting of the PSB or the port 1 2 setting of the Serial Communications Board Unit Trace data PSS system setting file File that contains communications port A B setting data of the PSS Protocol Macro Support Unit PSS protocol file File that contains only PSS protocol data a ee ae Trace data file File that contains only trace data 20 Main Screens of the CX Protocol Section 1 8 Note CX Protocol project files cannot be read by the PSS DOS version of Protocol Support Software or the SYSMAC PST Refer to 11 3 Importing Protocol Data from PST PSS Files for loading PST project files or PSS files 1 8 Main Screens of the CX Protocol The CX Protocol displays the tree view of the hierarchical data structure in the left pane For the highlighted data in the left pane the list view of its contents is displayed in the right pane Contents of a Project A project consists of protocol list trace list an
188. ans Programmable Controller and the abbreviation PC means personal computer and are not used as abbreviations for anything else The abbreviation PMSU means Protocol Macro Support Unit and refers to the Communications Board for the C200HX HG HE Serial Communications Board for the CS and Serial Communications Units for the CS Cu Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera tion of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc OMRON 2008 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication TABLE OF CONTENT
189. ard External devices PMCR instruction PMCR 1567 process 0000 000 Send data conversion process BE a I O Send data memory notification 2 3 A External Repeat 2 and 3 by the deyi evice number of variables of rOc ss the direct addressing p Received I O Received memory data writing data conversion process lt gt lt gt P p TETO A gt Repeat 7 and 8 by the number of variables of the direct addressing The communications response time is the total time from 1 to 8 in the above figure The functions 2 and 3 are repeated by the number of variables of the direct addressing of the send message while 7 and 8 are repeated by those of the receive message 199 Communications Response Time Performance 200 Section 4 8 Number Function Time Required PMCR instruction executing notification process time Send data notification process time Send data conversion process time Send data transmission time Received data transmission time Received data conversion process time Received data writing process time External device process time About 40 us One cycle time maximum Depends on the number of conversion bytes Number of data characters x one character bit transmis sion rate Depends on the external device process Number of data characters x one character bit transmis sion rate De
190. are displayed as a hierarchy from the highest level to the lowest level scrolled Project Workspace The hierarchy is displayed with the Project as the highest level The contents of the highlighted data will be displayed in the project window Output Window Errors or warnings that occur while compiling data that have been sent to the PMSUs connected online are displayed System Tab Left click the tab to make active the project window of the standard system protocol Project Tab Left click the tab to make active the project window of the project created by users The screen consists of three panes 46 Outline of User Interface System Cx Protecal Note Right click Move d Sequence Printer Matrix Section 2 5 e The data hierarchy is displayed in the left pane in a tree format The left pane is called the Project Workspace e The contents of designated data i e highlighted data in the project workspace will be displayed in a table format in the right screen portion The right pane is called the Project Window The menu and tool bars are used for basic Windows functions such as file and edit functions as well as protocol and trace operating functions When the CX Protocol is started the standard system protocol will be dis played on the screen When a new protocol is created or when an existing project file is opened the project window will be displayed on top of the screen This becomes the acti
191. as follows e Constant addressing e Operand addressing with without response type e Link word addressing e Direct addressing In this example each mode is differentiated according to the characteristics of communications data as follows Communications data Feature Storing method Initialization command It is directly set up in the message because there is no Constant addressing need for change during use of the same modem Dial command It is desirable to be dynamically set up for a possible Operand addressing change in accordance with the environment Send data SendOK It is directly set up in the message because there is no Constant addressing need for change Five words Five words of send data send data It is desirable to be dynamically set up for a possible Operand addressing Five words of receive data ee eee in accordance with the environment Receive result code It is directly set up in the message because there no need Constant addressing for change during use of the same modem Message Format In the modem control procedure communications are performed with an instruction AT command from a ter minal the PLC in this example and the modem s response result code to the instruction Since AT com mands and result codes consist of a character string delimited by CR and CR LF the message format is as follows Data Terminator CR or CR LF Note The header the address the length and the error check code a
192. aser 3Z4L Micrometer in remote mode reading measured data and writing reading operating parameters Visual Inspection Protocol for controlling a Visual Inspection System via the PMSU Procedures for controlling the System F200 300 Visual Inspection System in remote mode reading measured values and writing reading 350 operating parameters ID Controller V600 Protocol for controlling an ID Controller via the PMSU Procedures for performing Read Write 620 operations of the ID Controller and writing reading operating parameters Hayes modem AT Protocol for controlling a Hayes modem AT commands via the PMSU Procedures for commands initialization of the modem dialing data transmission switching to escape mode and disconnecting the line For more information on each protocol refer to the C200HX HG HE Commu nications Board Operation Manual W304 CS CJ Series Serial Communica tions Board Unit Operation Manual W336 and CQM1H Series Serial Communications Board Operation Manual W365 Example Protocol for the Controller E5_K read Sequence No Communications sequence _000__ Read process value 001 Read set point during SP ramp Read MV Read set point 25 Basic Procedure of the Protocol Macro Usage Section 1 11 Sequence No Communications sequence Read alarm value Read proportional band integral time and derivative time 1 11 Basic Procedure of the Protocol Macro Usage 1 11 1 For the CS CJ Proc
193. asted into a new protocol list A Sequence as well as a system protocol can be copied 5 4 2 Copying System Protocols or Sequences Use the following procedure to copy system protocols Copying and Pasting All the Protocols in the List to New Project A 1 2 3 1 Select New from the File Menu or left click the New Icon from the toolbar and create a new project System ALLN 2 Left click the System Tab on the bottom of the project workspace select 22 the protocol list icon in the project workspace and press the Ctrl C Keys 211 System Protocol Display and Editing Section 5 4 Projects 3 el or right click and select Copy from the pop up menu Alternatively select Copy from the Edit Menu Left click the Project Tab on the bottom of the project workspace After left clicking the Project Icon press the Ctrl V Keys or left click the Paste Icon or right click and select the Paste Button from the pop up menu in the project window or select Paste from the Edit Menu The protocols will be copied to the new project Copying and Pasting Selected Protocol s to New Project Gi 1 2 3 1 System 2 a oe ee 3 ty 4 Select New from the File Menu or left click the New Button from the toolbar and create a new project Left click the System Tab on the bottom of the project workspace select the Protocol List Icon in the project workspace and select the protocol to be copied in the project window More than one proto
194. ata word area send is desig Maximum receive 127 words max Not including the 250 words max Including the receive fa nated data receive data word area data word area storage location Data When Total of 128 words max Total of 500 words max capacity link word is desig nated delimiter control Direct Maximum send or 128 words max No conversion 500 words max No conversion designa receive data tion by each parame ter Receive buffer Half duplex 1 Right before sequence is executed 1 Right before sequence is executed clearing timing 2 Right before Receive processing is 2 Right before Send processing is executed executed 3 When Flush command is executed Full duplex Not available 1 Right before sequence is executed 2 When Flush command is executed Receive processing Half duplex Only while Receive processing is Any time other than when Send to the receive buffer being executed processing is being executed Full duplex Not available Every time the sequence is executed No receive processing if sequence is not executed Character trace Half duplex Every time the sequence is executed Every time the sequence is executed receive record Also recorded while Send processing Also recorded while Send processing is being executed is being executed Full duplex Not available Execution sequence number communications error 38 Differences betwee
195. ates Start bit 1 bit data length 7 bits parity even stop bit 2 bits baud rate 9 600 bps Communications mode for port A 6 Protocol macro d Using the CX Protocol perform setup of communications port A B through the PMSU Icon and transfer the setting to the PLC For more information refer to 10 7 Transfer of Communications Port Setting Data to PLC 3 Setup of external devices Perform required processes including DIP switch settings on external de vices 31 Basic Procedure of the Protocol Macro Usage Section 1 11 Procedure 5 Protocol Design Refer to SECTION 4 SECTION 5 and SECTION 6 1 2 3 1 Creates the status transition chart of communications sequence 2 Disassembles the status transition chart into the sequences and steps and sets them up 3 Creates the send and the receive messages Procedure 6 Project Protocol Data Creation and Transfer by CX Protocol Refer to 1 9 Overview of Project Creation 1 2 3 1 Creates a new project Refer to 5 1 Creating Projects and Protocols 2 Creates a new communications sequence Refer to 5 2 Creating Sequences and Steps and 7 1 Setting Sequences 3 Creates each step Refer to 5 2 Creating Sequences and Steps and 8 1 Step Setting 4 Creates each message See note Refer to 9 1 Creating Messages 5 Transfers the created projects to the PMSU Refer to 11 1 Transferring and Reading Protocol Data between the Com puter and PMSU Note Each step can be creat
196. ation Message Attributes Section 3 4 e CRC 16 algorithm l The last value is determined Data input as the check code 3 4 9 Supplemental Notes on Message Setup 110 pee Bee 1 Designating more than one constant or variable To designate more than one constant or variable use as follows Example Sending a command RX0O word number 00 code number to deter mine the PV process value of the Temperature Controller RXO N 1 OO V A message RXONOO N is the value of the repeat counter 0 255 is sent N 0 RX0000 N 1 RX0100 N 2 RX0200 2 Word writing for receive messages For receive messages the system needs to compare the address part of the message frame that was received confirm whether this part has the self unit number or not receive the data part if so and store this data part to the appropriate area on the PLC by word writing e Designate the data needed for comparison such as an address using a constant variable with constant X variable word reading wildcard etc e Designate the data necessary to be stored to the area on the PLC us ing a variable word writing Example Comparing the address part 2 bytes long and receiving the data part suc ceeding the address part to store in the I O memory on the PLC Address Designation R 1 2 When the received message is for the receiver the received ad
197. ation mode defined accord ing to the CCITT recommendation is called CRC CCITT where X 64Xx124X 1 is used as the generative polynomial Incidentally CRC 16 X 1 X 194X241 is also often used as a generating polynomial Check Code CRIT CCITT 4byte ASCII 02 52 44 38 39 33 36 46 42 OD CRI CCITT 2byte BIN 02 52 44 38 39 36 FB OD CRT 16 4byte ASCII 02 52 44 38 39 42 46 46 41 OD CRT 16 2byte BIN 02 52 44 38 39 BF FA OD Note Reverse direction is available Default value can be set for the CRC 16 The generating function in the calculation mode of the CRC is uniquely de termined as CRC CCITT or CRC 16 Data for each character of CRC CCITT is treated differently from that for CRC 16 as shown below If a message with n characters which is subject to check code calcula tion is expressed as shown in the following table the MSB most signifi cant bit and LSB least significant bit in every character for CRC 16 will be reversed as shown in the following tables CC 2 DO 7 to DO 0 D1 7 to D1 0 Dn 1 7 to Dn 1 0 Note D 0 or 1 CRC CCITT es ee ee Ce 7 DO 6 to DO O D1 7 D1 6 to D1 0 Dn 1 7 a Dn 1 0 C ee Ce a to DO 7 e D1 1 to D1 7 Dn 1 0 Dn 1 1 ae Therefore algorithm for each one becomes as shown below e CRC CCITT algorithm We TE Shift register 4 XOR j Data input The last value is determined as the check code 109 Communic
198. attempt was made to compare protocols for a target PMSU that is not mounted One or more of the selected proto cols contains a target PMSU not fit ted to the PLC Reconfigure the project to ensure the prob lem is not encountered in the future For instance create a new protocol for the additional matrices Reconfigure the project to ensure the prob lem is not encountered in the future For instance move steps to another sequence Try a different PMSU Try a different PMSU or establish connec tion with PLC again Remove the protocol for which a non mounted target PMSU is mounted from the protocols to be compared Continue with the download but ensure the target setting for associated PMSUs are correct Protocol list upload failed Communications have failed Retry operation Protocol upload download failed Protocol spp was not found psw was not found Repeat count is larger than the maximum allowed value Sequence End Number out of range because a sequence exists with a greater sequence number Setting the Start Sequence to this value will cause the Sequence to exceed its maxi mum limit The file protocol spp is not in applica tion folder An attempt was made to open file project psw from the Recently Used File List from the File Menu but project psw no longer exists in that folder A value greater than 255 has been entered for the Repeat Counter con stant The sequence
199. ature DMo101 Word 0 lower part DM0102 Word 0 upper part DM0103 Word t lower part DM0104 Word 1 upper part DM0115 Word 7 lower part DM0116 Word 7 upper pa 3 9 2 Initial Setup 1 2 3 1 Set the DIP switch on the PMSU 2 SW1 2 2 wire system 4 4 wire system SW2 ON Terminator available OFF Terminator not available 4 sw Swe 2 Set the PLC Setup of C200HX as follows Note Communications mode as the protocol macro function to set the communications requirements as follows DM6555 6000 L The communication requirement of port A 0 Standard setup The mode used by port A Standard setup contents Start bi Even pariy Baud rate 9 600 bps Note For more information of the PLC Setup area related to the protocol macro function refer to Appendix B PLC Setup and PMSU Settings 3 Set the E5ZE Temperature Controller 129 Executing a Created Communications Sequence C200HX HG HE Section 3 9 Set the unit number to 0 and baud rate to 9 600 bps Switch Unit Sage Used for setting sD the Unit number Gal Set to 0 UNIT INPUT Switch Function Used for setting the switch function oz FF OARAAGE mo FRAGA Mnameee FUNCTION coco lo Switch Function Hardware mode Not used Must be OFF Temperature unit C or F Operation mode when the power is ON Connection of E5ZD SDL Setting Indicator Memory bank designation method 1
200. ault Connection Port Hame ae Baud Rate 9600 P eaud Rate Suto Meteri Cancel Help Note The communications conditions must coincide with those in the PLC Setup of the CPU Unit For details refer to the Operation Manual of the PLC 4 Left click the OK Button Note With the C200HX HG HE the baud rate cannot be set to 1 200 bps for connections using the toolbus 10 2 3 Connections to PLC on Network via Online Communications Outline By making simple settings with the CX Protocol it is possible for the personal computer to connect online to a PLC on the network via another PLC that is directly connected to the personal computer The following explains the settings required for the personal computer to com municate with a PLC on the network These settings make available all online functions e g protocol transfer communications port setting transfer and tracing for the control of PMSU mounted to the PLC on the network 264 Communications Settings between Personal Computer and PLC Section 10 2 Settings settings ME aa x PLC100 Select Toolbus or Host Link Toolbus or Host Link The following system example shows how to make the settings required to connect the personal computer to a PLC on the network The CX Protocol connects the personal computer online to a PLC PLC100 in this example on the network through another PLC PLCOOO in this example that has been registered w
201. ault je K CENERI h PT Unit fi z Protocol Macro pore Maximum Length Transmission Method Halt Duplex 200 1000 200 Byte Link Channel Access Immediate Refresh Receive Buffer Clear at Startup ee Non precedu gt Ra AT GN Protocol Macro Seri oe way i 25 Watch Tin rt TimeOut 0 255 Te Deteuk 50000 at l x 100ms Cancel e TimeOut 0 255 ie bore uit 5000ms 0 100ms For details on each of the settings refer to the CS CJ Series Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units Operation Manual W336 E1 06 or later CX Protocol version 1 4 or earlier cannot read the CX Protocol version 1 5 project files psw that con tain the communications port settings for the upgrade functions such as no protocol and Serial Gate way in the Serial Communications Boards Units with unit version 1 2 If an attempt to read these files is made the message Unexpected file format will be displayed Standard System Protocol Additions CX Protocol version 1 5 includes the following additional standard system protocols that have been added to Serial Communications Boards Units with unit version 1 2 e Host Link C mode Command Master Sequence numbers 700 to 721 e Host Link FINS Command Master Sequence numbers 750 to 767 e Mitsubishi Computer Link Master A compatible 1C frame model 1 Sequence numbers 802 to 817 e Additional communications sequences for CompoWay F Master adde
202. ay of Messages in a Message List Messages are managed separately from sequences Messages can be referred to by their names from each step in a sequence EXAMPLE 2 Beames CE aie Laer lo x 5 388 EX Protocol List Deme Hami lt h gt Check code lt c Length lt I gt Address lt a gt SDOO 1 2A0D LRG H parity0 2Byte ASCID RG lt h gt lt ad a fed ca 2A0D LRG H parity0 2Byte ASCII RGI lt hd lt ad Controller E5 K read 240D LRG H parityX0 2Byte ASCID RC1 3 2 h gt lt g gt gt Procces value read 240D LRG H parityX0 2Byte ASCID RC1 9 2 h gt lt a gt Lamp set point read 2A0D LRG H parity0 2Byte ASCII RG lt h gt lt ad Manipulated variable r 2A0D LRG H parity0 2Byte ASCII HRGI2D ZRS a gt Paat antica SDO3 1 2A0D LRG tH parity0 2Byte ASCII RGI lt hd lt 354 Men vuo read SD19 1 2A0D LRG H parit 2Byte ASCII RO 2 SRSC a gt gt Propo bandInte Der a SD 20 1 2A0D LRG H parity0 2Byte ASCII RGI 9 lt hd lt ad4 Coollrig coefficient re 5D 21 1 240D LRG H parit O 2Byte ASCI RGI ChS a gt Peat eed coed SD 22 1 2A0D LRG H parity0 2Byte ASCII ERGI lt hd lt ad bier weet senate SDiO9 1 2A0D LRG H parity 2Byte ASCII RGI 9 lt hd lt ad gt Controller hysteresis SD 23 1 2A0D LRG H parityX0 2Byte ASCII RO 2 ZR a gt H gna parod read SDO6 1 2A0D LRG H parity 2Byte ASCII RGI lt h gt lt ad4 SP lame time unity
203. be set in the sequence list attributes e Response No Received data is Read only not stored in the I O memory 1 Left click the Response Field of the step Res onse YES Response 2 Left click either Yes or No on the drop down list Use the following procedure to set the next step to be executed If a receive matrix is set for the receive message control will be passed to the next step based on the next process set in the receive matrix The following four processes can be set Processing details Goto When this step is terminated control will be passed to the step number designated in When this step is terminated the next step will be executed Ends When this step is terminated the sequence will be terminated When this step is terminated the step will be aborted and the sequence will be terminated 1 Left click the Next Process Field of the step and left click the Enter Button or press the Enter Key The Next Process Dialog Box will be displayed Next Process 7 E E ok oo Cancel PELELELLELLIS 2 Select Next Process from the Jump Field When Goto is selected input a step number in the empty field 235 Step Editing Section 8 2 3 Select the OK Button to accept the settings or the Cancel Button to leave the settings unchanged Error Process When the step is terminated abnormally use the following procedure to set the next step to be executed When a step is
204. beyond the printing frame depending on its length If this happens select Print Setup from the File Menu and change the print ing setting to landscape or change the printer type 11 3 Importing Protocol Data from PST PSS Files With the CX Protocol SYSMAC PST and PSS DOS version file data can be imported However the imported PSS files cannot be edited with the CX Pro tocol Copy the data into the project and then edit the data Copying is only possible for PST project files and PSS protocol files The following files can be imported Type or PoS ties PST project files SYSMAC PST projects PSS system setting files PMSU communications pts port A B setting data PSS protocol files Only PSS protocol data PSS trace data files Only PSS or SYSMAC ptr PST trace data Use the following procedure to import a SYSMAC PST project file m 1 2 3 1 Select Open from the File Menu or left click the Open Icon on the toolbar Alternatively the file can be opened by pressing the Ctrl O Keys 2 The Open Dialog Box will be displayed Select a SYSMAC PST project file from the list in the Open Dialog Box 3 Left click the Open Button or double left click the selected project to con vert the SYSMAC PST project file into one that can be edited with the CX Protocol The message Convert old file will be displayed Left click the OK Button 4 If there is no setting for PLC model in the SYSMAC PST project file to be imported set
205. bits 00 to 03 and bit 15 is representative of bits 08 to 11 The cause of the error or the cause of Send amp Receive com mand retries will be represented in bits 00 to 15 When communications are restored by the Protocol Macro retries error codes in bits 00 to 03 and bits 08 to 11 will be cleared Even if another error occurs during retries the cause of the error will be held Bits 00 to 15 are cleared when either the sequence starts executing the power is turned ON or the PMSU is restarted In the above table only at power ON is shown but the CPU Unit is cleared in any of the following circumstances At power ON When the op erating mode is changed From PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR when the STUP instruction is executed when the PMSU is reset or when the communications port is restarted Each area can also be cleared after set ting by using the timing methods shown in the reset column When the response type is set to scan the Protocol Macro Execution Flag will be set to O OFF when confirmation is received that the contents of all reception data with responses has been written to I O memory When the repeat count set value is set using word read R if O is read O will be stored and that step will be skipped the next processing setting ignored and forcefully moved to the next step 1 Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas Section 3 10 4 This flag can be used to distinguish whether or not the sequ
206. box will be displayed Select the desired one from the displayed topics 5 Left click the Display Button or press the Enter Key to display the help screen of the topic Jumping to an Associated Topic Left click an underlined term to jump to a help screen associated with the term Returning to Index Press the Help topics Button Help Section 15 Changing Character Size Select Font from the Option Menu and then select Small Normal or Large Printing the Help Screen Select Print topic from the File Menu Enter the number of copies and left click the OK Button Displaying the Topics History Select Display History Window from the Option Menu The Windows Help History Dialog Box will be displayed with a list of topics beginning from the latest one CX Protocol Version Use the following procedure to find out the version of CX Protocol 1 2 3 1 Select About CX Protocol from the Help Menu or left click the About Icon on the toolbar 2 The About CX Protocol dialog will be displayed This dialog provides the CX Protocol copyright and version number 339 Help Section 15 340 Appendix A Creating the Protocol Applications Communication between PLCs via Modems Example In this appendix a protocol is created which initiates communications between PLCs via a telephone line using modems The connection structure and the flow of the protocol creation procedure are as shown below Connection Structure PLC Publi
207. by the device number of variables of process the direct addressing O Received memory data conversion process lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt 8 7 6 5 Repeat 7 and 8 by the number of variables of the direct addressing The communications response time is the total time from 1 to 8 in the above figure The functions 2 and 3 are repeated by the number of variables of the direct addressing of the send message while 7 and 8 are repeated by those of the receive message 191 Communications Response Time Performance 192 Section 4 8 Number Function Time Required PMCR instruction executing notification process time Send data notification pro cess time Send data conversion pro cess time Send data transmission time 8 External device process time Received data transmission time Received data conversion process time Received data writing process time 15 ms two cycle time maximum Board One cycle time maximum Unit Two cycle time maximum Depends on the number of conversion bytes Number of data characters x one character bit transmission rate Depends on the external device process Number of data characters x one character bit transmission rate Depends on the number of conversion bytes Board One cycle time maximum Unit Two cycle time maximum The time from the start of PMCR instruction to the end of the instruction notification to the PMSU The time required fo
208. c line PLC Transmission rate 2400 bps Protocol Creation Procedure Creating the status transition chart of communications sequence l Disassembling of the process contents into the sequences and the steps editable by the CX Protocol l Configuring of the communication messages contents Setting the transmission control mode Setting the monitor time Describing the ladder program 341 Creating the Protocol Applications Appendix A Creating the Status Transition Chart of Communications Sequence When the data sending and receiving between PLCs are conducted via a telephone line using modems the outline of the communications sequences is as shown below PLC Send the modem Modem Modem Send the modem PLC initialization command initialization command f Send the escape code Switch to the escape mode If not O OK retry If not O retry Receive the result code Receive the result code HO OK end Send the dial number If 0 end If not 1 nor 23X redial after one minute Receive the result code df SendOK is received send the content of from DM0100 to 0105 If 1 or 23X end if receiving error retry three times Send the message SendOK _ Receive the message Write the received data and End If not O retry Receive the result code Send the line disconnec
209. can be connected directly for online communications with the PLC using the toolbus or host link Connections to PLC through built in Connecting to PLC through Serial Communica port for online communications tions Board or Unit CX Protocol CxX Protocol CPU Unit Serial Communications Board or Unit d Tool Bus Host Link D or USB CPU Unit NJ series CPU Unit USB or Ethernet Connections to PLC via Network for Online Communications The following shows how the personal computer can be connected online to a PLC on the network via another PLC that is connected to the personal com puter using the toolbus or host link CX Protocol Gateway ma m m a m ow Toolbus or Host Link Network Note This type of connection is not supported for an NJ series CPU Unit Connections to PLC via Modem for Online Communications The following shows how the personal computer can be connected online to a PLC via a telephone line using a modem The PLC connected to via a modem can also be used as a gateway for online connection to other PLCs on the net work For settings refer to 10 4 Modem Connections CX Protocol Telephone line Toolbus or Host Link Toolbus or Host Link Note This type of connection is not supported for an NJ series CPU Unit 261 Communications Settings between Personal Computer and PLC Section 10 2 10 2 2 Direct Connections to PLC for Online Communications Setting PLC Model Use the follow
210. can be previewed by right clicking and select ing Print then Print Preview from the pop up menu The preview window will be displayed and the desired protocol can be previewed The selection can also be made from the File Menu The following functions are avail able e Press the Next Page Button or Prev Page Button to navigate through the pages of the print out e Press the Two Page Button to view two pages of the print out at once This button will then change to the One Page Button to revert back e Press the Zoom In Button and the Zoom Out Button to zoom in and out of the print out e Press the Close Button to close the dialog box e Press the Print Button from the toolbar to display the Print Dialog Box After designating the printer name printing range number of copies left click the OK Button to print the data Alternatively right click to display a pop up menu and select Print from the Print Menu or left click the Print Icon on the toolbar Print can also be se lected from the File Menu The Print Dialog Box will be displayed Set the printer name printing range and number of copies Press the OK Button to print the data Printing will start Printout example of protocol data is as shown below Importing Protocol Data from PST PSS Files Section 11 3 Protocol Hayes modem AT commands Comm Sequences Comm sequence Mo SFO Conm sequence name Modem initialize MD144F 65 Link words areal Maddr1 eni
211. capacity receive buffer may be required However when the protocol macro function is used received data exceeding the receive buffer capacity will be overwrit 17 Sequence Attributes Common to All Steps Section 3 2 ten on the 2 5 Kbyte data already received Therefore be sure to set the flow control if such a large data transmission is expected 3 2 4 Link Word Addressing Use the following procedure to use the link word addressing for designating transmission data storage locations messages Link word Designates an area on which data is shared IN of link word 1 This mode is used to assign addressing between the PLC and the PMSU Two sets of a OUT of link ane 1 a fixed data area com link words link word 1 and link word 2 can be 12 IN of link word 2 monly used by all steps ina set as such areas O2 OUT of link word 2 sequence Link Word 1 Changing link words IN for storing receive data requires modification and OUT for storing send data retransmission of the Link Word 2 sequence IN for storing receive data OUT for storing send data Set these areas using the reserved words 11 I2 O1 or O2 Writing operation to the I O memory will not be synchronized with data reception because these words are refreshed at each PLC scan thus inducing some time lag Directly addresses an I O memory within a send or receive message Link Word Designation CPU Unit PMSU Starting address Refre
212. cation Interrupt notification OO number OO case number 1 Comparison with expected message 2 Conversion under the Yes formula designated by variables 3 Write to I O memory No Ys Writes at scan time Writes immediately after conversion Notification to CPU Unit Turns the PMCR Execution Flag OFF after writing and after sequence is completed Designates fixed inter Designates calculated ruption task program interruption task number and executes program number and the interrupt process executes the interrupt process Wait Process Wait When only using the Send Receive Send amp Receive commands after Command sequence execution has started the progression of steps will be determined by the results of each successive step normal end abnormal end The pro gression cannot be stopped To stop the progression of steps during sequence processing use the Wait command only possible with CS CJ If the Wait command is issued during a step 1 2 3 1 When the wait cancel soft switch is turned OFF the progress of the steps will stop and the sequence will go into standby status If the wait cancel soft switch is turned ON in the ladder program the stand by status will end and the sequence will go to the next process During the standby status the Wait Flag will turn ON 69 Protocol Macro Outline Section 3 1 2 When the wait cancel soft switch is turned ON the sequence will proceed to the next process
213. cations between A S i S computer and i Trace memory 1 2 Starts tracing reading PL aan i ies a Unit 0 communications Unit 0 icon port settings Starts tracing reading Unit F communications Unit F icon port settings PLC memory PLC I O memory monitoring editing I O tabl ti iti O table O table creation editing Errorlog Set by users be es PLC error log display Monitor Note Those in brackets are for the C200HX HG HE Units O to F are for the CS Cu 10 1 1 Outline of Operation The following operations are possible by right clicking the PLC Icon in the TEE PLC Menu toolbar or project workspace i e the left pane of the window and selecting the items from the pop up menu that is displayed e Settings for communications between the personal computer and PLC e PLC online connections and changes in PLC operating mode e Reading and displaying protocol data from the Boards and Units e PMSU communications setting data transfer and trace memory starting and reading e I O table creation PLC I O memory monitoring and editing and error log display 260 Communications Settings between Personal Computer and PLC Section 10 2 10 2 Communications Settings between Personal Computer and PLC 10 2 1 Outline of Connection Methods The following three methods are available for PLC connections for online com munications Direct Connections to PLC for Online Communications The following shows how the personal computer
214. ccord ing to the communications specifications PETE LJALA LO l JALAL IE ID Header Address Data Check Terminator code Note In general the data area of a send message contains a command code and data The data area of a receive message contains a response code 2 Variables for reading data from or writing data to if receiving the I O memory data memory for example of the CPU Unit can be integrated into the messages I O memory Read JE LL send Variable R Variable W IL LLL Jreeceive l Write I O memory This function has the following advantages e Ladder program processing will not be necessary at the CPU Unit when for example sending messages after arranging them all in data memory CPU Unit Li ae Not necessary Send 14 Protocol Macro Section 1 5 e The components of the previously created messages are stored in memory at the PMSU not the CPU Unit When sending or receiving data the CPU Unit only has to execute the PMCR instruction CPU Unit PMSU PMCR instruction Message e When handling one part of the I O memory data if the variable re quired for reading that data has been integrated into a send message the PMSU will automatically read the required data from the I O mem ory of the CPU Unit when the PMSU sends the message Similarly when writing data from one part of a received message into I O mem ory if the variable required to read the
215. ception Tfr does not complete in the designated Tfr or the terminator does not come Note 1 the system executes the error process set in the step Note 2 Send finish Monitors the time from transmission of the header to transmission of monitoring time the last byte of the data If the transmission does not end within this Tfs designated monitoring time Note 1 the system will execute the error process set in the step Send wait time Ts Sets the time from when the send command of the step is recog nized until the first byte is sent For example when sending the data over an extension line through the modem dialing may not be suc cessful unless there is a pause to input the telephone number after dialing O O Available Not available Note 1 When a retry count of Send amp Receive is set for the step the system repeats the step up to the number of times of the retry count If all retries fail or a time out occurs the system executes the appropriate error process Send only i Receive only 7 Tr il 7 Send amp Receive 83 Step Attributes Section 3 3 2 Be sure to set both the receive wait monitor time Tr and receive finish mon itor time Tfr With the CX Protocol it will not be possible to set just one of these Setting with the CX Protocol Timer Tr Ei E3 Value Time Unit E fi second Cancel ow Timer Tfr Value Time Unit OK E x 1 second Cancel HE O
216. cess according to the PLC s command which finishes by the start of the response data send ing The time required for the received data transmission from the external device Use two to five times the calculated time because idle time exists between the receive characters The time required for the received data conversion from the external device based on the specified con version mode which finishes at the end of data transfer The time from start of response interrupt notification to the end of the received data transfer to I O memory Note Although the data conversion process times of 2 and 6 vary according to the PLC operation status the maximum values can roughly be estimated by the following calculation formula 2 The send data conversion process time 10 000 us one byte conversion time x number of conversion bytes One byte conversion time No conversion 15 us ASCII conversion 40 us hexadecimal conversion 55 us 6 The received data conversion process time 100 us one byte conversion time x number of conversion bytes one byte conversion time No conversion 15 us ASCII conversion 30 us hexadecimal conversion 15 us Communications Response Time Performance Section 4 8 e Communications Response Performance Using the Link Word Area Illustrated below is the data flow when the link word area is used for the communications data storing area External devices CPU Unit f
217. cess time Received data writing process time 15 ms two cycle time maximum Board One cycle time maximum Unit Two cycle time max imum Depends on the number of conversion bytes Number of data characters x one character bit transmission rate Depends on the external device process Number of data characters x one character bit transmission rate Depends on the number of conversion bytes Board One cycle time maximum Unit Two cycle time maximum The time from the start of PMCR instruction to the end of the instruction notification to the PMSU The time required for the data transfer based on the PMSU request The time required for the data conversion based on the specified conversion mode which finishes at the start of data sending to the external device The time required for the data transmission to the external device Use double the calculated time because idle time exists between send characters The time required for the external device process according to the PLC s command which finishes by the start of the response data sending The time required for the receive data transmission from the external device Use two to five times the calculated time because idle time exists between the receive characters The time required for the receive data conversion from the external device based on the specified conversion mode which finishes at the end of data The tim
218. ch scan writing to the I O memory area will not take place simultaneously with receive process and there will be a time lag A holding data shared area is designated for the CPU Unit and the PMSU It is possible to set two link words 1 and 2 Link word 1 IN receive data storage OUT send data storage Link word 2 IN receive data storage OUT send data storage Designations are made under the 11 12 13 and l4 Since the CPU Unit refreshes with each scan writing to the I O memory area will not take place simultaneously with receive process and there will be a time lag Note 1 CS CJ only 2 C200HX HG HE only Word read ia 3rd operand in PMCR instruction 2nd operand for C200HX HG HE Designate word z word Word write mo 4th operand in PMCR instruction 3rd operand for C200HX HG HE Designate word z word CIOU WRLILILIL note 1 LRUULLI note 2 HROUULI AROUULI DMUUUULI EMUL Ll Word number I1 IN for link word 1 O1 OUT for link word 1 2 IN for link word 2 O2 OUT for link word 2 Section 3 1 With a PMCR instruction in a ladder program the data area that is jointly used for the sequence can be set automatically Using the interrupt function high response processing can be achieved Set when allocating a fixed data area and used separately within the step When changing it will be necessary to correct the step and resend Set when allocating a fixed data area and used se
219. click the OK Button to accept the settings or the Cancel Button to leave the settings unchanged Scan Mode The data in the receive buffer is written in the I O memory after conversion when scanned by the CPU Unit Refer to 3 2 Sequence Attributes Common to All Steps for the writing timing Interrupt Mode Fixed No See note The data in the receive buffer is written in the I O memory immediately after it is converted in the designated conversion method After the received data is completely written in the I O memory designate the external interrupt task number for the CS or the interrupt subroutine number for the C200HX HG HE in a range from O to 255 to execute the interrupt processing for the CPU Unit Interrupt Mode Receive Case No See note The data in the receive buffer is written in the I O memory immediately after it is converted in the designated conversion method After the received data is completely written in the I O memory the external interrupt task number for the CS or the subroutine number for the C200HX HG HE is calculated based on the step number and the receive case number executed according to the following procedure to execute the interrupt processing for the CPU Unit The interrupt task number or subroutine number 0 to 255 will be automatically calculated depending on the execution status of the Communications Board These modes are valid only with the Serial Communications Board for the CS and with the Com
220. code each port Execution Completion Matrix Case No Storage Flag Execution Completion Storage Flag each port Repeat Counter Present Value each port Repeat Counter Set Value each port Sequence End Completion Flag each port Sequence Abort Comple tion Flag each port Step Error Processing Execution Flag each port CS Serial Communica tions Board CS CJ Serial Communica tions Unit Allocation Area Port 1 word Port 1 word Port2 word CIO CIO 1910 1920 CIO 1911 CIO 1913 CIO 1911 CIO 1912 CIO 1914 CIO 1914 CIO 1909 CIO 1909 CIO 1909 n 10 n 11 CIO 1921 CIO 1923 CIO 1921 CIO 1922 k CIO 1924 CIO 1924 CIO 1919 CIO 1919 CIO 1919 n 13 n 11 n 12 None n 14 n 14 word Port 2 Com C200HX HG HE Communica mon tions Board ecial Auxiliary Area 08 to 11 00 to 15 00 to 03 00 to 15 00 to 07 CIO 287 CIO 287 CIO 287 CIO 284 Sp Port A word n 20 O0to None 11 B l o 04 to 07 00 to 03 n 00 to 07 7 a 0 Port B word None CIO None 287 285 CIO M YVO YVO O O O No 0 CO 0 04 to 07 Section 3 10 000 to 03E7 hexadecimal 000 to 999 OtoF hexadecimal 0 to 15 0 to 15 bits Corresponds to step No 0 to 15 OtoF hexadecimal 0 to 15 0 to 15 bits Corresponds to case No 0 to 15 0 Nothing sto
221. col can be selected by pressing the Shift Key and selecting another protocol to extend the se lection or by pressing the Ctrl Key and selecting another protocol to add to the selection Press the Ctrl C Keys or left click the Copy Icon and select Copy from the pop up menu Alternatively select Copy from the Edit Menu After selecting the new project and selecting the Protocol List Icon to be pasted into the project workspace press the Ctrl V Keys or left click the Paste Icon or right click and select Paste from the pop up menu or select Paste from the Edit Menu The system protocol or system protocols se lected will be copied to the protocol list in the new project Copying and Pasting a Sequence to a Specified Protocol 1 2 3 1 Select New from the File Menu or left click the New Button from the toolbar and create a new project Left click the System Tab on the bottom of the project workspace and se lect the sequence Press the Ctrl C Keys or left click the Copy Icon or right click and select Copy from the pop up menu Alternatively select Copy from the Edit Menu Select the Protocol Icon of the destination and press the Ctrl V Keys or left click the Paste Icon or right click and select Paste from the pop up menu Alternatively select Paste from the Edit Menu The selected se quence will be placed at the end of the protocol Send or receive messages will not be copied together with the sequence Note Standard system proto
222. col sequences cannot be pasted into an C200HX HG HE protocol 212 SECTION 6 Project and Protocol Editing This section describes details of the editing of projects and protocols Gal Editie Projects 5 kos ecient a a a aar daw dared mentee 214 6 1 1 Adding Information to a Project 0 0 0 cece 214 01 2 Openinga Project sits aot eae Gare ence Oe ae aoc be E 214 6 1 3 Opening Project Windows 0 0 e eee nee 215 6 1 4 Overwriting and Renaming a Project 0 000000 aes 215 Gla Savne aA Proe 4s on canoce tahoe E E ee eee 215 GiG Clos nea PO C oeseri peaa n thew chee ods ae 216 6 2 Edun Prolocols anra ana a eek Pee a es 216 6 2 1 Displaying a Protocol List 0 0 00 ne 216 6 2 2 Renaming a Protocol in the List 0 0 0022s 216 6 2 3 Deleting a Protocol from the List 00004 216 6 2 4 Copying a Protocol lt 3c ned ced ese coe de ae eiidewde ced 217 213 Editing Projects Section 6 1 6 1 Editing Projects A project consists of a protocol list trace list and PLC The protocol list includes all the protocols in the project A protocol consists of sequences The PLC is in control of the system setup and the tracing of send and receive mes sages The trace list is data of trace results added to the project The CX Pro tocol uses each project as a single file for the control and management of the protocols trace list and PLC Refer to 10 1 PLC System Confi
223. command etc is 15 If more branches are necessary use the ladder program 153 Protocol Creation Process Section 4 2 4 2 Protocol Creation Process 4 2 1 Creating Communications Sequence Flowcharts e Retry if not B e End if B e Retry after one minute if not D e End if E Create the status transition chart of communications sequence Before creating a protocol by using the Protocol Support Tool users are recommended to first draw such a status transition charts to illustrate the communications sequences with the communicating machine as shown below as an example Then users can convert them to sequences and steps editable by the Protocol Support Tool Example PLC External device PLC Temperature controller p Send the read Salaka gt command for e Retry if not process value response format e End if response format Send the write command for a a set value A e Retry if not response format e End if response format Y y 4 2 2 Disassembling into Sequences and Steps e Disassembling the protocol into sequences and steps to be editable by 154 the Protocol Support Tool e Disassemble into sequences Take out a block from the above process as a sequence which is to be started or switched by the ladder program For example either Read the process value of tem
224. con the new folder is created in the current folder e By left clicking the List Icon the folder name and the file names in the current folder are listed on screen e By left clicking the Details Icon the folder name and the names sizes types and last modified dates of the files in the current folder will be dis played 6 1 3 Opening Project Windows The CX Protocol makes it possible to open more than one project window After opening a new window it is possible to display the projects currently opened in other windows and other projects can be displayed in the new win dow To add a new project window for the projects currently opened select New Window from the Window Menu The new project window will be displayed on the front side and each of the previous project windows will be placed behind Each window is given a unique identifier 6 1 4 Overwriting and Renaming a Project Use the following procedure to overwrite a project Hl 1 2 3 1 Select Save from the File Menu or left click the Save Icon from the toolbar or select Save from the pop up menu after right clicking the Project Icon or pressing the Ctrl S Keys 2 The project will be saved under the present project name When saving a new project in this method the Save as Dialog Box will be displayed with the default file name PSWL1 Change the default name to an appropriate name Note Input the project name in the File name Field of the Save as Dialog Box
225. con on the toolbar to move up the selected matrix case by one It can also be selected by right clicking to display the pop up menu and then selecting Move from the menu list Select a matrix case and press the Down Icon on the toolbar to move down the selected matrix case by one It can also be selected by right clicking to display the pop up menu and then selecting Move from the menu list Select the matrix case and press the Top Icon on the toolbar to move the matrix case to the case number 00 position It can also be selected by right clicking to display the pop up menu and then selecting Move from the menu list 257 Message and Matrix Editing Section 9 3 258 SECTION 10 Communications PLC Setup and Online Connections This section describes details of the communications settings and online connections 1021 PEC System Conmerau Ons aika vk geo Pe ORE hE Ee ee 260 WAI Outhne oF Operinonss 2 urie a n ra a cede thee als add 260 10 2 Communications Settings between Personal Computer and PLC 261 10 2 1 Outline of Connection Methods 0 00 e eee 261 10 2 2 Direct Connections to PLC for Online Communications 262 10 2 3 Connections to PLC on Network via Online Communications 264 10 3 Online Connections and Mode Changes 0 0 00 cee eee eee 268 10 3 1 Online Connection Method 0 0 000 cee eee 268 1 02322 Changing tO OMIN maania on euch oS 2 hte ee aiar at a amp tee gue det
226. cro Outline Section 3 1 Direct Designation of I O Memory Area Address Creation of send messages and storage of receive messages is performed with the I O memory address designated directly CPU Unit PMSU Direct designation to this address 7 I O memory C 1 During message sending 2 During message receiving The timing with which the data is reflected in I O memory depends on the scan for the CPU Unit Reading Variables Example R D00102 4 The 4 bytes 2 words starting from D00102 will be read Writing Variables Example W D00202 4 The 4 bytes 2 words starting from D00202 will be written Using a Shared Data Link Word Area for the CPU Unit and the PMSU Link Word Designation CPU Unit PMSU Items to set Link word 1 IN first word address area classification and address number of words 0 to 500 OUT first word address area classification aaia ecole data and address number of words 0 to 500 1 i O1 O1 Link word 2 Send data Send data IN first word address area classification and address number of words 0 to 500 Link word 2 Link word 2 OUT first word address area classification and address number of words 0 to 500 Link word 1 Link word 1 12 I2 Receive data Receive data Settings of up to 500 words CS CJ or 128 words C200HX HG HE can be made for 02 02 IN and OUT for both link words 1 and 2 Send data Send data Creation of send m
227. cted an error to stop operation Section 4 7 Change to the full duplex setting Set or extend the send wait time time until send data is actually sent out set for each step Check the cable connection Turn ON the termi nating resistance terminating resis tance ON OFF switch on the Board side and on the final destina tion device and turn OFF the ter minating resis tances of other destination devices Change the cable to twisted pair shielded cables Separate the cables from power lines Check the possi ble environmental noise Using the CX Protocol transfer correct protocol data Refer to page 181 179 Errors at the Protocol Execution Section 4 7 Note To enable changes in the system settings reset the power supply and restart the PMSU restart the ports or execute the STUP instruction Countermeasures for Errors Displayed as Network Communications Termination Codes A203 to A210 Network communications termination code Description Bits 08 to 15 Bits 00 to 07 02 hexadecimal 02 hexadecimal PMSU that correspond to the Check if the PMCR unit number address does instruction C1 communica not exist tions port number desig nates another PMSU or serial port physical port 04 hexadecimal 01 hexadecimal Designated service is not Check if the PMCR supported instruction C1 communica tions port number desig nates another PMSU or serial port physical port Check if the
228. ction Execution Flag 28908 is OFF the sequence No 000 is executed and the process value is stored in DM 0201 Instruction flag 28908 If the Instruction Execution Flag is OFF and the Step Error Process Execution Flag 28909 is OFF when 00100 is ON the current received process value in DM 0201 will be transferred to DM 0300 Step error process execution flag 28909 Instruction 1 Execution Flag 28908 0 Sequence Sequence Sequence execution termination restart h 9 lt D 1 i 00100 0 The process value in DM0201 J Sequence normal termination is transferred to DMO300 Step Error Process Execution 0 So U O OO a Flag 28909 FAL instruction is executed Sequence error termination Step Error Process Execu tion Flag 28909 0 Sequence Error Termination Process If the End is set for the normal sequence termination and the Abort is set for the error termination as follows either the normal sequence termination or the error termination can be identified by the Sequence End Termination Flag and the Sequence Abort Termination Flag 168 Ladder Programming Method Section 4 4 Example 1 Sequence Sequence Step No 00 Error Sequence error termination Error Sequence error termination End Sequence Normal Termination Instruction 1 Execution Flag 28908 0 Sequence Sequence Sequence execution termination restart Sequence End 1 i Termination Flag
229. ctually running it on the Unit Not checking the protocol may result in an unexpected operation Online connection of the CX Protocol cannot be made to a PLC which is con nected online to SYSMAC CPT or SYSMAC PST Therefore when SYSMAC CPT or SYSMAC PST is running and connected online to a PLC it must be offline before making online connection to the CX Protocol Similarly when the CX Protocol is connected online to a PLC it must be switched to offline before making online connection to SYSMAC CPT or SYSMAC PST SECTION 1 Introduction This section outlines the Protocol Macro function and the CX Protocol lek Overview or the CX2Protocl sie foi we os eee Be eee ae Bee 2 EZ Fea eer out er a aa at Ui etna e ETATS 2 1 2 1 Features of the Protocol Macro Function 04 2 1 2 2 Features of the CX Protocol 0 0 0 0 cee eee 4 1 3 Supported PLC Models and Personal Computers 5 1 3 1 Supported PLC Models 0 0 0 ee 5 l 322 Supported PIMISUS 4 34 26 500es a4 ook aie oh saree ees EDE 5 1 3 3 Supported Personal Computers 0 0 0 e eee eee 9 led SYStemiConnsuraOns 2 teveuded ataseaceeet eli cagh sd aA 9 1 4 1 Connecting the CX Protocol and the PLC 9 1 4 2 Connecting the PLC to External Devices 11 les Protocol Mics esee eee es oe E a EA E 14 1 5 1 Protocol Macro Outline 0 0 0 ee 14 1 5 2 Standard System Protocol 0 0 cee 17 l
230. culated time because idle time exists between the receive characters Received data conversion Depends on the number The time required for the receive process time of conversion bytes data conversion from the external device based on the specified conversion mode which finishes at the end of data Received data writing One cycle time maximum The time required for the received process time data transfer to O memory Note Although the data conversion process times of 2 and 6 vary according to the PLC operation status the maximum values can roughly be estimated by the following calculation formula 2 The send data conversion process time 10 000 us one byte conversion time x number of conversion bytes one byte conversion time No conversion 15 us ASCII conversion 40 us hexadecimal conversion 55 us 6 The receive data conversion process time 100 us one byte conversion time x number of conversion bytes one byte conversion time No conversion 15 us ASCII conversion 30 us hexadecimal conversion 15 us External device process Depends on the external The time required for the external time device process device process according to the PLC s command which finishes by the start of the response data sending Communications Response Time Performance Section 4 8 e Communications Response Time Using the Direct Addressing Illustrated below is the data flow when the direct addressing is used CPU Unit Bo
231. d 08 wait clear switch in the allocated data area n words turn from OFF to ON Clear the forced abort switch setting Using the trans mission line trace function of the CX Protocol check if protocol data or system settings are cor rect Using the transmission line trace function of the CX Protocol check if protocol data or system settings are cor rect Review the system settings Review the settings and program of the destination device baud rate frame format etc 177 Errors at the Protocol Execution Section 4 7 Problem Serial Indicator display Status communications information mode setting Serial SDLI RDU Send data is being Bit 15 Cable connection Check the cable communications COML indicators sent but no transmission is faulty connection mode is set to are lit However response is error in the Setting of the Turn ON the protocol macro communications received from the allocated data 9 wire 4 wire terminating cannot be destination device area n 8 n 18 selection switch on resistance performed turns ON the port 2 of RS terminating resis One of bits 0 to 14 422A 485 does tance ON OFF errors turns ON not match with the switch on the wiring Board side and on Adapter the final NT ALOO1 etc destination device wiring is faulty and turn OFF the terminating resistances of other destination devices SDLI RDLJ Hardware is faulty Set bits 11 to 08
232. d Monitoring 1 2 3 1 Traces the transmission lines Trace the data in the send and receive messages and the control signals that are flowing on the transmission line RS 232C or RS 422A 485 2 Monitors the I O memory Monitor the send and the receive data and the status of flags 1 11 2 For the C200HX HG HE Procedure 1 PMSU Setup DIP Switch Setup for the PMSU For C2ZOOHW COMO6 E EV1 only SW1 Switch between two wire and four wire methods SW2 ON OFF of terminating resistance ON during using RS 422A 485 ports DIP Switch SW2 DIP Switch SW1 Procedure 2 PMSU Mounting 1 2 320 1 Open the memory cassette cover 29 Basic Procedure of the Protocol Macro Usage Section 1 11 2 Remove the PMSU cover 3 Insert the PMSU and slide it into the slit completely Procedure 3 Connection with External Devices Connect through RS 232C or RS 422A 485 CPU unit Protocol Macro Support Unit RS 232C RS 422A 485 General purpose General purpose external device external device General purpos external device General purpose external device Note For connector pin arrangements and connection methods refer to the Com munications Board Operation Manual W304 and other relevant manuals for general purpose external devices 30 Basic Procedure of the Protocol Macro Usage Section 1 11 Procedure 4 Initial Setting 1 2 3 1 For Connecting Cables between the PLC and the CX Protocol refer t
233. d PLC xi A stem Protocols E Ej PSWi1 psw C 333 New Protocol List Trace List Traces aa Trace List NewPC1 amp Projects Help Display of Sequences in a Protocol A protocol consists of sequences zix Communication Sequence Link Word Control Response Timer Tr Timer Tfr Timer Tfs EXAMPLE 32 000 Procces value read Set Scan sec E sec F sec 233 EX Protocol List 7 001 Lamp set point read Set Scan 3 sec 3 sec 3 sec H O TEMP COMM cs 002 Manipulated variable read maim Set Scan 3 sec 3 sec 3 sec 333 EX1 Protocol List 003 Set point read Set Scan 3 sec 3 sec 3 sec H O 004 Alarm value read Set Scan 3 sec 3 sec 3 sec 2 Trace List c 005 Propo band nte Deri time read Set Scan 3 sec 3 sec 3 sec ii NewPLC1 Offline 0S1G if f 006 Cooling coefficient read o Set Scan 3 sec 3 sec 3 sec 21 Main Screens of the CX Protocol Section 1 8 Display of Each Step in a Sequence A sequence consists of steps and their setup parameters for each sequence transmission control parameter and so on Ej EXAMPLE 2 psw Step Repeat Command Retry Send Wait Send Message Recv Messa 00 RSET O01 send amp Receive 5019 1 TASEIN G g RSET O01 send amp Receive SEGI Rte oz RSET O01 send amp Receive SDt2111 muzd EXAMPLE Fl 33 Ex Protocol List amp TEMP COMM A 8 EX1 Protocol List amp Controller E5_K read Propo band Inte Deri Displ
234. d Sequence numbers 606 to 621 Operation Manual The CxX Protocol Ver 1 4 Operation Manual W344 is included with CX Protocol version 1 5 Apart from the new functions and improvements in version 1 5 explained here however there are no other changes in the upgrade that will affect operation or functionality Version 1 4 The following functions have been added to the CX Protocol with the upgrade from Ver 1 3 to Ver 1 4 New PLCs Supported Simulation is newly supported for the following PLCs a CPU Unit model numbers CS1D CPU67H 65H CS1D CPU67S 65S 44S 425 CON CONES Version 1 3 The following functions have been added to the CX Protocol with the upgrade from Ver 1 2 to Ver 1 3 CJ1M CPU23 22 13 12 CPU Units Supported Windows XP Supported Version 1 2 The following functions have been added to the CX Protocol with the upgrade from Ver 1 1 to Ver 1 2 CS1 H CJ1 and CJ1 H CPU Units Supported xxiii XXIV PRECAUTIONS This section provides general precautions for using the CX Protocol and related devices The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the CX Protocol You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate the CX Protocol AUMUA WN Intended AUGICNCE seus nick hale wat Oh ae ha hes Coe ee Rea ee XXV1 General PIecavllOnSi weyin tei nan Ee Cae he hoes aa eS ohare XXVI1 Salely PrecaullOns 4
235. d at top of page Page 229 Heading changed at top of page Page 248 Section added Page 274 Removed subnote at bottom of page Page 279 Corrected reference in middle of page Pages 280 283 287 Replaced graphic Page 285 Corrected step reference in note at top of page Page 286 Deleted step 11 and added text to new step 11 Page 356 Corrected reference at bottom of page 366 Revision History Revision code Dae Revised content July 2006 The following changes were made Page xi Communications Command Reference Manual Cat No changed and CX Programmer version updated Page xiii Table at bottom of page updated Page xvii Version upgrade information added Pages 2 56 57 and 60 Note added Page 5 Version of CX Protocol updated and PLC models added Page 6 Information added Page 9 Information added at top of page and versions updated in illustration at bottom of page Page 10 Models added Page 25 Versions updated in illustration at top of page Page 26 Section reference added at top of page Page 35 Supported networks and connection with PLCs updated Page 40 Windows versions added and PLC models added Page 41 Illustration added Page 60 Menu item added Pages 63 and 64 Toolbar updated Pages 98 249 287 and 336 CJ or CP added Page 124 Information added to note in middle of page Pages 192 and 193 A added to RS 422 Pages 226 299 306 307 308 347 and 349 SYSMAC Alpha
236. dard system protocols are included also in the PMSU Supported PLC Models and Personal Computers Section 1 3 Possible to trace send receive message By executing the trace function from the CX Protocol the PMSU can trace and save chronological data of send receive messages up to 670 bytes for the C200HX HG HE and up to 1 700 bytes for the CS CJ Each data item can be displayed and printed for reading and saved as a trace file 1 3 Supported PLC Models and Personal Computers 1 3 1 Supported PLC Models The CX Protocol supports the following PLCs Programmable Controllers Series CPU Unit NJ501 1300 1400 1500 NJ301 1100 1200 S See note 1 CS1H CPU67 66 65 64 63 CS1G CPU45 44 43 42 CS1H CPU67H 66H 65H 64H 63H CS1G CPU45H 44H 43H 42H CS1D CPU67H 65H CS1D CPU67S 65S 44S 425 CJ2H CPU68 67 66 65 64 68 EIP 67 EIP 66 EIP 65 EIP 64 EIP CJ2M CPU11 12 13 14 15 381 32 33 34 35 CJ1G CPU45 44 CJ1G CPU45H 44H 43H 42H CJ1G CPU45P 44P 43P 42P CJ1H CPU67H R 66H R 65H R 64H R 67H 66H 65H CJ1M CPU23 22 21 13 12 11 CP1H XALIUIUILI L OL LI LLI L G5D Same for the NSJ5 TQOO G5D NSJ5 SQO00 G5D NSJ8 TVOL1 G5D NSJ10 TVOL G5D and NSJ12 TS00 G5D M3D Same for the NSJ5 TQUU M3D NSJ5 SQUU M3D and NSJ8 TVOL M3D C200HX HG HE C200HX CPU34 E 44 E 54 E 64 E 34 ZE 44 ZE 54 ZE 64 ZE 65 ZE 85 ZE See note 2 C200HG CPU33 E 43 E 53 E 63 E 33 ZE 43 ZE 53 ZE 63 ZE O T X lt gt O 2 I x lt
237. designates conversion formula and the send message is execution assembled and is transferred to the send sequence buffer number for the Receive Following receive process Receive Half duplex Data that is received from the command Send amp Receive command transmission line when send process is not 1 The data in the receive buffer is input being performed will be saved in the receive comparison with the expected message is buffer executed and switching of the next process Full duplex All data received from the takes place transmission line during sequence execution 2 If there is a Response Write the data will will be saved in the receive buffer be written to I O memory after being converted with the designated conversion for mula PMSU 6l Protocol Macro Outline Section 3 1 Send Process Send Command Send amp Receive Command From the Address CPU Unit Repeat counter 62 If the Send command or the Send amp Receive command is executed with a certain step the send message set by that step will be assembled and sent from the send buffer as shown below If a variable reading variable has been integrated into the send message the appropriate data will be read from I O memory and converted to the designated form according to the variable and the send message will be assembled Note When a send completion monitoring time has been set for send process and the time is exceeded without sen
238. device Time required to the send data transmission to the external device When designing use double the calculated time because idle time exists between the send characters Time required by the external device to process according to the command from the PLC until the start of the send response data Time required to transmit the received data from the external device When designing use two to five times the calculated time because idle time exists between the receive characters 171 Calculation Method of Monitoring Time Section 4 5 Number Function _ Time Required Received data conversion process Depends on number of conversion Time required for the conversion of the received data from the external device based on the specified conversion method 7 Received data writing time One cycle time maximum Time required to finish the received data transfer to the I O memory Note Although the data conversion process times of 2 and 6 vary according to the PLC operation status for the CS CJ the maximum values can be estimated with the following calculation formula 2 The send data conversion process time 10 ms one byte conversion time x number of conversion bytes Reverse conversion 5 us ASCII reverse conversion 4 us hexadecimal reverse conversion 7 us One byte conversion time No conversion 1 us reverse conversion 5 us ASCII conversion 10 us ASCII reverse conversion 4 us hexadecimal con ver
239. ding a message the step will end abnormally and the system will move to the error process Otherwise the step will end normally and move to the next process PMSU Maximum send buffer 1 000 bytes max CS1 256 bytes max C200HX HG HE 1 Read process Data Address Repeat counter designated by variable is read from memory address 2 Variable process Conversion to the format designated by the vari able e No conversion e Hexadecimal ASCIl conversion ASCII Hexadecimal conversion 3 Assembly process Send message is assembled Error code Send message Sent after the Send Waiting Time for a step Protocol Macro Outline Section 3 1 Receive Process Receive Command Send amp Receive Command To CPU Unit If with a certain step the Receive command or the Send amp Receive Com mand is executed the data will be taken out of the receive buffer and a com parison with the expected message will be made If the data does not correspond the step will end abnormally and the system will move to the error process If the data does correspond and a variable write variable has been integrated into the expected message it will be converted to the format desig nated by the variable and write process to I O memory in the CPU Unit will be performed All processing for the step will be completed and the system will move to the next process PMSU Maximum receive buffer Receive message R
240. ditions are for when installing the CX Protocol as an individ ual application Different conditions will apply when installing the CX Protocol as one of the features of the CX One FA Integrated Tool Package Refer to the CX One Setup Manual W463 for the specific conditions pte eseription Creation of protocols transfer of protocols to and from the PMSU and file saving File creation unit Project unit Components of project Protocol list Up to 20 protocols components of protocol sequence send receive message matrix Devices Target PLC network setup com munications port setup faceist Other functions Tracing of transmission lines Monitoring of PLC s I O memory Print of protocols Standard system protocols are built in Error display Supported network Host link SYSMAC WAY Tool Bus Controller Link SYSMAC LINK Ethernet and USB Connection with PLCs Peripheral port built in RS 232C port or USB port on the CPU Unit RS 232C port on the PMSU only in the host link mode or a Network Support Board for the above networks 1 13 Differences between Protocol Macros The protocol macro for the CS Cu is different from the one for the C200HX HG HE as shown in the following table Cem C200HX HG HE CS CJ Half duplex Half duplex or full duplex Commands Send Receive and Send amp Receive Send Receive Send amp Receive Wait Flush DTR ON Open and DTR OFF Close Notes Wait Keeps the step on standby and cont
241. dow or select Sequence from the Protocol Menu 3 The new protocol with the default name New Sequence will be displayed in the protocol Ey Psw Mel x Communication Sequence Link Word Gontrol Response Timer Tr Time ce OOO New Sequence Scan List Messages hat Send Message List 0 List Messages Ma Receive Message List g Matrix List Fee pea Matrix List A Note For details of each input item refer to SECTION 7 Sequence Setting and Edit ing 5 2 2 Creating a New Step Use the following procedure to create a new step in the sequence Ci 1 2 3 1 Double click the Protocol Icon in the project workspace and select and highlight the sequence where the new step is created Alternatively dou ble click the Sequence Icon in the project window 9a 2 Right click on the sequence icon in the project workspace or in the project i window point at New in the pop up menu and select Step The step can also be selected from the Protocol Menu The new step will be added to the list 208 Creating Messages and Matrices Section 5 3 Be pst IO x E E E T E D Oo RSET O01 Send PHS RE RE YES End Abort Note For details of each input item refer to SECTION 8 Step Setting and Editing 5 3 Creating Messages and Matrices 5 3 1 Creating a New Message Use either of the following procedures to create a new message 1 2 3 1 Right click the Send Message or Receive Message Field in the step list and
242. dress at the data area where receive data is stored Note When no receive data is found be sure to set a dummy word Setting a con stant 0000 to FFFF generates an error ER Flag 25503 is ON and the PMCR instruction is not executed Data is not written to the dummy word It can be used for the others Receive data is not stored in D and the following The number of effective addresses is stored in D1 D 1 and the following D No of effective words No of words that are valid including D D 1 Receive data e Flag ER 25503 When DM Indirect is designated the DM Other than the contents are not 6656 or higher or BCD cases mentioned to For D the DM contents are not 6144 or higher the left or BCD e When the instruction is executed or already in execution e When neither 1 nor 2 is designated for the port e Data Contents Medel peoe osma e po p Tmoayeg eooo o 131 Executing a Created Communications Sequence C200HX HG HE Section 3 9 Indirect data D0000 6655 D0000 6655 D0000 6655 memory See the above 0000 FFFF Se Contents of send receive data word assignment to read the process value in sequence No 101of the standard system protocol Temp Controller E5ZE read are as follows Read the process value and store the result in the designated address e Send data word assignment Second operand of PMCR instruction Send data 0 No of send data words
243. dress is the same as the address 1 byte long set in the third operand CS CJ or second operand C200HX HG HE of the PMCR instruction 1 and converted to ASCII the data part succeeding this address part will be re ceived Note The message to be compared expected message is word read R option 2 Whichever unit address the destination of the receive message has the data part succeeding the address part is received Note For the address part the wildcard can be used only on X Data Addressing amp W 1 The data that was received is written to the fourth operand CS CuJ or the third operand C200HX HG HE of the PMCR 1 in hexa decimal regardless of the length Note To store the data that was received into the area on the PLC use word writing W option to designate Communication Message Attributes Section 3 4 Example Comparing some part of the receive data and storing the other part of the data to the PLC area The system checks the command string TX in the data that were received and then stores the succeeding data to the area in the PLC Data Designation TX 2 amp W 1 When receiving the command TX the system does not compare the next 2 bytes of data and stores the subsequent data in hexadecimal regardless of the length If the wildcard is set at the data size part of variable word write the actual data size will be determined at one of the followi
244. dure 5 Protocol Design Perform required processes including DIP switch settings on external de vices Refer to the SECTION 4 SECTION 5 and SECTION 6 1 2 3 1 2 3 Creates the status transition chart of the communications sequence Disassembles the status transition chart into sequences and steps and set them up Creates the send and the receive messages Procedure 6 Project Protocol Data Creation and Transfer by CX Protocol Refer to 1 9 Overview of Project Creation 1 2 3 1 2 Creates a new project Refer to 5 7 Creating Projects and Protocols Creates a new communications sequence Refer to 5 2 Creating Sequences and Steps and7 1 Setting Sequences Creates each step Refer to 5 2 Creating Sequences and Steps and 8 1 Step Setting Creates each message See note Refer to 9 1 Creating Messages Transfers the created projects to the PMSU Refer to 11 1 Transferring and Reading Protocol Data between the Com puter and PMSU Note Each step can be created after each message creation by designat ing the message name Procedure 7 The Ladder Program Creation 28 1 2 3 1 Protocol Macro Execution Flag Input condition 191915 4 44 Allocates a function code for the PMCR instruction Example For the Serial Communications Board Communications Port Enabled Flag Use communications port No 7 and A20207 serial port No 2 Destination unit number address E1 Inner serial com
245. e i e fatal error or non fatal error e The following errors will be displayed if they result Fatal Errors in Order of Priority Memory Error I O Bus Error Unit Rack Number Duplication Error Inner Board Fatal Error I O Points Over I O Setting Error Program Error Cycle Time Over FALS Error 322 Error and Error Log Display Section 13 Non fatal Errors in Order of Priority FAL Error Interrupt Input Unit Error Basic I O Error PLC Setup Error I O Table Verification Error Inner Board Nonfatal Error CPU Bus Unit Error Special I O Unit Error SYSMAC BUS Error Battery Error CPU Bus Unit Setup Error Special I O Unit Setup Error Note It is possible to display the PLC Errors Window whenever an error occurs Furthermore it is possible keep displaying the PLC Errors Window on top or keep displaying the clock of the PLC on the status bar of the error log window For details refer to page 326 Setting PLC Errors Window Conditions 3 Whenever an error is displayed remedy the error 4 Left click the Clear All Button and delete the error display Note If a memory error has resulted the error display will not disappear when the Clear All Button is left clicked in step 3 Instead the follow ing dialog box will be displayed Clear Hemory Error a WARNING To successfully cleara PLC Hemor Error the FLE requires complete initialzatior of all areas this includes Program Area Paramater Area and OM Area ALL PLE dat
246. e Enter Key The Message Check Code lt c gt Dialog Box will be displayed The dialog box can also be displayed from the Message Editor Dialog Box Refer to the previous Header lt h gt section Message Check Code tc None UI Cancel Conversion Reverse Order Data ype Bl C ASCII Select a check code type from the Type drop down list For LRC LRC2 CRC 16 SUM 1 byte 2 bytes SUM1 1 byte 2 bytes 245 Creating Messages Section 9 1 and SUM2 1 byte 2 bytes all fields of the dialog box become active For CRC CCITT the Conversion Field becomes active 2 Input values in the Default Field For LRC LRC2 CRC 16 SUM 1 byte SUM1 1 byte and SUM2 1 byte enter a default value from O to 255 For SUM 2 bytes SUM1 2 bytes SUM2 2 bytes CRC 16 enter a default value from 0 to 65535 3 Select the Reverse Order check box to set the reverse check code 4 For all types other than None set BIN or ASCII in the Data Type Field For LRC LRC2 SUM 1 byte SUM1 1 byte and SUM2 1 byte BIN in dicates binary data 1 byte and ASCII indicates ASCII data 2 bytes For CRC CCITT CRC 16 SUM 2 bytes SUM1 2 bytes and SUM2 2 bytes BIN indicates binary data 2 bytes and ASCII indicates ASCII data 4 bytes 5 Left click the OK Button to accept the settings or the Cancel Button to leave the settings unchanged The display in the Check Code Field will be as shown below
247. e interrupt notification mode is only available with the Serial Communications Board CPU Unit PMSU External devices m D0000 PMCR Send data r instruction conversion process process lt p lt gt External 1 3 device D1000 process Board Received interrupt data conversion process process lt Pq gt lt gt lt gt 7 6 5 4 The communications response time is the total time from 1 to 7 in the above figure 187 Communications Response Time Performance Section 4 8 ee Time Required PMCR instruction process time Send data conversion process time Send data transmission time External device process time Received data transmission time Received data conversion process time Board interrupt process time 15 ms two cycle time maximum Depends on the number of conversion bytes Number of data characters x one character bit transmission rate Depends on the external device process Number of data characters x one character bit transmission rate Depends on the number of conversion bytes About 50 us 0 to 2 ms see note The time from the start of PMCR instruction to the end of the data transfer to the Board The time required for the send data conversion based on the specified conversion mode which finishes at the start of data sending to the external device The time required for the send data tran
248. e message to be deleted either from the send mes sage list or the receive message list More than one message can be se lected by pressing the Shift Key and selecting another message to extend the selection or by pressing the Ctrl Key and selecting another message to add to the selection 2 Left click the Delete Icon on the toolbar or press the Delete Key Another method is to right click and select Delete from the pop up menu Delete can also be selected from the Edit Menu Alternatively left click the Cut Button on the toolbar or press the Ctrl X Keys Right click to display a pop up menu and then select Delete in the pop up menu Left click the Paste Icon from the toolbar or press the Ctrl V Keys to re trieve the last delete action using the Cut operation The pasted message will be positioned at the end of the corresponding message list Note Once a message has been deleted it cannot be recovered 9 3 5 Displaying the Matrix within the Protocol 256 Use the same procedure as described in 9 3 1 Displaying Messages within the Protocol Message and Matrix Editing Section 9 3 9 3 6 Displaying the Matrix Case within the Matrix St i h i h 1 2 3 Use the following procedure to display the matrix case within the matrix 1 Left click the protocol list in the project workspace to display all the proto cols in the project window 2 Left click the Protocol Icon that contains the matrix list 3 Double click t
249. e number and press the Enter Key It is possible to select and overwrite a portion of the current sequence number The new sequence number must be within the Start Sequence and End Sequence and also different from those currently used 7 2 4 Copying Pasting Sequences Sequences can be copied between protocols or within a protocol Use the fol lowing procedure to copy a sequence 1 2 3 1 Select a sequence to be copied More than one sequence can be selected by pressing the Shift Key and selecting another sequence to extend the selection or by pressing the Ctrl Key and selecting another sequence to add to the selection 2 Select the Copy Icon from the toolbar or press the Ctrl C Keys Alterna tively right click to display the pop up menu and select Copy from the menu It can also be selected from the Edit Menu 3 Select a protocol or display the sequence list in the project window where the copied sequence is pasted 4 Select the Paste Icon from the toolbar or press Ctrl V Keys Alternatively right click to display the pop up menu and select Paste from the menu It can also be selected from the Edit Menu The pasted sequences inherit the sequence numbers that existed before being copied If the sequence number already exists or if the number is outside the sequence number range the next available sequence number will be newly given to the pasted sequence 7 2 5 Deleting Sequences Use the following procedure to delete a sequence
250. e required for the received data transfer to I O memory Note Although the data conversion process times of 2 and 6 vary according to the PLC operation status the maximum values can roughly be estimated by the following calculation formula 2 The send data conversion process time 10 ms one byte conversion time x number of conversion bytes Reverse conversion 5 us ASCII reverse conversion 4 us hexadecimal reverse conversion 7 us One byte conversion time No conversion 1 us reverse conversion 5 us ASCII conversion 10 us ASCII reverse conversion 4 us hexadecimal con version 7 us hexadecimal reverse conversion 7 us 6 The receive data conversion process time 2 ms one byte conversion time x number of conversion bytes One byte conversion time No conversion 1 us reverse conversion 4 us ASCII conversion 8 us ASCII reverse conversion 9 us hexadecimal conver sion 17 us hexadecimal reverse conversion 17 us Communications Response Time Performance Section 4 8 e Communications Response Time Using the Direct Addressing Illustrated below is the data flow when the direct addressing is used CPU Unit PMSU External devices PMCR instruction CN PMCR 0110 process 0000 7 0000 Send data conversion Request process _ _ data I O Send data 5 memory notification lt gt 4 gt lt gt 2 3 4 External Repeat 2 and 3
251. eceive execution max Half duplex Receives when not executing send process Full duplex Receives all data during sequence execution 1 Comparison process Actually received message Error code Comparison Goes to error process if unmatched Set expected message Error code Note Possible to have several 15 max expected mes sages matrix 2 Variable process Conversion to the format designated by the variable e No conversion e ASCII Hexadecimal conversion Hexadecimal ASCII conversion Data written to 1 O memory designated variable 3 Write process Note The Write Timing will depend on the setting for the response type Scan mode interrupt mode in sequence attributes only if With Without Response Writ ing is set to Yes in the step attributes when the oper ands are set 4 Notification to the CPU Unit Completion of the sequence and Write notified by the Pro tocol Macro Execution Flag Note When the operands are set and the response type is set to interrupt mode in sequence attributes designation will be possible with the interrupt process 63 Protocol Macro Outline Send amp Receive Process Send amp Receive Command Section 3 1 The receive Receive process will start approximately 60 us after the send process is completed In general when communications commands are sent as send messages and responses are received as receive messages Send amp Receive will be exe
252. eceive command is set if a retry factor among the above error factors occurs refer to the table of error factors on the following page the system will execute the Send amp Receive command repeat edly If this error factor still remains after the designated number of retry repe titions the system will go to the error process When retrying the system will send data regardless of the send wait time Ts xecuted to the number of times of the retry count Send amp Receive Error occurred N Normal end Abnormal end Error process Next process Setting with the CX Protocol Note To execute the retry process as an error process it is necessary to set the steps as follows As seen in the following the description of the error process is more complicated than using Send amp Receive commands and designating the retry count Example Retrying the same process 3 times Next process Error process Step 00 Retry count 0 Goto 01 or Next Step 01 Same content as step 00 Goto 02 or Next Step 02 Same content as step 00 91 Step Attributes Section 3 3 Note When both the repeat counter N and the retry count is set the counter N will not be updated until the system executes the steps for the number of times of the retry count The counter N will be updated when the retry factor disap pears or the system has executed the steps for the number of times of the retry count Executed to the number of ti
253. eceive message If there is a terminator designation data up to the terminator will be received as the receive message and a comparison will be made to check that the length of this message matches the value for the length in the expected mes sage Even if there is no designation for the header it is possible to take the mes sage item out of the receive buffer if the length or the terminator is designated and process it as the receive message Length designation for the CS CJ operates in the following way If the received message is lt h gt lt Il gt W 1 the data size of W 1 will be determined by the value of lt I gt in the expected message following lt h gt and the data will be received as the receive message A comparison error may occur as the result of an ASCII conversion error for lt l gt If the received message is lt h gt lt l gt W 1 lt t gt and the range between lt h gt and lt t gt has been recognized as the receive message a comparison will be made between the value of lt l gt in the expected message and the data size of the actually received W 1 A comparison error or a data size comparison error may occur as the result of an ASCII conversion error for lt l gt Receive buffer Message code Reception Example If the data part is 100 bytes the following will be received as the receive message 100 bytes oo 3 4 5 Data Example At sending designate data to be sen
254. eceived data to the I O memory area designated by the third operand to all steps type for C200HX HG HE or fourth operand for CS CJ of the PMCR instruction Either the scan mode or interrupt mode can be designated Receive wait receive finish or send finish can be monitored One of X on X off flow or RTS CTS flow delimiter control contention control or modem control can be designated Monitoring time for Setup range 0 01 to 0 99 s 0 1 to 9 9 s 1 to 99 s or 1 to 99 minutes sending receiving Link word Data are exchanged between the PLC s CPU Unit and the PMSU when the CPU Unit is doing a Peripheral service Two areas for sending data and two areas for receiving data Step Command Send Receive or Send amp Receive Wait Flush DTR ON Open or DTR OFF Close Wait Flush DTR ON and DTR OFF are only for the CS CJ protocol macro Repeat 1 to 255 times counter Retry count O to 9 Can be designated only for Send amp Receive command Send wait 0 01 to 0 99 s 0 1 to 9 9 s 1 to 99 s or 1 to 99 minutes time Can be designated only for Send or Send amp Receive command Specifies whether to store the receive message after data receiving is completed when storing received data to the area designated by the third operand for C2O00HX HG HE or content With Without response writing operand addressing Next process Specifies the next process as follows when the step ends normally End end the sequence
255. ection 3 8 3 Set the E5ZE Temperature Controller Set the unit number to 0 and baud rate to 9 600 bps Switch Unit Used for setting the Unit number Set to 0 INPUT Switch Function sae alee Used for setting TETTI the switch function FUNCTION Hardware mode Not used Must be OFF Temperature unit C or F Operation mode when the power is ON Connection of E5ZD SDL Setting Indicator Memory bank designation method 1 ON 2 OFF Set to 9600 bps Note After changing the DIP switch s setting turn OFF and ON the power supply once 3 8 3 Creating Ladder Programs The protocol is executed by the PMCR instruction of the PLC For details about the related auxiliary area and allocated data areas refer to page 134 PMCR Instruction Specifications e Function Calls the send receive sequence number registered in the Serial Communications Board and by executing the send receive sequence of that number sends data to or receives data from a general purpose external device via port 1 or 2 of the Serial Communications Board e Meaning of operands C Control data 15 12 11 87 43 0 15 0 C1 C2 Destination Unit address Send receive sequence Serial Communications Unit Unit No 10 hexadecimal No 000 to 03E7 Serial Communications Board E1 hexadecimal hexadecimal 0 to 999 Serial port number Physical port 1 Hexadecimal port 1 2 Hexadecimal port 2 Communications
256. ed each port Tfs Send fin CIO CIO n 18 14 Exceeded ish monitoring 1908 1918 Normal time Exceeded each port 11 5 Max No of CIO CIO n 18 08to None No of retries Retries each 1908 1918 O0 to 9 O to 9 hexa port decimal Communica CIO CIO n 18 1 1 Communica tions error 1908 1918 tions error Communica 2 Normal tions port error 3 10 2 Description of Each Area Type Address System PMSU Watchdog CS CuJ CS CJ and C200HX HG HE Set to When When error Time Error Board A424 1 when the PMSU is damaged error power is bit 00 Firmly re secure the PMSU If the occurs turned ON Unit A417 error does not cancel even after again bits 00 to 15 C200HX HG HE CIO 268 bit 00 Inner Bus Error CS A424 bitO1 CS Board only Set to 1 when an When When Board only Inner Bus error occurs Firmly re error power is secure the PMSU If the error does occurs turned ON not cancel even after installing the again PMSU on another CPU Unit replace the PMSU Unit replace the PMSU 140 Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas Section 3 10 Type Address Tmin Initial ization System Port Recognition C200HX HG HE C200HX HG HE only Set to 1 ON When error Error CIO 268 bit 01 when a communications port error power is has occurred Replace the PMSU turned ON again Protocol Data CS CuJ CS CJ Set to 1 ON when an error Error Board CIO 1901 is detected in the Protocol data Unit n
257. ed select the PMSU Trace Port Error Messages in Output Window Error Warning in Output Window E1001 Total Link Channels out of range The Link Channel setting is invalid E1005 No data in message A message contains no data E1006 Check code lt c gt after Terminator lt t gt not supported The target unit does not support message data that on this unit includes a Check Code lt c gt after a Terminator lt t gt E1007 Check code lt c gt LRC not supported on this unit The target unit does not support message data that includes a LRC Check Code lt c gt E1008 Check code lt c gt CCITT not supported on this unit The target unit does not support message data that includes a CCITT Check Code lt c gt E1009 Check code lt c gt CRC16 not supported on this unit The target unit does not support message data that includes a CRC16 Check Code lt c gt E1010 Check code lt c gt SUM 1 byte not supported on The target unit does not support message data that this unit includes a SUM 1 byte Check Code lt c gt E1011 Check code lt c gt SUM 2 bytes not supported on The target unit does not support message data that this unit includes a SUM 2 byte Check Code lt c gt E1012 Check code lt c gt SUM2 1 byte not supported on The target unit does not support message data that this unit includes a SUM2 1 byte Check Code lt c gt 335 Troubleshooting Section 14 ErroriWarning in Outp
258. ed after each message creation by designat ing the message name Procedure 7 The Ladder Program Creation 32 1 2 3 1 Allocates function code for the PMCR instruction 1 Sets SW4 of the CPU Unit to ON enables the application commands setup 2 Allocates function code for the PMCR instruction through a Program ming Device for the CPU Unit Note If your PLC is the C200HL CPULJL_I ZE function code 260 will be as signed to the PMCR instruction by default 2 Describes the PMCR instruction Example Protocol Macro iti Execution Flag Input condition 28908 Sequence No 100 is executed using the Port A Send data first word Receive data storage first word FAL 06 001 ER Flag 25503 When the input condition is set to ON and the Protocol Macro Execution Flag 28908 port A is set to OFF the communications sequence No 100 registered on the PMSU will be called to send and receive data via port A of the PMSU The send data will be sent out from the next DM 00001 according to the number of effective words number of words including DM 0000 designat ed by DM 0000 Specifications Section 1 12 DM0000 Number of effective words How many words including DM 0000 are effective DM0001 Designated number at DM 0000 Effective of send data are read beginning words from DM 0001 The receive data is stored in the successive words beginning from DM 0011 for the number of effective words actually s
259. ed and com munications errors occur from time to time Both RDY and ERC ERR ALM flash RDY is lit and ERC ERR ALM flashes information Data is received according to the transmission line trace of the CX Protocol However the protocol macro does not recog nize data recep tion Responses from the destination device are occa sionally not received How ever response is received when retry processing is conducted Transmission error occurs occasionally Bit 15 transmission error in the allocated data area n 8 n 18 turns ON One of bits 0 to 14 errors turns ON Bit 0O protocol data error in the allocated data area n 1 is ON Bits 00 to 03 port operation error code in the allo cated data area n 9 n 19 are not set to 0 hexadeci mal Received data is discarded during the time lag between the data transmission com pletion and the Send processing completion because the response from the destination device was received too early under the half duplex setting Data sending tim ing is too early for the destination device to receive data Cable connection is faulty Terminating resis tance on RS 422A 485 port is not set properly Adapter NT ALOO1 etc wiring is faulty or its terminating resistance setting is wrong Communications error frequently occurs due to noise Error in the proto col macro data SUM value Protocol macro dete
260. ed was found E g There was a header after the terminator CS CJ For the Serial Communications Board when an error code 3 or 4 is recorded A42411 Protocol Macro Syntax Error will turn ON 1 the CPU Unit ERR ALM indicator will flash and a continuous error will be generated For the Serial Communications Unit the ERC indicator will flash All other error codes are not used When an error occurs the error code will be stored until the next sequence starts The error will be cleared when either the STUP instruction is executed the PMSU is restarted or the next sequence is executed Note To reset the cause of a continuous error when an error code 3 or 4 is gener ated for the Serial Communications Board the error display will be cleared after one of the following operations is performed e The next sequence is executed e The STUP instruction is executed e Restart e The CPU Unit is set to PROGRAM mode 147 Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas Section 3 10 C200HX HG HE When error codes 1 2 3 or 4 are recorded CIO 268 bits 11 12 will turn ON 1 PMCR execution error the CPU Unit ERR indicator will flash and a continu ous error will be generated When an error occurs the error code will be stored until the next sequence starts The error will be cleared when either the STUP instruction is executed the PMSU is restarted or the next sequence is executed After removing the cause of the error it will al
261. ed with a variable and the first word address is operand designated If it is set to Yes the data in the receive buffer will be written into the I O mem ory according to the response type designated in the sequence attribute scan notification interrupt notification fixed number or interrupt notification receive case number and a notification of data reception will be issued to the CPU Unit Response YES Response 3 3 9 Next Process Error Process Goto Next End Abort Setting with the CX Protocol Mest Process When a step is normally or abnormally terminated set which step control it will be shifted to When a matrix is designated as a receive message the above setting is invalid and the next process designated with the matrix is valid After execution of the step shift to the designated step 0 to 15 After execution of the step shift to the next 1 step After execution of the step terminate the entire sequence including the step If an error factor occurs during execution of the step interrupt the execution of the step and terminate the entire sequence including the step Error Process Ei Ea Cancel Cancel 93 Step Attributes Section 3 3 When one of the following error factors occurs the step ends abnormally and then the system goes to the appropriate error process Y To be repeated Error factor N Next process Error process Command type Wh
262. edure 1 PMSU Setup Setting the Serial Communications Board Setting the Serial Communications Unit for Serial Communications Boards with Front rotary switch setting RS 422A 485 Unit No setting switch Terminating resistance ON OFF switch 2 wire 4 wire Selection switch Set the unit No in a range from 0 to F 0 to 15 Procedure 2 PMSU Mounting Mounting the Serial Communications Board Mounting the Serial Communications Unit 26 Basic Procedure of the Protocol Macro Usage Section 1 11 Procedure 3 Connection with External Devices CS1W SCU21 V1 Serial Communications Unit CS1W SCB41 V1 Serial Communications Board CPU Unit 1 Port 1 RS 232C E Port 2 l RS 422A 485 B RS 232C RS 232C General purpose external device General purpose external device General purpose General purpose General purpose external device external device external device Note For connector pin arrangements and connection methods refer to the CS CJ Series Serial Communications Boards Unit Operation Manual W336 and other relevant manuals for general purpose external devices Procedure 4 Initial Setting 1 2 3 1 For Connecting Cables between the PLC and the CX Protocol refer to 1 4 System Configuration 2 PLC Setup of the CPU Unit and the PMSU PLC Setup for Connecting the PLC to the CX Protocol Perform the following setups a and b The communications conditions designated in a and b must be coherent a Using the CX Protocol
263. ee ee eee a l l BF Ze 22 BF OBB enews ews Note 1 A send message created with a protocol macro will perform settings for messages that are actually sent 2 Areceive message created with protocol macro will set an expected mes sage for comparison with messages that are actually received send ST sone Ca ene Sets message being sent Message received Receive Receive 4 Nr ema Sets expected message for comparison 16 Protocol Macro Structure Section 1 6 1 5 2 Standard System Protocol Data exchange protocols called standard system protocols for OMRON Units Temperature Controllers Panel Meters Bar Code Readers Modems etc have been installed into the PMSU By setting the prescribed receive send data and executing the PMCR instruction therefore data exchange can be easily performed with OMRON Units 1 6 Protocol Macro Structure The protocol consists of a communications sequence sequence in short which is an independent process for the general purpose external device for example reading a process variable from a Temperature Controller One sequence consists composed of some steps each of which is composed of a Send Receive or Send amp Receive command send receive message branch or end according to the result of the process For example the sequence to read a process value from the temperature con troller sends to the controller a send message a string containing the re
264. eives receive message data from the fourth Setting the wildcard operand for CS CJ in the data part The or the third operand system receives all for C200HX HG HE the messages of the PMCR instruc without checking the tion 1 to store it received data with conversion to However if x is a hexadecimal form linear expression regardless of the including N this length setting is not possible 103 Communication Message Attributes How to set X and Y Specification How set I O Word Chan Operand R z read nel read designa _ tion First word linear expression including N Read option The content of the low order byte of the first word yN X word is read as Link a binary value and word handled as a byte Direct 104 R 1 Set in receive data Any receive data is received by the number of bytes of the contents word 1 word designated using the third oper and for CS CJ or the second operand for C200HX HG HE R 1 R Q1 Set in send data Data is sent by the number of bytes of the contents of the first word at the link word output area 1 from word 1 word designated with the third operand for CS CJ or the sec ond operand for C200HX HG HE of a PMCR instruction R DM0000 R DM0100 Set in send data Data starting from DMO0000 and corresponding to the number of bytes set in DMO100 is sent Section 3 4 Send Receive Aadress
265. elated sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given xiii XIV Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install and or operate the CX Protocol Be sure to read the precautions provided in the following section Section 1 Introduction outlines the Protocol Macro function and the CX Protocol Section 2 Environment nstalling Uninstalling Starting Editing outlines the functions of CX Proto col and describes the operating environment installation procedure and the setting of the usage envi ronment Section 3 Protocol Macro describes details of the protocol macro functions Section 4 Using the Protocol Macro Function describes various precautions in using the protocol macro function Section 5 Object Creation describes how to create objects such as projects protocols sequences steps messages and matrices Section 6 Project and Protocol Editing describes details of the editing of projects and protocols Section 7 Sequence Setting and Editing describes details of the setting and editing of sequences Section 8 Step Setting and Editing describes details of the setting and editing of steps Section 9 Setting and Editing Messages and Matrix Lists describes details of the setting and edit ing of messages and matrix lists Section 10 Communications PLC Setup and Online Connections describes details of the commu nications settings and online con
266. emory immediately after it is converted according to the designated method When all the data has been written into the I O memory an interrupt task number external interrupt task for the CS or a subroutine number for the C200HX HG HE will be desig nated and the interrupt task will be performed for the CPU Unit Also when all the data has been written into the I O memory and when the sequence has terminated the Protocol Macro Execution Flag will be turned OFF Interrupt process for the CPU Unit will take place when the notification is received The received data will remain in the receive buffer without perform ing any write process for the CPU Unit The Protocol Macro Execution Flag will be turned OFF after the sequence has terminated Sequence Attributes Common to All Steps Section 3 2 CPU Unit Protocol Macro Note Note When response writing is set to Yes under step attribute setting When response writing is set to No under step attribute setting I O memory Execution Flag ra Serial Communications Board or Communications Board Fixed interrupt task Interrupt program No Process Receive buffer Received data After Receive Half duplex Other than send process writing process Full duplex During sequence execution 4 Conversion Data is written immediately after conversion Turns OFF when writing is fin ished and sequence has termi nated With the CS series Se
267. en retry is Receive Send amp designated Receive The Message that was received is not the same as the expected receive Step is retried message Monitoring time expired The data or header are not received within receive wait monitoring time Data receiving is not finished within receive finish monitoring time Data sending is not finished within send finish monitoring time A transmission error occurs during data receiving For the CS CJ an overrun framing parity error occurs for the transmis sion error occurrence status Words 8 19 bits 02 to 04 are set to ON For the C200HX HG HE the Communication Error Flag 28304 or 28312 is set to ON An error is detected in error check code lo O Received data size exceeds the area for the designated area during the Step is not writing of data to or reading of data from the CPU Unit retried For the CS CJ data read write area error error code 3 is stored in the error code bits 00 to 03 indicating the port operating status words 9 19 of the protocol For the C200HX HG HE data read write are error error code 3 is stored in the error code Word 256 bits 8 to 11 port A and bits 12 to 15 port B Note In case of the Wait Flush Open or Close command the error will not occur during execution 94 Communication Message Attributes Section 3 4 3 4 Communication Message Attributes The communication message contains s
268. ence was com pleted normally by leaving the setting at End or for an error Abort after the sequence has been completed 1 Sequence End Completion 0 Sequence End not Completed 5 When the trace function is executed from CX Protocol the CPU Unit uses the Shot Trace Start Stop Flag and the Continuous Trace Start Stop Flag for the Serial Communications Board and Unit Do not create ladder pro grams which set these flags to ON 6 Set the Wait Release Flag in the ladder program to turn from OFF to ON When the Force Set Key on the Programming Console is used the flag will be only ON while the key is being pressed so it will not be possible to set the protocol macro function from ON to OFF clear from the Programming Console 7 When an error in bits 00 to 14 cause an error in the Protocol Macro the Transmission Error Generated Flag bit 15 will turn ON 1 Code Error contents Protocol macro execution er No error error Executed No protocol macro function eed ___ executed C200HX HG HE only Sequence number error Not executed The sequence number designated in the PMCR instruction does not exist in the PMSU Data write read area exceeded error Execute aborted after error When data was written to or read from Occurs the CPU Unit data exceeded the range of the designated data area Protocol Macro Error Codes Protocol data syntax error During Protocol Macro execution a code which could not be execut
269. ength Stop bit Parity 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit Even initial value 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit Odd 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit Without 1 bit 7 bits 2 bits Even 1 bit 7 bits 2 bits Odd 1 bit 7 bits 2 bits Without 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit Even 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit Odd 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit Without 1 bit 8 bits 2 bits Even 10 1 bit 8 bits 2 bits Odd 11 1 bit 8 bits 2 bits Without 6652 00 to 15 Peripheral port send delay settings host link 0000 initial value to 9999 units 10ms ee 6653 00 to 07 Unit number settings for peripheral port host link mode 00 initial value to 31 unit number 358 PLC Setup and PMSU Settings Communications Board Settings Settings Related to Port B Word number Port B communications conditions standard format set DM 6550 00 to 03 04 to 07 08 to 11 12 to 15 DM 6551 00 to 07 08 to 15 Host link No procedure Protocol macro Host link No procedure 1 1 link 1 1 link Master NT link 1 N All modes Host link No procedure Protocol macro Host link No procedure Protocol macro tings 0 Standard settings initial values Start bit 1 bit Data length 7 bits Parity even Stop bit 2 bits Baud rate 9 600bps 01 Set separately DM 6551 00 to 15 enabled CTS control enable disable settings 0 Without initial value 1 With Port B 1 1 link area 0 LROO to 63 initial value 1 LROO to 31 2 LROO to 15 Maximum PT unit number for port B NT link 1 N 1 to 7 BCD
270. er It converts the process value data to hexadecimal codes and store them in I O memory It uses the repeat counter to switch the PLC area sends the read command for the next process value until eight words of process values are read and stored in the PLC areas Abnormal According to a set retry count three times the same step is repeatedly exe cuted up to three times automatically when any of the following errors occurs e The send finish monitoring time Tfs the receive wait monitoring time Tr or the receive finish monitoring time Tfr has expired e A receiving communication error occurred For CS CJ port 1 n 8 bit 15 port 2 n 18 bit 15 is ON n 1 900 board 1 500 25xUnit No unit For C200HX HG HE port A ClO28304 or port B 28312 is ON e Wrong receive message e An error in the error check code 118 Example of Communications Sequence Section 3 7 Step No 00 Repeat Command Retry count Send wait Send mes Receive With Without Next pro Error pro counter time sage message nee writ cess cess o RSET 008 Send amp Refer to Refer to Receive page 119 page 120 Send Mes Receive sage Cre Message j Creation 3 7 3 Send and Receive Messages Creation The system can read the PV process variable of the designated word on the temperature controller E5ZE by sending the RXONOO N is the word num ber of the controller command Only one word of data can be read in one time
271. erted or if it needs to be modified left click the Edit Button to display the Length lt I gt Dialog Box and then enter or edit the length b Create or insert data items of a message in the Message Data Field Using the lt lt or gt gt Button move the cursor to a place where data items are to be inserted e Select one of the items from the drop down list in the Message Data Field Message Data Constant Hex Constant Hex Constant ASCII Constant Coce Variable e When either the Constant Hex or Constant Code is selected left click the Edit Button to display the HEX Entry or Code Entry Dialog Box Using the dialog box enter data and left click the Insert to insert hexadecimal numbers or code in the message Note For the input methods refer to the previous descriptions for the Header lt h gt In the Message Data Field up to 48 units of hexadeci mal can be input e When ASCII is selected input ASCII characters in the right field and then left click the Insert Button to insert the data in the message e When Variable is selected left click the Edit Button to display the Mes sage Variable Dialog Box Left click the Insert Button to insert the variable in the message For the input methods refer to the previous descriptions for the address lt a gt Note Message data cannot be inserted before the header or after the terminator Check Code and Length If the check code or length is designated for a message
272. essage other than the receive messages designated in the matrix is received Note The attribute by which the system compares the expected value with the actu ally received value in the matrix is not of data but of messages If only other is set a protocol data syntax error error code 4 will occur Receive expected message Received message Receive lt EE SEPS Goto Next lt a gt Address lt C gt Error check code lt t gt Terminator o e 2 gpm Goto Next End Abort Other must be set Note Maximum of 16 cases are possible including Other 112 Creating Matrices Note Section 3 5 Set the format for the messages in the matrix to be the same for all cases The matrix opens up messages under the frame configuration designated in case number 00 and performs a comparison with all the cases in order from case number 00 to case number 15 Actually received message Receive aa Case No 00 Note Example Opens up message with case number 00 as standard Case No 00 a Comparison Case No 01 lt n gt lt a gt Data lt c gt lt t gt p15 max Case No 14 Therefore if there are differences in message formats between cases because messages are opened up using the frame configuration of case number 00 comparison results for frames with a different message format from case number 00 will register a non match irrespective of the actuall
273. essages and storage of receive messages is performed using the link word area Reading Variables Example R 01 2 2 bytes will be read from link word output area O1 Writing Variables Example W 11 2 2 bytes will be written from link word input area l1 68 Protocol Macro Outline Section 3 1 Related Settings Designation Send receive message Sequence shared for steps method Operand Integrate variables into address With Without Response Writing Response type when designation or data when operand designated operand designated variables variables are in the receive are in the receive message message Variable setting for number of iterations setting with the repeat counter Direct designa Integrate variables into address Variable setting for number of tion or data iterations setting with the repeat counter Link word desig Integrate variables into address Variable setting for number of Link word nation or data iterations setting with the repeat counter Note Receive Process with Operand designated Variables When operand designated variables are in the receive message the receive process will be performed as shown below When the receive process is executed data in the receive buffer will be read and using that data as the receive message the following process will be per formed Response Response type for sequence attributes Write for step attributes Scan notification Interrupt notifi
274. fect will occur in the system before changing the operating mode of the CPU Unit Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation N Caution Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before transferring the communications port A B settings to the Protocol Macro Support Unit PMSU Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation 10 7 2 Reading Communications Port Setting Data from PLC 1 2 3 Note Use the following procedure to read the data on the communications port set tings in the PMSU from the PLC Connect the personal computer to the PLC for online communications Set the PLC to PROGRAM mode Left click the PMSU Icon for the corresponding communications port or left click the desired communications port If a PMSU Icon is selected data on the settings of both communications ports will be read If a communica tions port is selected the settings in the corresponding communications port will be read Left click the Upload Communications Port Setting Icon from the tool bar or right click and select Upload Communications Port Setting from the pop up menu Alternatively select Upload Communications Port Setting from the PLC Menu after selecting the communications port On completion of the transfer the message Communications port set tings upload completed will be displayed Left click the OK Button Use the above procedures to read and write data from and to the following areas of the CPU Unit
275. file is Connection has failed Reboot the computer and try again invalid cannot proceed The PLC must be in PRO GRAM mode to download the Protocol to the PMSU 333 Troubleshooting Section 14 rrerwessaget5ympiom Cause ato The PMSU Protocol password The protocol in the PMSU has a To upload the protocol from the PMSU or to has not been correctly entered password assigned to it An incorrect download a new protocol to the PMSU 334 The PMSU transfer cannot pro password has been entered type in the correct password ceed The PMSU contains no protocol Uploading a protocol list from a Download protocols to the PMSU data PMSU that contains no protocols The PMSU does not support The selected PMSU does not support Try a different PMSU the PMCR instruction the Protocol Macro function The PMSU has a Sum Check The selected PMSU has a sum check Download protocols to PMSU to clear sum Error The transfer cannot pro error The upload of protocols or pro check error and try again ceed tocol list cannot proceed The PMSU has a Sum Check The selected PMSU has a sum check Proceed with the download to clear the Error The Protocol download will proceed anyway The PMSU protocol password The user cancelled the password Retry the operation and enter the correct has not been entered The entry password PMSU transfer cannot proceed The Unit Number must be The Unit Number specified is out of Enter
276. for an item element on the screen Searching by Keyword Left click the Index Tab in the Help Topics CX Protocol help Dialog Box and display the desired screen by making a keyword search Left click the Help Tab at the bottom of the project workspace or select Help topics from the Help Menu to display a help item in the project workspace Double click the Book Icon to display help items in the lower hierarchy and then left click a desired item to display a help screen Select one of the elements displayed on the screen to display a corresponding help screen Press the Help Icon on the toolbar or the F1 Key 1 Left click the Help Icon on the toolbar The cursor pointer will change to one with a question mark Move the cursor to an item Icon or object dis played on the screen and left click the mouse button Alternatively select an item displayed on the screen and press the F1 Key 2 A help screen associated with the selected element will be displayed Displayed elements include icons on the toolbar projects protocols devic es and status bars 1 Left click the Help Topics Button in the Help screen 2 The Help Topics CX Protocol help Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Left click the Index Tab and enter some starting characters of a term to be searched into the top text field 4 The top topic that includes the entered keyword will be highlighted and dis played in the list box Depending on the topic another search dialog
277. for the normal sequence termination and the Abort is set for the error termination as follows either the normal sequence termination or the error termination can be identified by the Sequence End Termination Flag and the Sequence Abort Termination Flag Ladder Programming Method Section 4 4 Example 1 Example 2 Sequence Sequence Step No 00 Step No 00 Error Sequence error termination Error Sequence error termination Y Step No 02 Sequence normal termination Error Sequence normal termination End End End Example Port 1 of the Serial Communications Board Sequence Normal Termination Sequence Normal Termination Protocol Macro 1 Protocol Macro Execution Flag Execution Flag 190915 0 190915 Sequence Sequence Sequence execution termination restart J Sequence error termination Sequence Sequence Sequence execution termination restart Sequence End Sequence End 1 enc r Termination Flag Termination Flag 190911 0 190911 y a Step Error Proces 1 Step Error Proces sing Execution sing Execution en LE Flag 190914 0 ____ Flag 190914 0 Sequence Error Termination Sequence Error Termination Protocol Macro 1 Protocol Macro Execution Flag a ee ee ee Execution Flag 190915 h i 190915 0 Sequence Sequence Sequence execution termination restart 1 1 Sequence Abort e S ee ee Sequence Abort Termination Flag 0 Termination Flag 0 190910 19091
278. function C200HW COMO06 E RS 232C port x 1 RS 422A 485 port x 1 C200HW COMO6 EV1 O0 O With the protocol macro function Note 1 The enhanced functions are as follows e SUM2 2 s complement of SUM and CRC 16 are added as error check codes e Repeat counter N current value Sequence End Finish Flag and Se quence Abort Finish Flag are added to the auxiliary area e A check code can be located behind a terminator in messages e Swap between high byte and low byte can be designated for error check codes Supported PLC Models and Personal Computers Section 1 3 2 Mounting the Communications Board on the CPU Unit meee p CPU Unit Communications Board E Caution in Using Communications Board for SYSMAC Alpha When using Communications Board for SYSMAC Alpha with either of the communications ports set to NT link 1 N you cannot transfer protocol data to the other port by using CX Protocol When you want to transfer protocol data to the Communications Board set its communications port to any of the settings other than NT link 1 N before transfer and set it to NT link 1 N after transfer before using the Communica tions Board CQM1H Product name Installation Serial communications ports Serial Communications Installed in the CPU Unit ae H SCB41 RS 232C port x 1 RS 422A 485 port x 1 Boards CQM1H CPU Unit POWER ERR ALM l 183456 m Eru CQM1H Serial Communications Board E Cauti
279. g after writing all the received data into the I O mem ory and after the sequence has terminated Received data remains in the receive buffer without performing any process ing for the CPU Unit Turns OFF the PMCR Instruction Execution Flag after the sequence has terminated Writes the data in the receive buffer into the I O memory when the data is scanned see note for the CPU Unit after conversion CPU Unit PMSU Receive buffer Receive data Half duplex Other than send process Full duplex During sequence execution Receive process es Conversion Data is written during scanning see note Turns OFF when writing is fin ished and sequence has termi nated Protocol Macro Execution Flag With the scan notification method write timing will vary as shown below depending on the PMSU model Serial Communications CS CJ Cyclic Written when I O is refreshed Unit for the CPU Bus Unit Written when I O is refreshed for the CPU Inner Board C200HX HG HE _ Cyclic Written when servicing is performed for the Communi cations Board 2 Interrupt Notification Method Fixed Number PLC Serial Communications Board Communications Board With the CS this method is applicable to the Serial Communications Board and with the C200HX HG HE it is applicable only to the Communications Board It cannot be used for the Serial Communications Unit for the CS Cu Writes the data in the receive buffer into the I O m
280. g auxiliary area and data areas on the CPU Unit and can be used from the ladder program 3 10 1 Special Auxiliary and Allocated Areas The following table provides a list of the protocol macro related bits for the CS CJ Serial Communications Board Unit and the C200HX HG HE Communica tions Board 134 Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas Section 3 10 n 1500 25 x Unit No For the Serial Communications Unit only CS Serial CS CJ Serial C200HX HG HE Contents Communications Board Communications Unit Communications Board System A417 CPU 00 to 15 CIO 268 Error error Bus Unit For Unit Communi Normal Timer Error Error No No 0 to 15 cations Flag See note Board error Inner Bus details area Error Error Port System Normal recognition error error FAL9C Protocol A424 error Error Data Error Normal Protocol data checksum CIO 1901 Error error due to Nona memory damage Protocol A424 10 Error Macro Normal Execution Error At port 2 or B Protocol Error Macro Normal Execution Error At port 1 or A 13 to 15 Error 15 System 0 Normal setting error 14 Error at n 6 n 16 port A 13 Error at port B Note A40207 CPU Bus Unit Error Flag is the representative bit CS Serial CS CJ Serial Com C200HX HG HE Communica Contents Communica Communica mon tions Board tions Board tions Unit ss Allocation Area Area Special Auxiliary Area Auxiliary
281. gnal word definitions altered Page xi Models added W414 deleted and W425 changed Page xii Paragraph and table added at top and three pages added after Page xiii Version information added Page 5 Version changed in top table line and software license agreement added to second table models and note added to third table and model versions updated in fourth table Page 6 Model number version updated in top table Pages 8 and 35 OS memory and hard disk drive specifications updated Page 10 Model versions updated in table Page 23 Model numbers and reference manual added at bottom of page Page 24 Only deleted Page 25 Note clarified and reference in first step of procedure corrected Page 26 SECTION 6 added to procedure 5 Page 28 Manual name corrected at bottom of page Page 29 References corrected at top and bottom of page Page 43 Section on installation replaced Page 47 Paragraph added after graphic Page 60 Product added to note Page 64 Reference at bottom of graphic added Page 75 CS1 changed to CS CJ Page 84 Note added Pages 97 271 273 274 PC corrected to PLC Page 129 Model version updated and graphic text corrected at top of page Page 135 Operation Manual added Page 168 Mode version updated at bottom of page Page 183 Manual name corrected and manual added at top of page Page 186 Only for CS1W SCB41 removed from Cause column Page 212 Text adde
282. gramming Method Section 4 4 e Example of the Ladder Program Creation The following example shows that the protocol Controller E5_K read Sequence No 000 Process value read is executed by the PMCR instruction and the read process value is transferred to another word at the normal completion of the sequence Communications Protocol Macro Input condition Port Enabled Flag Execution Flag 000000 A20200 191915 When the input condition 000000 is ON the Commu nications Port Enabled Flag A20200 is turned OFF and the Protocol Macro Execution Flag 191915 is turned OFF the sequence No 000 is executed at port 2 of Serial Communications Board and the process value is stored in D00201 When the Protocol Macro Execution Flag 191915 is 491915 cleared from ON to OFF 000100 changes from OFF DIFD 14 000100 to ON remains unchanged to be ON during 1 cycle Bae ey The process value received in D00201 is transferred 000100 191915 191914 to D00300 when 000100 is ON Protocol Macro Exe cution Flag 191915 is turned OFF and the Step Er ror Processing Execution Flag 191914 is turned OFF If the Step Error Processing Execution Flag 191914 is ON when 00100 is ON sequence termination the FAL 06 00 FAL instruction Failure Alarm instruction will be exe cuted as the sequence error termination Step Error Processing Execution Flag 191914 A21900 FAL 06 01 Ifthe Communications Port Execution Error
283. guration for details of the PLC Refer to 12 1 Tracing Transmission Lines for details of the trace Note Keep the following in mind before using a floppy disk e Be sure to copy the project files in the floppy disk to the hard disk before using the project files e Do not save project files directly to the floppy disk Save the project files in the hard disk first Then use an appropriate Windows program such as the Explorer to copy the project files to the floppy disk e Do not eject the floppy disk from the disk drive while the projects in the floppy disk are in use e If a message is displayed advising the user that the disk is full while over writing the projects it means that the floppy disk does not have adequate space and the project files cannot be saved If this happens be sure to save the project files in the hard disk 6 1 1 Adding Information to a Project Use the following procedure to add information to a project 1 2 3 1 Right click the project name in the project workspace and select Proper ties from the pop up menu The Properties Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Input the information on the project and left click the Apply Button Left click the Cancel Button to leave the settings unchanged 6 1 2 Opening a Project Use the following procedure to open an existing project m 1 2 3 1 Select Open from the File Menu or left click the Open Icon from the toolbar El or press the Ctrl O Keys 2 The Open Dialog Box wil
284. habetically ror essagerSymptom aus aon Uo Aborting compare PMSU is not The target PMSU for all the selected Set a suitable target PMSU valid for any of the selected pro protocols is not valid tocols Aborting download PMSU is The target specified within all Change the Target setting to a valid PMSU not valid for any of the selected selected protocols is not valid protocols Address is larger than the Effective starting address out of per Change the effective starting address so it selected data area size mitted range for a selected area is within range demonstrated by the error message Another application has locked Another application has locked Release the access rights of the PLC from access to the PLC access to the PLC or CX Protocol Another application Cannot complete the operation has not become the condition to gain Disconnect from the PLC and then connect the access rights of the PLC to the PLC again C Can not select O1 or O2 when The address O1 or O2 has been Select a different address for a Write chan variable type is write selected for a Write channel type nel type This is not permitted Cannot accept a negative num A negative number has been Enter a positive number ber in this field entered Cannot download Protocol s to The protocol data selected for down Ensure the Include Source Information the PMSU Too large load to the PMSU is in excess of the option is not set and
285. he Matrix List Icon to display the matrix in the project win dow 4 Double click the Matrix Icon to display each matrix case in the project win dow 9 3 7 Copying the Matrix Case 1 2 3 Use the following procedure to copy a matrix case in the matrix or between matrices 1 Left click the Matrix Case Icon to be copied More than one case can be selected by pressing the Shift Key and selecting another case to extend the selection or by pressing the Ctrl Key and selecting another case to add to the selection 2 Left click the Copy Icon on the toolbar or press the Ctrl C Keys Alterna tively right click to display a pop up menu and then select Copy in the pop up menu Copy can also be selected from the Edit Menu 3 Select a matrix case or display in the project window and designate the destination where the matrix case is to be pasted 4 Left click the Paste Icon on the toolbar or press the Ctrl V Keys Alterna tively right click to display a pop up menu and then select Paste in the pop up menu Paste can also be selected from the Edit Menu The pasted matrix case will be positioned at the end of the matrix case list except the case number 15 9 3 8 Moving the Matrix Case HINI T Move the selected matrix case to change the order of matrix cases Use the following icons to change the order of matrix cases The matrix case list belonging to the System protocols cannot be edited Select a matrix case and press the Up I
286. he X off code when the buffer is filled to 75 CS CJ 2 000 bytes C200HX HG HE 200 bytes and finishes receiving Note The above six items can be eliminated in the following cases Sending The header the address the length the error check code and the terminator can be eliminated Receiving If the terminator exists the header the address the length and the error check code can be eliminated If the data length is fixed the termina tor can be eliminated as well 95 Communication Message Attributes Section 3 4 3 4 1 CX Protocol Setup Screen Message name Note Header Terminator Check code E Length i Address Data Send Message Header lt h gt Terminator lt t gt Check code lt c gt __ Leneth lt I gt Address lt a gt ae SOOO 1 24001 BI H parity ito Byte ASCII RO 2 oe a SOBEL ar 2400 LRG H pariti Byte ASCII HRG 0 lt h gt tcade 1 a SDA ae 240D LRG H pariti Byte ASCII PHRA lt h gt tcabe 1 a SD2 1 g 2400 LRG H parito Byte ASCII HRGZ lt hot lt ade 1 For the details of setup method refer to the SECTION 9 Setting and Editing Messages and Matrix Lists Note After the creation of communication message users can create steps by des ignating the message name 3 4 2 Header Indicates the beginning of a message Only a constant can be designated Selects the message type ASCII hexadecimal control code and enters data Example Type ASCII data screen display 3 4 3
287. he ladder program is executed users can search for the cause of the error by checking various flags Refer to 3 10 Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas 174 Errors at the Protocol Execution Section 4 7 4 7 Errors at the Protocol Execution When an error listed below occurs take the appropriate action by referring to the following table Refer to the CS CJ Series Serial Communications Board Serial Communications Unit Operation Manual W336 and C200HX HG HE Communication Boards Operation Manual W304 4 7 1 CS CJ Note For the Serial Communications Board m DM32000 words n 1900 words For the Serial Communications Unit m DM30000 100 x unit number words n 1500 25 x unit number words Problem Allocated data Serial Indicator display Status area communications information mode setting Serial Bits 12 to 15 Serial communications serial communications _ serial mode is not set to communications __ mode setting is Se nian protocol macro mode of wrong mode of m m 10 allocated data in the allocated area n 5 n 15 DM are to 6 are not 6 hexadecimal hexadecimal protocol macro Serial SDL_I RDU Although PMCR Bits 00 to 07 of the Either operand See table on communications COML indicators instruction is Communications settings of the page 180 mode is set to are not lit executed bit 15 Port Execution PMCR instruction protocol macro Electrically not Protocol Macro Error Flag A219 are wrong o
288. he range of the above areas displayed in the PLC data table 3 Left click the Fill Button 12 4 I O Memory Monitor While the PLC is connected online the I O memory status per area of the PLC can be monitored The value displayed on screen varies with the I O memory status of the PLC Note This operation is not supported for an NJ series CPU Unit Note 1 Do not monitor EM area used for file memory If monitoring is performed for this area it will become impossible to display any present values 2 When in MONITOR or RUN mode only data in the data in the data mem ory area D and extended data memory area E can be transferred to the PLC 312 I O Memory Monitor Section 12 4 12 4 1 Monitoring Whole I O Memory 1 2 3 1 Connect the PLC online This step can be taken after step 2 if desired 2 Double click the name of the area to be displayed in the data area work space and display the PLC data table Multiple areas can be monitored si multaneously 3 Right click a cell in the PLC data table and select Monitor from the Online Menu CO ooi re 3 Download D e Compare Eill Data Area Clear Grid Cut Copy Paste Properties The following dialog box will be displayed Monitor Memory Areas Cancel 4 Select the area to be monitored and left click the Monitor Button The displayed range of the selected area in the PLC data window will be monitored 313 I O Memory Monit
289. he step will be repeatedly executed by a designated num ber of times 2 Number of iterations set The number of iteration times to repeatedly execute the step can be desig nated by one of the followings e Setting constant 1 to 255 e Using a word read R The content binary of the low order byte at the word of the third operand second operand for the C200HX HG HE 1 of a PMCR instruction is desig nated as the number of iterations The content binary of the low order byte in DM 0000 is designated as the number of iterations How to designate word read TL Start word constant How to designate Symboltobe Exampe a word designated When constant 0 When constant 2 Operand None Cannot be set R 2 designation Link word 01 11 O2 12 R O1 R O1 2 designation Direct designation CIOUULI LRUU R DM0000 R DM00O00 2 1 WRU 2 HRLIL ARUL DMI EMULILIL Word 1 C200HX HG HE only 2 CS CJ only The content of the low order byte at the start word constant word is read as binary data to indirectly designate the number of bytes When 0 is read by the repeat counter during the word read the step will be skipped ignoring the next step setting and control will shift to the next step 1 87 Step Attributes Section 3 3 Setting with the CX Protocol Repeat Counter Information 7 x Tvs Counter Cancel Constant fi C Channel ROD Edit e While a ste
290. hich protocols are transferred online to the PLC 1 2 3 1 Left click the Target Once the online connection is enabled the names of the PMSU actually mounted will be displayed Target scs Mot Fitted Communication Unit Note If the project has not been used online yet SCB Not Fitted for the Serial Communications Board and No Unit Unit No for the Serial Communications Unit will be displayed 2 Select the Board Unit from the drop down list If the PLC is CS CuJ select SCB for the Serial Communications Board and specify the unit number for each Serial Communications Unit SCU If the PLC is the C200HX C200HG C200HE select the Communications Board Example The Serial Communications Unit with unit number O is selected online for the CS Cu 207 Creating Sequences and Steps Section 5 2 Target SCU lo 5 2 Creating Sequences and Steps 5 2 1 Creating a New Sequence Use the following procedure to create a new sequence in the protocol s 1 2 3 1 Double click the Protocol List Icon in the project workspace and select lial and highlight the protocol where the new sequence is to be created Alter B natively left click or double click the CS CJ Protocol Icon or C200HX C200HG C200HE Protocol Icon in the project window according to the protocol type 2 Select Sequence by right clicking the Protocol Icon in the project work space Alternatively select the Create from the pop up menu in the project win
291. ial after one minute is configured by designating its step number with goto the sequence execution will not be aborted but can be continued 1 CONNECT Line connection completion secceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees End 4 ERROR Command error haaacccccaeseeeeceaeeeeecsee eeeeeeaaeeees Abort Confirm the contents of the dial command setup 6 NO DIALTONE No dialtone detected os eeeecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeees Abort Confirm the dial type tone or pulse 7 BUSY Connection failure for the busy line Redial after one minute os eeeeeeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Goto01 8 NO ANSWER No answer tone detected ccceeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Abort Confirm if the partner modem is receivable 9 HAND SET IN USE Connection failure for the telephone calling Redial after one minute os eee eeeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Goto01 234 CONNECT 2400 REL4 LINE CONNECTION completion cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees End Others Abort 345 Creating the Protocol Applications Appendix A Note In the second and later retry process executions the send wait time is ignored Therefore another step 01 is created whose send wait time is one minute when the result code is 7 BUSY Thus the retry pro cess should not be set within a process that requires the send wait time Abnormal Errors other than that caused by the matrix may be caused by wrong modem s transmission rate or abnormal line status Since a step
292. icate that the Serial Communications Board or Unit DTE is ready to send or receive data Previously the DTR signal could be turned ON only during the send receive sequence Now the DTR signal can be turned ON or OFF at any time within the send receive sequence This allows connection or disconnection with a modem using the protocol macro The DTR signal can be set to ON even after the send receive sequence has completed The DTR signal can be retained even after changing to another protocol mode for example host link With this function remote programming or monitoring can be performed through a remote Programming Device by changing to the host link mode using the STUP instruction after connecting to a modem 1 2 2 Features of the CX Protocol Simultaneous display of tree hierarchical view and list table view The CX Protocol displays data in the form of a tree in the left pane which gives you easier understanding of the hierarchical structure of data you are setting monitoring Object oriented operation Double clicking target data instead of choosing from menus opens its corre sponding pop up dialog which enables you to create protocols quickly without a thorough understanding of operation menus Supplied standard system protocols Data exchange protocols for OMRON s components Temperature Control lers Panel Meters Bar Code Readers Modems and so on are included as standard system protocols Notice that those stan
293. imum 150 SECTION 4 Using the Protocol Macro Function This section describes various precautions in using the protocol macro function 4 1 Applicable Range of the Protocol Macro Function 152 AN CSC site tana et ows wae at eet ade eed eee Ie ee eet oe 152 l 2 C 200HXHMO HE eeit a r EEE E 153 Ae Protocol Creaton Proces Seea r E ote eats a a Sere S 154 4 2 1 Creating Communications Sequence Flowcharts 154 4 2 2 Disassembling into Sequences and Steps 0 154 4 3 Transmission Control Mode Setup 0 0 0 0 eee 157 4 4 Ladder Programming Method 0 0 eens 160 AeA CSI CWS ateck epee dhe kei mise needa base at ee ue Mea ek 160 Ata C200HX HG HE s 0 cccut o wees maere ed hak a eer de eee aw 166 4 5 Calculation Method of Monitoring Time 0 0 0 0 eee eee 171 4 6 Operation Confirmation snese asese 173 4 7 Errors at the Protocol Execution 0 0 c cece eee eee eee 175 ASP CSICV i 4 cee tome EEE eee Sera e Beata eile SEEwes Ere 175 4 7 2 C200HX HG HE sepre n oe ir wok os eon ale eh eae ehh eek eae 183 4 8 Communications Response Time Performance 0005 184 deskl CSC ce hae aie Gal re A Ne Se A ales ey es EEA 185 AsS 2 CJOOH HOGHE rardo Taa Sih PERERA LACNS Radars heua Ss mae 193 49 Cycle ime Perormance 2 3 2 018 hanged ho eG ate hee een Re hee 201 151 Applicable Range of the Protocol Macro Function Secti
294. in the project window the project workspace n Project Name Protocol Number Trace Num List Name of Proto List ber of cols Traces Protocol List eee pe pee Protocol Sequence Se Type Target Name Start quence Number End Number Communi Link Trans Re Timer Timer Timer cations Word mission sponse Tr Tfr Tfs Sequence Control Step Repeat Com Retry Send Receive Re Next Error Counter mand Count Wait Mes Mes sponse Time sage sage Message Header Check Length Address Data Name lt h gt Code lt gt lt a gt lt C gt Message Header Check Length Address Data Message Name lt h gt Code lt l gt lt a gt List lt C gt Matrix List Matrix Number of Name Cases Py Py Py Se quence Number oj a 5 O O 4D Receive Matrix Case Receive Next Number Message Process tion gm PLC Inner Type Serial Type Board Commu nica tions Unit EP Board PMSU Status Commu Type Trace nica tions Port Unit PMSU Status Commu Type j Trace nica tions Port The highlighting cursor is available in both the project workspace and the project window The focused portion i e the portion actually selected in operation is sur rounded by a dotted line If a line in the project window is selected the focused portion will be in the project window 49 Outli aA CX Eile Bell ee Sle hel SEa aala E xl m nie ne of User Interface Secti
295. ing procedure to set the PLC model gm 1 2 3 1 Right click the PLC Icon and select Edit PC PLC Comms Settings from the pop up menu or select Edit PC PLC Comms Setting from the PLC Menu Change PLO NewPLet 2 Select the PLC Series from the Device Type drop down list 3 Left click the Settings Button to enter the setting 262 Communications Settings between Personal Computer and PLC Section 10 2 Communications Settings 1 2 3 1 After you set the model of the CPU Unit in the above procedure select the network type from the Network Type drop down list In this example SYS MAC WAY is selected 2 Left click the Settings Button on the right hand side The Network Set ting Dialog Box will be displayed Network Settings SYSHAC WAT Network Driver Moder AS Source Address Hema yu F Hode yu i mit aNs estiraticr SS Hensar 1 F Hode fa Pirit Response Timeout Brame enai e Host Link Unit Number Wetton Upeaa Lee 0 e Hy cae Hee 263 Communications Settings between Personal Computer and PLC Section 10 2 3 Left click the Driver Tab in order to change the communications condi tions The name of port baud rate data length parity and number of stop bits can be set Hetwork Settings STSMAC WAT Network Driver Modem Data Format Data Bits 7 Parity Even ha Stop Bits 2 Make Def
296. ion Close see note Turns OFF the DTR signal at the desired timing Note Only for the CS CJ series protocol macro Valid only for Send amp Receive com mand The system executes the current step up to the desig nated times 0 9 when some retry fac tor such as an error occurs If the retry factor still remains control will go to the error process Section 3 3 Close Receive Send amp Wait Flush Open Receive see see see see note note note note Incorporating a linear expression including the repeat counter N into the send or the I O memory to which the message is stored When sending and receiving the data by consecutive turns using the Send amp Receive com mand allows users to set the steps effi ciently Since the retry count for an error can be set the error process is described simply Use the Wait com mand when shifting to the next step after the CPU Units completes computation between steps see note Use the Flush command when clear ing data within the receive buffer under the full duplex mode see note Use the Open or Close command when turning ON or OFF the DTR signal to match the control protocols of the external device under the modem control see note Note Only for the CS CJ series protocol macro has to be provided by an error process dur ing retrying Likewise a retry process has to receive message allows users to f
297. ion in the following Across _ section OUT Area None CIO WR 1 LR 2 HR AR DM EM Refer to Link Word Designation in the following Length section Link 2 None CIO WR LR 2 HR AR DM EM Address Refer to Link Word Designation in the following Aess section OUT Area None CIO WR 1 LR 2 HR AR DM EM Refer to Link Word Designation in the following Length Length section Transmission RTS CTS None Send Receive Send amp Receive Control Xon Xoff None Send Receive Send amp Receive Select With without using the check box Contention Send Request Code ASCII hexadecimal Code Delimiters Delimiter Send Code ASCII hexadecimal Code Delimiter Code ASCII hexadecimal Receive Code Response Type Scan Scan Interrupt Fixed Interrupt Receive Case Scan Interrupt Fixed Interrupt Receive Case Fixed Interrupt Receive Case Timer Unit 0 01s 0 1s 1s 1 min Note 1 WR is only for the CS CJ 220 Setting Sequences Link Word Designation E Link Channel Information Link 1 IN Area Addr OUT Area Addr Note 1 2 3 Section 7 1 2 LR is only for the C200HX HG HE 3 Default setting for the CX Protocol Designate the data area shared between the PLC and Board Unit This set ting is made for every sequence common to steps When using the Link Channel Designation for designating the storage areas for send receive data the code numbers 11
298. isplay it If desired the trace can be previewed by selecting Print Preview from the File Menu The preview window will be displayed e Select the Next Page Button or Prev Page Button to navigate through the pages of the printout e Select the Two Page Button to view two pages of the printout at once This button will change to the One Page Button to revert back e Select the Zoom In Button or Zoom Out Button to zoom the printout image in or out e Select the Close Button to close the dialog box e The Print Dialog Box will be displayed by selecting the Print Button Designate the printer name print range and number of copies and left click the OK Button to print the trace Select Print from the File Menu or left click the Print Icon from the toolbar The Print Dialog Box will be displayed Designate the printer name print range and number of copies and left click the OK Button to print the trace The printing of the trace will start The following is an example printout of a trace Hame Attar wl pew Desccigtiar SORT 4 ci zA JD 40 3J i 40 30 30 4 SA B A AF OD 12 2 Outline of PLC Memory Window 12 2 1 PLC Memory Window and PLC Data Table The PLC memory window is used for displaying and editing I O memory data such as bit timer counter and DM data The table type window called the PLC data table which has a list of data clas sified according to I O memory area will be displayed in the
299. isplayed Left click the OK Button 10 Close the Protocol Compile Download Dialog Box 11 1 2 Displaying Protocol Data within the PMSU im Use the following procedure to display protocol data within the PMSU Connect to the PLC online 2 Double click the PLC Icon 287 Transferring and Reading Protocol Data between the Computer and PMSU Section 11 1 3 Left click the PMSU Icon in the project workspace left pane or in the project window right pane and then right click to display a pop up menu Select Upload Protocol List from the pop up menu Ee EXAMPLE psw ep Trace Stats leltres Not Tracing Wie Trace 2 Hot Tracing Communications Port Type JE Communications Port 1 R520920 JE Communications Port 2 R520920 Protocol Name start Sequence End Sequence Type SOUFCe Timestamp m Sequence Step Edit 13 650 gg USER Ho 7 2 98 114507 AM The trace communications port and protocol list will be displayed in the Project Window 11 1 3 Transferring Protocol Data from the PMSU to the Computer Use the following procedure to upload protocol data to the computer from the PMSU 1 2 3 1 Connect to the PLC online 2 Double click the PLC Icon 3 Left click the PMSU Icon in the project workspace left pane or in the project window right pane and then right click to display a pop up menu at Alternatively select Upload Protocol from the pop up menu or left click the Upload Protocol Icon If prot
300. ith the project by using the CX Protocol GA Prorocol Device name PLC100 Device type CS1G Gateway Node address 1 Device name PLC0O0O 4 Device type CS1H ENE DA ose Node address 0 Network Example Controller Link biena na aaan aaa a aa a aa aa a a a a aa a eB a a ewe eB an ee ewe a Note This type of connection is not supported for an NJ series CPU Unit 1 2 3 1 In this example a new project is created for the PLC100 which is a CS1G CJ1G type Left click New in the File Menu or left click the New Icon on the toolbar 2 Make settings in the Change PLC and the Network Settings Toolbus Dialog Boxes as shown below 3 Click the OK Button Device Hame PLCI Ou Device Type CS1G CJ1G settings Network Type T oolbus Sethirigs Comment By left clicking this button the Network Settings dialog box will be displayed as shown below El Help Cancel 265 Communications Settings between Personal Computer and PLC Section 10 2 Network Settings T oolbus Ea Metwork Driver Modem ees Set to O for local network communications AS Source ddess Etak E Hode a rat a Set the node address to 1 FINS Destnatior 4ddress Network lo Node f Drie E Frame Length f 004 Host Lora Wire Te nq JE Use the default value normally If communications are made over two or more networks set the value
301. its range can be des Ranges ignated in the Length lt I gt or Check Code lt c gt Field Use the following procedure to designate the ranges 1 2 3 1 Left click the Up Button or Down Button to designate the beginning or end item in the order of 1 2 3 etc from the left of a message of the range The display color of the designated item changes 253 Matrix Creation Section 9 2 For example when changing the check code from 3 to 5 the display will change as shown below The character color changes from black to blue Message Editor ed Name spa lt lt gt gt Delete a aot 1 4 47 0000 6 cb e tb Message Data Constant Hex Edit Insert Header H Terminator t gt Address lt a gt Edit Insert Edit Insert i Edit Inesen Length b i Edit Insert Check Code Check Dae e 1 5 Ect haar Cancel Press the OK Button to confirm the message data or press the Cancel But ton to leave the settings unchanged Input message will be displayed on the Data Field 9 2 Matrix Creation Use the procedures described in the following paragraphs to set a matrix when more than one received message is expected and the next process is to be changed for each receive message 9 2 1 Creating a New Matrix Use the following procedure to create a new matrix 1 2 3 1 Double click the Matrix List Icon on the project workspace or p
302. ive data switch modes line disconnection Then the steps are configured for each sequence 343 Creating the Protocol Applications Appendix A Sequence No 000 Modem Initialization Step No 00 Step No 00 retry count Matrix Result code Normal The system sends the modem initialization command and waits the result code from the modem Since there is more than one result code the following matrix is set O End for the normal end of the initialization 4 This is a command error The cause will be a wrong setup for the initialization command The abort and the correct setup for the initialization command are necessary Other Abort Note Even though the next process of 4 command error is same with that of Other it is set as a separate matrix case This is because the checking of the matrix number from the flag at an error occurrence allows the confirmation of the error cause and easier debugging Abnormal By the setting of the retry count three times the system automatically retries the same step up to three times at the following error occurrences e The send finish monitoring time Tfs the receive wait monitoring time Tr or the receive finish monitoring time Tfr is up e A transmission error C1028304 or 28312 is ON occurs upon receiving e Wrong receive message e An error occurs in the error check code If the initialization fails even after the maximum three retry times it will be handled by the
303. ix items header address length data error check code and terminator Longin Check code Data attributes Header Sets the data that indicates the beginning of the communications message Constant only frame At reception data from the header is received as the message Address Sets the unit number or other information to be used as the message s Constant Reserved destination aaa are not available e The system identifies whether the receiving data is addressed to itself Variable e When Word writes or Wildcard is set as a data attribute the system receives all the messages addressed to itself without identifying whether it is addressed to itself broadcast addressing The message sending address can automatically be updated by using the repeat counter Length Indicates the length number of bytes of a message Based on the calcu Automatic variable lation method set at transmission length size data format calculates message length and appends the value before sending When the message is received the amount of data corresponding to this value for the length is taken from the actual received data and processed as the receive message Checking of this value is not supported by C200HX HG HE For sending messages Constant Set the data to be sent Variable For receiving messages Set the data expected to be received When the data of the actually received message frame is different from the designated da
304. k code of more than 4 bytes are designated between variables words write or variables words read the data sizes of which are set as wildcards only the first variables words write is effective For example if 12345ABCDE56789 is received while W 5 ABCDE R 2 8 is set 12345ABCDE56789 will correspond to W 5 The R 2 8 setting will be ignored When there is an error check code lt c gt after a variables words write set with a wildcard the error check code will be calculated if the position of the error check code itself can be located within the receive message Such a condition is satisfied at the following times When the position of the error check code itself relative to the start can be calculated For example lt h gt W 2 10 lt c gt When the position relative to the delimiter terminator constant following the error check code can be calculated For example lt h gt W 5 lt c gt lt t gt lt h gt W 5 lt c gt ABC lt t gt lt h gt W 5 lt c gt ABC W 5 lt t gt 111 Creating Matrices Section 3 5 Note Only constants of less than 4 bytes will be recognized as delimiters As in the following examples if the position of the error check code itself within the receive message cannot be located it will not be calculated For example lt h gt W 5 lt c gt lt h gt W 5 lt c gt W 5 lt h gt W 5
305. l sequence before execution 121 Executing a Created Communications Sequence CS CJ Section 3 8 3 8 1 Device Connection For example a CS PLC CS1W SC41 V1 Serial Communications Board and E5ZE Temperature Controller are connected as follows CS1 CPU Unit CS1W SCB41 V1 Temperature input 8 channels Port 2 of Serial Com munications Board Eight points of measured temperature are stored in DM 00101 to DM 00116 Measured temperature DM0101 Word 0 lower part DM0102 Word 0 upper part DM0103 Word t lower part DM0104 Word 1 upper part 3 8 2 Initial Setup 1 2 3 1 Set the DIP switch on the Serial Communications Board oF Q ON Terminator switch OFF Without terminator ON With terminator 2 O 4 Wire switch 2 2 wire type 4 4 wire type 2 Set the allocated DM area for the CS CJ as follows Address Set value Contents see note D32010 0600 Treats the protocol macro as the communications mode and takes the standard communications conditions D32011 0000 Standard baud rate D32018 0000 Half duplex D32019 00C8 Maximum number of bytes for protocol macro send receive message 200 bytes Note Setting address for port 2 of the Board Standard settings Start bi Even pariy Baud rate Note For more information of the PLC setup area related to the protocol macro function refer to Appendix B PLC Setup and PMSU Settings 122 Executing a Created Communications Sequence CS CJ S
306. l Ra co enn ee Ons eat ines Lin EArt Gs trol REETA ES ie Timer Tfr Timer Te ce oo Procees value read 5e Scar c J sec 37 00 Larp set point read a Sat Scan F sec F Sec J sec ce 002 Manipulated variable read set Scan J Sec J Sec J Sec ce 003 Set point read Set pcan o Sec o Sec 3 Sec cz 2004 Alarm value read Set Scan 3 sec 3 sec JEC i O05 Propo band Inter Deri time read sas Set Scan 3 sec a Sec J Sec ce 2 COG Go oling coefficient read Set Scan J sec J sec a Sec ce 007 Dead band read Set Scar o sec o Sec J SEC POG kannal reset walie read Set r ar J cer J cer J cer For the details of setup method refer to SECTION 7 Sequence Setting and Editing 3 2 3 Transmission Control Parameter Set the transmission control parameters such as the flow control RTS CTS DTR DSR etc The following five types of transmission control are sup ported Set the same transmission control modes as for the external device to be communicated with Note that the modem control parameter can be desig nated together with other parameters Transmission control parameter RTS CTS flow Executes flow control by hardware Set when the external device supports control using the RTS and CTS signals the RTS CTS flow control Xon Xoff flow control Modem control Contention control Delimiter control 76 Executes flow control by software using Xon 11 hexadecimal and Xoff 13 hexadecimal codes Holds the DTR
307. l be displayed Select the project from the list in the dialog box The project file psw will be displayed as a default project file If any other type of file is required se lect it from the File of Type drop down list The following types of files are available If opening any file other than project files refer to 11 3 Importing Protocol Data from PST PSS Files The CX Protocol project file is created by the CX Protocol the PST project file is created by the SYSMAC PST and the PSS files are created by DOS Protocol Support Software File type Contents File Read extension CX Protocol project file Project file created by the CX Protocol ew p po PST project file Project file created by the SYSMAC PST PSS system setup file Setup data file of communications ports A and B of PSS communications board PSS protocol file File with PSS protocol data only a PSS trace data file File with PSS or SYSMAC PST trace data only 214 Editing Projects Section 6 1 To change the current folder for another one select the folder from File Look in in the drop down list 3 Left click the Open Button or double click the selected project The project will open Left click the Cancel Button to leave the settings unchanged Note The icons on the right hand side in the File Look in Field have the following functions e By left clicking the Up One Level Icon the folder one level higher is opened e By left clicking the Create New Folder I
308. lation of frame length for sending data and conversion between ASCII and hexadecimal data only Other calcula tions or conversions will be handled by the ladder program if necessary e The DTR signals can be turned ON or OFF under modem control e Data can be retrieved from the receive buffer as a receive message in the length set in the expected receive message e When the transmission mode is half duplex data in the receive buffer will be cleared right before a sequence is executed or send command is exe cuted When the transmission mode is full duplex data in the receive buffer will be cleared only right before a sequence is executed e Maximum number of processes that can be branched according to received data sent command etc is 15 If more branches are neces sary use the ladder program Applicable Range of the Protocol Macro Function Section 4 1 4 1 2 C200HX HG HE Using the Protocol Support Tool allows users to create several communica tions sequence or protocol compatible with communications control modes discussed in this chapter However they are not compatible with communica tions control modes such as the full duplex the synchronous communication frame synchronous mode HDLC High level Data Link Communications etc Half duplex Synchronizing mode Start step synchronization mode Transmission control mode Contention mode Point to point connection Polling selecting mode Point to multi point connectio
309. lect General Tab from the Settings Dialog Box The above screen will be displayed e Always On Top will always display the error log window on top e Activate when Error detected will automatically display the PLC Er rors Window that is open with the PLC connected online but located behind other windows or minimized on top when an error is detected 326 Error and Error Log Display Section 13 Error Log Tab Settings Select the Error Log Tab from the Setting Dialog Box Settings General Error Log Clock m Display Hide Error Log Time Column Hide Error Log Date Column Lancel Help e Update Error Log Entries Automatically will automatically refresh the error log e Hide Error Log Time Column will hide the time display of the error log e Hide Error Log Date Column will hide the date display of the error log 327 Error and Error Log Display Section 13 Clock Tab Settings Select the Clock Tab from the Settings Dialog Box The following screen will be displayed Settings General Eror Log Clock Lancel Help e Monitor the PLC Clock will monitor and display the PLC clock on the bottom right of the PLC Errors Window as shown below LS1H LPUb Program Llock TU 04 1 328 SECTION 14 Troubleshooting This section lists the error messages and describes their causes and remedies 329 Troubleshooting Section 14 Error Messages The following error messages are listed alp
310. lect the address to be force set reset and from the Address Menu select Monitor Set or Reset as required from the Force Status Menu Alternatively the Force Status Menu can be selected from the pop up menu displayed by right clicking Similarly when clearing select Clear Address Monitor Window Help Insert Remove Remove All PENN Set Value OFF Ki Cancel Changing Present Values Select the address for which the present value is to be changed and from the in Address Monitor Address Menu select Set Value Alternatively Set Value can be selected from the pop up menu displayed by right clicking 315 I O Memory Monitor Section 12 4 e For word addresses after specifying the data format binary BCD deci mal signed decimal hexadecimal enter the new value in the Word Value Field e For contact addresses specify ON or OFF in the Bit Value Field Set Yalue word Value Lancel Binary Binary Coded Decimal C Decimal C Signed Decimal Hexadecimal 12 4 3 Finding Force set or Force reset Bits Use the following procedure to find and display the force set or force reset bits 1 2 3 1 Click the Address Tab in the data area workspace Z l p SIH PUG a yl Monitor Henn 2 Forced Status 2 Double click here lt a hemor E gt Address 316 I O Memory Transfer and Comparison Section 12 5 2 Double click Forced Status e The search operation will s
311. lick the OK Button to re turn the Network Setting Dialog Box 11 Open Location Information Dialog Box from the Phone and Modem Op tions in the Control Panel and set the information for the modem to be con nected to the CX Protocol Make the appropriate settings for the types of modem and telephone line On completion of the above the settings for the personal computer are made 10 4 4 Online Connection When online connection operations are performed from the CX Protocol autodial will be executed and connection to the remote PLC will be made via the modem 10 5 I O Table Creation When mounting the CS CJ series Serial Communications Unit to the Back plane for the first time use the following procedure to create an I O table Note This operation is not supported for an NJ series CPU Unit 10 5 1 I O Table Note When the Serial Communications Unit is mounted to the PLC for the first time and the CPU Unit is turned ON the ERR ALM indicator of the CPU Unit will 279 PMSU Communications Port Settings Section 10 6 flash When online connections are established an error log window will be displayed Ignore the PLC Errors Window and use the following procedure to create an I O table When the I O table is created the ERR ALM indicator will turn OFF Close the PLC Errors Window 1 2 3 1 Connect the personal computer to the PLC for online communications 2 Setthe PLC to PROGRAM mode on 3 Right click the PLC Icon
312. list Not repeated Next process Error process To the next step To the specified step Ending the sequence Aborting the sequence Header Address Data _ Check Matrix see note 2 Case No 15 Z Case No 00 Receive message Next process Note 1 The command is Send Receive Send amp Receive Wait Flush Open or Close e A step can be retried with the Send amp Receive command e A step can wait to transmit a send message upon the Send or Send amp Receive commands e A step can select the next process according to the content of the re ceived message by using a matrix 2 There are three types of messages send messages receive expected messages and matrices that switch processes according to multiple re ceive expected messages Those messages are managed by lists and separated from sequences 18 Protocol Macro Structure Section 1 6 1 6 1 Step Structure Each step has the fixed processing framework as follows Users create proto cols by setting parameters for each framework One step contains one command Send Receive Send amp Receive Wait Flush Open or Close and one or two messages send receive or send receive The step changes from one to another by the Next Process within the step Structure of one step For Wait Flush Open for Send Receive Send amp Receive commands Close commands Sequence Np proosa Command Message _ i Next process To be
313. ll not be displayed in the errors in progress or error log Errors can be determined if the POWER indicator on the Power Supply Unit is lit and the RUN and ERR ALM indicators on the CS CJ CP series CPU Unit are not lit 324 Error and Error Log Display Section 13 Displaying Messages Use the following procedure to display messages by executing the MSG instruction Double click the Messages Tab in the PLC Errors Window The following Messages Tab will be displayed Fa PLC Errors gee Ta ed File Cotions Help Errors ErorLog Messages Message Text JU Servarmiator Error 1 Clear Clear All C31H CPUE Monitor Clock 14 20 30 e Message numbers and message texts are displayed e Up to eight messages are displayed e Messages selected are cleared by left clicking the Clear Button e All the messages displayed are cleared by left clicking the Clear All Button Note 1 Control codes other than ASCII will be displayed with a space 2 Two byte code can be displayed 3 Messages designated by FAL or FALS instructions cannot be displayed 325 Error and Error Log Display Section 13 Setting PLC Errors Use the following procedure to set PLC Errors Window conditions Window Conditions Opening the Option Dialog Box Select Settings via Option Menu from the PLC Errors Window Settings General Error Log Clock Activate when Error detected Lancel Help General Tab Settings 1 2 3 1 Se
314. m Settings CS CJ With the CS CJ Series PLC Setup settings for using a Serial Communications Board or a Serial Communica tions Unit in protocol macro mode are made in the allocated DM area of the PMSU Serial Communications Board Allocated DM area Use the following areas in words D32000 to D32099 D32000 to D32001 PLC Setup settings for port 1 D32008 to D32009 D32010 to D32011 PLC Setup settings for port 2 D32018 to D32019 D32002 to D32007 Not used in protocol macro mode D32012 to D32017 D32020 to D32767 Reserved for system use Serial Communications Unit Allocated DM area Use the following areas in words D30000 to D31599 O Unto O O owa ooo o o y Doo eooo Do e 7 eooo Deo SSS eooo o o Doo Be moss D E E SSS Note The allocation within each DM area is as follows m D30000 100 x Unit Number m to m 1 m 8 to m 9 PLC Setup settings for port 1 m 10 to m 11 m 18 to m 19 PLC Setup settings for port 2 m 2 to m 27 m 212 to m 217 Not used m 20 to m 99 Not used 355 PLC Setup and PMSU Settings Contents of PLC Setup Area m D30000 100 x Unit Number DM o o Board D32000 D32010 T m 10 D32001 D32011 S m 11 a a mani D32009 D32019 ee 356 Appendix B Contents of setting a Port setting 0 Default 1 Setting required 14 to 12 Reserved 11 to 08 O a communications mode 6 Hexadecimal Protocol macro 07 to 05 Start Bit O 1 bit 1 1 bit whether it is set to O or 1 it will be fixed a
315. mal ASCII conversion Variables inside the send message determine which area of the I O memory is used Receiving Example CS CJ CPU Unit PMSU Sequence No 001 Receive message Sp poaderacess ata cose Sequence execution 1 Receive n command I O memory ASCII Hexadecimal conversion Variables inside the receive message determine which area of the I O memory is written to Compare address Receive data To designate which area of I O memory is used for creating send messages and which area of I O memory is used for storing receive messages the fol lowing three methods can be used 1 2 3 1 Operand Designation Use the designated memory address with the oper ands for the PMCR instruction 2 Direct Designation Directly designate the I O memory address 3 Link Word Designation Use the shared data area link word between the CPU Unit and the PMSU 65 Protocol Macro Outline Designation Methods for Send Receive Data Area Designation Symbol in message to be Application method designated Operand designation set within send receive message Direct designation set within send receive message Link word designation set with sequence attributes 66 The I O memory area is designated using the third first word of send data storage area and fourth first word of receive data storage area operands second and third operands for C200HX HG HE in the PMCR instruction of
316. manual provides information for programming and operating OMRON PLCs Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the software and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the speci fied purpose and under the specified conditions especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying a PLC System to the above mentioned appli cations Safety Precautions Never attempt to disassemble any Units while power is being supplied Doing so may result in serious electrical shock or electrocution Never touch any of the terminals while power is being supplied Doing so may result in serious electrical shock or electrocution Operating Environment Precautions Do not operate the control system in the following places e Where the PLC is exposed to direct sunlight e Where the ambient temperature is below 0 C or over 55 C e Where the PLC may be affected by condensation due to radical tempera ture changes e Where the ambient humidity is below 10 or over 90 e Where there is any corrosive or inflammable gas e Where there is excessive dust saline air or metal powder e Where the PLC is affected by vibration or shock e Where water oil or chemical may splash onto the PLC Application Precautions 5 N Caution The operating environment of the PLC system
317. me C G gnad Decimal Fonl C Floalinc Foint Arial Spot C Hexadecimal amp Lhange Fori Cancel felp 2 Left click the buttons of the items to be set 3 Left click the OK Button to enter the settings The details of tab settings are explained below Settings in Display Tab Use the following procedure to set the default data display format in the PLC data table 1 2 3 1 Select the Display Tab from the Properties For New Windows Dialog Box The above window will be displayed 2 Select the default word and bit display formats It is also possible to change the font 306 Outline of PLC Memory Window Section 12 2 Settings in Monitoring Tab Use the following procedure to set the monitor update interval 1 2 3 1 Select the Monitoring Tab from the Properties For New Windows Dia log Box Properties For Hew Windows Ea Display Monitonng General File Monitor Update Interval Millizecornds Cancel Help 2 Set the refresh period and unit and left click the OK Button Settings in General Tab 1 2 3 1 Select the General Tab from the Properties For New Windows Dialog Box Properties For New Window i Frompt before closing an active monitor window Iw Bean on invalid input Fast window update Cancel Help 307 Outline of PLC Memory Window Section 12 2 Automatically resize column widths The column widths will be auto matically adjusted according t
318. mes of the retry count Error occurred Executed to the number of times of the retry count Y y Y Normal end Abnormal end Next Next process Error Error process 3 3 6 Send Wait Time For the Send or Send amp Receive command set the wait time taken from the corresponding step up to data transmission Screen with the CX Protocol Transmission Wait Time EIE Value Time Unit ea E FA fio millisecond zj Cancel 3 3 7 Send Message Receive Message Send Messages A send message name created in the send message list is referred to or a send message is created directly in this step For details about the contents of send messages refer to 3 4 Communication Message Attributes Receive Messages A receive message name created in the receive message list is referred to or Including Matrix a receive message is created directly in this step For details about the con tents of send messages refer to 3 4 Communication Message Attributes 92 Step Attributes Section 3 3 A matrix name indicated with brackets created in the matrix list is referred to For details about the contents of send messages refer to the following 3 5 Creating Matrices nd Wait Send Message Recvy Message Sooo 1 ROGI 1 Mess are SDC 1 3 3 8 With Without Response Writing Sets whether or not received data is written This setting is valid when the data in a receive message is designat
319. message is created directly in this step With the CX Protocol a receive message name created in the receive message list is referred to ora receive message is created directly in this step Or a matrix name created in the matrix list is referred to The matrix cannot be created directly from the step Setting this parameter to available always needs to designate the response type End Executes the step and ends the sequence Next Executes the next step Goto Executes the step designated by xK Abort Aborts the step and ends the sequence Same as above O Available Not available Note The Open and Close commands turn the DTR signal ON or OFF under a con trol mode other than the modem control The ON or OFF state will be retained not only after the sequence has terminated but also when the protocol has been changed through the STUP or port starting Step Attributes Section 3 3 3 3 3 Repeat Counter 1 2 3 Reset Hold Example R 1 Example R DM0000 Note Note Note 1 Initial value designation One of the following parameters can be set as the initial value in the corre sponding step of the repeat counter variable N After the repeat counter variable N is reset to O when the step is started the step will be repeatedly executed by a designated number of times When the step is started the current value of the repeat counter variable will be held as it is and t
320. ming by executing the Open DTR ON state is retained even after sequence is completed or Close DTR OFF command DTR signal can be controlled over more than one sequence When both the RTS CTS flow control and modem control are designated The DTR signal will follow the modem control and RTS CTS signal will turn ON the RTS signal when sending data and will follow the RTS CTS flow control when receiving data Not available Keeps transition between steps on standby using the Wait command and starts control when the Wait is cleared from the CPU Unit Example Processing can proceed to the next step after the CPU Unit com pletes internal computation in a particular step Data is retrieved as a message for the length indicated in the expected receive message Error check code LRC2 and SUM1 Not available LRC2 and SUM1 Available Interrupt notification function Not available Serial Communications Board Available Serial Communications Unit Not available 39 Differences between Protocol Macros 40 Section 1 13 SECTION 2 Installing Uninstalling Starting Ending This section outlines the functions of the CX Protocol and describes the operating environment installation procedure and the setting of the usage environment 2 Connecune tO aPC cect cee pars othe s VES SEAGER WEES EOD SERA S 42 2 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Software 0 00 eee 45 22 gt Samp a26 6 anana
321. modem can be used from the personal com puter ME5614C Insert the modem card in the PLC card slot 2 Turn ON the power supply for the personal computer Windows will recognize the modem and the Wizard will be displayed 3 Make settings according to the instructions given by the Wizard On completion of the above the modem can be used from the personal com puter 275 Modem Connections Section 10 4 Connecting the Personal Connect the personal computer CX Protocol to the modem using the Computer to the Modem modem s RS 232C cable CX Protocol Settings 1 2 3 1 Display the Change PLC Dialog Box with the CX Protocol 2 Select SYSMAC WAY host link or Toolbus from the Network Type se lection box Change PLC E4 Device Mame NewPLC1 Device Type CS1H Settings Network Type SYSMALC WAT z Comment FA UF Cancel Help 3 Left click the Settings Button to the right of the Network Type selection box The Network Setting Dialog Box will be displayed 4 Specify the PLC to be connected to in the Network Tab e When making connections to a PLC that is connected directly to the modem set Network to 0 and Node to 0 default settings e When making connections from a PLC directly connected to a tele phone to another PLC on the network make the appropriate settings for the network address and the node address For details of network communications refer to 10 2
322. munications Board Sequence No 100 Send data first word Receive data storage first word When the input condition is set to ON and the Protocol Macro Execution Flag 191915 port 2 is set to OFF the communications sequence num ber 100 registered on the PMSU is called to send and receive data via port 2 of the PMSU if the Communications Port Enabled Flag A20207 internal logic port of the communications port No 7 is used is ON The send data is sent out from the next D00001 according to the number of effective words number of words including D00000 designated by D00000 D00000 Number of effective words How many words including D0000 are effective D00001 mE number at D00000 i of send data are read beginning Send data Effective from D00001 Basic Procedure of the Protocol Macro Usage Section 1 11 The receive data is stored in the successive words beginning from D00101 for the number of effective words actually stored in D00100 number of words including D00100 How many words including D00100 are effective Receive data is stored in Effective successive words beginning words from D00101 and the number of effective words is stored in D00100 Number of effective words D00101 Receive data Note Receive data set before the PMCR is executed will not change if re ceive processing fails 2 Execute the PMCR instruction Procedure 8 Confirmation of Operations Refer to SECTION 12 Tracing an
323. munications Board for the C200HX HG HE The modes can not be used with the Serial Communications Unit for the CS CuJ If used a protocol data error will occur when the sequence is executed The following procedure can be used to set monitor times for transmission processing The receive wait time Ts is set for every step Refer to SECTION 8 Step Set ting and Editing 225 Editing Sequences Section 7 2 E 1 2 3 1 Left click the Timer Tr Timer Tfr or Timer Tfs Field and then left click the Enter Button or press the Enter Key The Timer Tr Tfr Tfs Dialog Box will be displayed The following shows a dialog box for the receive wait time Tr Timer Tfr x Value Time Unit o a FA I second Cancel 2 For receive wait time Tr set in the Value Field a monitor time 0 to 99 from recognition of a receive command to reception of the first byte of data For receive finish time Tfr set in the Value Field a monitor time 0 to 99 from reception of the first byte of the data to the last byte of the data For send finish time Tfs set in the Value Field a monitor time 0 to 99 from the transmission of the first byte of the data to the last byte of the data 3 Seta time unit in the Time Unit Field 4 Select the OK Button to accept the settings or the Cancel Button to leave the settings unchanged Note The receive wait time Tr and receive finish time Tfr cannot be set alone Monitor Time Ranges The
324. munications Unit Minimum variation time per Unit 0 25 ms common processing time Maximum variation time per Unit 0 25 ms 0 001 ms x maximum number of words of send receive data 0 to 500 words 201 Cycle Time Performance Section 4 9 202 SECTION 5 Object Creation This section describes how to create objects such as projects protocols sequences steps messages and matrices S21 Creatine Projects and Protocols ieres taken Rew eee leas eee seas 204 STA lt Creaune a New Project 2ac e peed cecl eee nai etai a eed 204 5 1 2 Creatine a New Protocol sis 2342s eteuiadiciehertedeten 205 5 1 3 Renaming a Protocol 014 4 3 4 4 4 50 as ees ee ree oreo es 206 5 1 4 Setting the Protocol Sequence Number Range 207 5 1 5 Setting the Board and Unit anaana aan 207 5 2 Creatine Sequences and Steps 2 o c 0 60445044 wees eee Siew eee ewe a 208 S2 Creatine a New Sequence inigteitesd ren EERTE EREA 208 IFA Cee a NEw SEP ogie Scie iea a dd ose wenden gehen gla ra 208 5 3 Creating Messages and Matrices nnnnnnnn nanan 209 Sa k Creatine a New Messages 0 050200 sa tach toe wide a aN 209 5 3 2 Creati g a New Matiixkecroprcesprcers eee 6 eee dee eee s 210 5 4 System Protocol Display and Editing 0 0 211 5 4 1 Displaying System Protocols 0 0 0 211 5 4 2 Copying System Protocols or Sequences 00005 211 203 Creating Projects and Protocols Section
325. n Modem control mode Flow control mode Software flow Xon Xoff flow control Hardware flow RTS CTS flow control Delimiter control Transmission error control LRC CRC CCITT CRC 16 see note SUM SUM2 mode see note Message format Header Address Length Data Error Check Code Terminator or Header Address Length Data Terminator Error Check Code see note Note It is valid only when the Communications Board is the C20Q0HW COML EV1 e The message length must be 256 bytes or less For a message whose length is 257 bytes or more the data exceeding 256 bytes cannot be sent or received e Data calculation functions are available only for the calculation of five kinds of error check codes the frame length to be sent and the numeral data conversion between ASCII and hexadecimal data only Other opera tions or conversions will be handled by the ladder program if necessary e The signal line cannot be controlled optionally by any mode other than the modem control and the RTS CTS flow control e A process that determines the number of receiving bytes by using the beginning data of a received frame is infeasible e The data in the buffer is cleared before the sequence execution and after the receive command execution Therefore a process that reads bytes one by one from the content of receive buffer cannot be used e Maximum number of processes that can be branched according to received data sent
326. n Protocol Macros Section 1 13 tem C200HX HGIHE CSIC Transmission con trol signal operation RTS signal CTS signal DTR signal Synchronization with the CPU Unit after sequence is executed Receiving data length Send receive messages When RTS CTS flow control is desig nated RTS signal turns ON when the receive buffer on the PMSU side reaches 200 bytes When modem control is designated Turns ON when data is sent and turns OFF when transmission is completed When RTS CTS flow control is desig nated transmission is kept standby when CTS signal is ON and transmis sion becomes possible when CTS sig nal is OFF When modem control is designated Turns ON when sequence execution is started and turns OFF when sequence execution is completed Note Does not turn ON in modes other than the modem control Note When RTS CTS flow control is designated RTS signal turns ON when the receive buffer on the PMSU side reaches approx 2 Kbytes When modem control is designated Turns ON when data is sent and turns OFF when transmission is completed When RTS CTS flow control is designated transmission is kept on standby when CTS signal is ON and transmission becomes possible when CTS signal is OFF When modem control is designated Turns ON when sequence execution is started and turns OFF when sequence execution is completed Under the modem control ON OFF can be controlled at any desired ti
327. n on each field to insert data for each item Mes sage elements will be displayed from left to right in the screen field Name spi 201 ME i atd AT OOOO i c tb EJ a Delete 252 a E Left click the Insert Button in the order of insertion This item selected with the Insert Button will be inserted prior to the highlighted item Use the lt lt or gt gt Button to move the cursor to left or right The header lt h gt can be inserted only at the beginning of a message For deleting an item move the cursor using the lt lt or gt gt Button until it is over the item to be deleted and then left click Delete Note a lt h gt lt t gt lt c gt lt l gt or lt a gt can be deleted from the message con figuration not from the data It can be inserted again by left click ing the Insert Button b As for lt h gt lt t gt lt c gt lt l gt and lt a gt only one item can be positioned in one message A header can be inserted into a message by left clicking the Insert Button on the Header Field If a header already exists in a message or if the cursor is not at the beginning of the message this button cannot be used If a header is to be inserted or if it needs to be modified left click the Edit Button to display the Header lt h gt Dialog Box and then enter or edit the header A terminator can be inserted into a message by left clicking the Insert Button on the Terminator Field If a terminato
328. nal devices PMCR 1345 D0000 m D0000 D1000 PMCR Send data i instruction conversion i process process lt gt lt gt External 1 3 device D1000 process Board Received interrupt data conversion process process lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt 7 6 5 4 The communications response time is total time from 1 to 7 in the above fig ure 195 Communications Response Time Performance 196 Section 4 8 Number Function __ Time Required PMCR instruction process time Send data conversion process time Send data transmission time Received data transmission time Received data conversion process time PMSU interrupt process time 4 External device process time About 40 to 70 us Depends on the number of conversion bytes Number of data characters x one character bit transmission rate Depends on the external device process Number of data characters x one character bit transmission rate Depends on the number of conversion bytes About 50 us The time from the start of PMCR instruction to the end of the data transfer The time required for the send data conversion based on the specified conversion mode which finishes at the start of data sending to the exter nal device The time required for the send data transmission to the external device Use double the calculated time because idle time exists between send characters The time required for the external device pro
329. nal to ON from the start of Protocol Macro execution through the end It sets RTS signal to ON during the data sending The contention control is a data transmission mode which establishes a data link from the data sending terminal before the communication Since mutually communicating terminals have equal priority either terminal can establish the link to send data anytime The delimiter control sends a delimiter which has been set by the send code at the end of the send data if no terminator is defined for the send mes sage At the next step it does not send until it receives a delimiter which has been set by the receive code from the communicating terminal If a terminal received a delimiter set by the receive code it sends a delimiter set by the send code and continues the data receiving When the received data exceeds 200 bytes for the C200HX HG HE or exceeds the maximum receive bytes for the CS CJ in the RTS CTS flow control the Xon Xoff flow control or the delimiter control mode For the C200HX HG HE The received data is 200 bytes maximum a step in the RTS CTS flow control the Xon Xoff flow control or the delimiter control If more than 200 bytes of data are expected to be received it will necessary to design the sequence to receive them using multiple steps Example When receiving 300 bytes Command Send Receive Next process message message Send amp A command 200 bytes Next Receive oi _ Receve
330. ncorrect setting values If 26813 is ON the port B has a problem e The PMSU does not support the protocol macro function The protocol macro error PMCR instruction relating error occurred The details are registered as error codes e The PMSU system DM 6550 to DM 6559 is not set to the protocol macro mode e The PMSU does not support the protocol macro function The sequence number is not present The received data overflowed when writing it in the I O memory The PMSU data error Replace the PMSU and reconnect the power Rewrite the protocol data by using the Protocol Support Tool e Check the PMSU system setting con tents of the problem port and restart the system e Use a PMSU which supports the protocol macro function Take necessary actions in accordance with the error codes e Check the PMSU sys tem setting contents of the problem port e Use the PMSU which supports the protocol macro function Reset the first operand of the PMCR instruc tion Otherwise transfer the sequence number to the PMSU Specify another area Otherwise reduce the receive data size Rewrite the protocol data by using the Protocol Support Tool 183 Communications Response Time Performance Section 4 8 a a S tio The data send 28909 is ON Port A or 28913 is ON receive is not Port B well executed despite the PMCR instruc 28304 is ON Port A or 28312 is ON tlon executi
331. nd CS1 was globally changed to CS or CS CJ as applicable Pages xi xii 2 5 6 33 38 42 46 47 48 54 109 207 to 212 214 228 238 255 256 260 262 270 281 283 284 287 288 298 299 and 334 Minor correc 4 tions and additions including changes to icon graphics Page 116 Changed 12 to 15 in the second CRC equation Page 117 Changed MSB diagram and 12 to 15 in CRC algorithm 0 December 2003 PC was changed to PLC throughout the manual except where it is referring to a personal computer and information on CS1D PLCs was added The following changes were also made Page xi Updated list of manuals Page xii Updated table Page xiv Added version upgrade summary Page 5 Updated table of supported PLCs Page 7 Added information on Communications Board for SYSMAC Alpha Pages 43 44 Added Windows operating systems supported by CX Protocol Page 44 Added new instructions to procedure Page 45 Added information on installing Windows XP Page 106 Added information for CS CJ series PLCs and removed Note 2 Page 107 Added information on CS CJ series PLCs to variable format Page 111 Changed fourth to third and third to second in first example in table Page 112 Swapped diagrams in last two rows of table at bottom of page Page 287 Added step 5 to procedure 365 Revision History Revision code Dae Revised content 05 February 2005 Page v Si
332. nd Ends the sequence Abort Aborts the step and ends the sequence Step No 00 N error process Normal end Y next process To step No n To step No m Step No n next process N error process 3 1 4 Setting Transmission Mode Any condition not listed under conditions for error process Any condition not listed under conditions for error process Compares the actual received message with a maximum of 15 kinds of expected message and depending on the contents switches the next process as required Goto Goes to a designated step Next Goes to the next step End Ends the sequence Abort Aborts the step and ends the sequence Step No m N error process Receive E Y next step End With the protocol macro function half duplex mode or full duplex mode can be selected so as to match the transmission mode for the destination device Note 1 Half duplex Mode For communications between two devices data can only be sent one way at a given time or 72 Protocol Macro Outline Section 3 1 2 Full duplex Mode For communications between two devices data can be sent both ways simultaneously In half duplex mode the receive buffer is cleared just before sequence ex ecution and just after completion of send operations Send Send amp Receive commands Any data received before or during a send operation cannot be received as data f
333. nd data Receive data E5LIK Temperature E5LIK Temperature E5LIK Temperature Controller Controller Controller Unit No 00 Unit No 01 Unit No 31 Q A v Maximum 32 Units Ladder Programming Method Section 4 4 e The Send Receive Word Allocation Contents of the Sequence No 000 read process value 0 First word of send gala 1 Undefined a a T Number of send data words 4 digits 0002 fixed hexadecimal 1 Unit No 2 digits BCD 00 to 31 Receive data ii Number of receive data words storage words P Process value a a Number of receive data words 0002 2 digits hexadecimal Number of send data words a Process value 4 digits BCD Scaling lower limit to upper limit e PMCR Instruction Operand Setting Contents In this case the Unit No 03 E5LIK process value is read received and stored in DM 0201 C v data Hexadecimal Inner board Serial Communications Board 2 Hexadecimal Port 2 0 Hexadecimal Communications port Internal logic port No 0 Foo pucr od none 0000 Hexadecimal Sequence No 000 S The first word number of the send data S D00100 15 0 S D001001 00 02 Number of send data words 2 S 1 D00101 00 03 Unit No 03 D The first word number of the receive data storage D D00200 15 0 D D00200 Number of send data words 2 D 1 D00201 Process value is stored BCD 4 digit 161 Ladder Pro
334. ndard sys tem protocol Transmitting no data to the PSB F000 Set the constant 0000 when transmitting no data e In the following cases set the fourth operand of the PMCR instruction to the constant 0000 or to a dummy word e f an operand designated writing variable is not used in the sequence to be performed e f there is no receive data word allocation when using the standard sys tem protocol Storing no data to the data area on the PLC Set the constant 0000 when there is no receive data The following describes the system s operation when executing the ladder p 1 rogram shown in 3 8 3 Creating Ladder Programs When executing a PMCR instruction the system transmits the information set in the operand of the PMCR instruction such as the starting sequence number and communications data storage area and turns ON the Protocol Macro Execution Flag 191915 The PMSU reads the communication sequence with the appropriate se quence number set in the PMCR instruction The system sends RXO Channel No 00 as the command measuring the temperature of the Temperature Controllers designated channel to the unit number 00 of the E5ZE Temperature Controller stored in DM0001 The system receives RX00 as the response from the Temperature Con troller 00 means the end code from the E5ZE with unit number 00 to store the next measured temperature into D00101 and D00102 through the PLC scan The sy
335. nections Section 11 Protocol Data Transferring and Printing describes details of the transferring converting and printing of protocol data Section 12 Tracing and Monitoring describes details of PLC memory area monitoring and the trans mission line tracing Section 13 Error and Error Log Display describes details of the displaying of errors and the error log Section 14 Troubleshooting lists the error messages and describes their causes and remedies Section 15 Help describes the online help services Appendix A Creating the Protocol Applications shows some examples of data transmission between personal computers using the protocol macro function Appendix B PLC Setup and PMSU Settings provides the settings for the PLC Setup and PMSU Appendix C Wiring RS 232C Cable Connectors describes how to wire RS 232C connectors The CS Series CJ Series NSJ Series and CP Series are subdivided as shown below CS CJ NSJ CP Series CS Series CJ Series NSJ Series CP Series J2 CPU Units CS1 H CPU Units NSJ Controllers CP1H CPU Units ETE z CJ2H CPU6 NSJ5 TQ NSJ5 SQ CJ2H CPU6 ea NSJ10 TV NSJ12 TS CS1H CPU V1 CS1G CPULIL V1 NSJ Controllers NSJ5 TQ NSJ5 SQ NSJ8 TV CS1D CPU Units for
336. nexpected file format An attempt was made to open afile Check that the file format is one that can be that cannot be opened with the opened with the CX Protocol CX Protocol Warning The selected A PLC has been selected that does Select a different PLC PLC does not support the Pro not support Protocol Macro function tocol Macro function Connec tion to the device from CX Protocol will not be allowed Errors Symptom o Cause Aton PLC Error light C200HX HG HE If FAL code is 9C C200HX HG HE check 268CH value Communication Board error occurs by referring page 140 in this manual CS CuJ If A40208 is ON Inner Board CS CJ check A424CH value by error Occurs referring page 140 in this manual PMSU RDY light flashing PMSU Error Confirm downloaded protocol and download again Unexpected delay transferring proto Either more data is being transferred Disconnect the cable to stop the trans cols to or from the PMSU than was expected communications fer have failed slow performance com puter Unable to find a file to open from the The Open dialog is not displaying the Check the folder name described in the Open dialog correct folder and or file type Look in field is the right folder Check the file type described in the Files of type field Start Stop and Upload Trace opera The PLC is offline or the PMSU trace is Re establish PLC communications or tions disabled on buttons menu not select
337. ng is invalid Enter a valid value 331 Troubleshooting Section 14 iver Message Symptom Gauss aeon Incorrect object code specifica tion on unit Interrupt number is larger than the maximum allowed value Invalid constant data Setting message address type to NONE CX Protocol does not support con nected Protocol Macro specification or CX Protocol does not recognize the PMSU Interrupt Address longer than the maximum Try a different PMSU or establish connec tion with PLC again Change the Interrupt Address so it is within the permissible range demonstrated by the error message Constant ASCII or Constant selected Specify valid constant type and enter valid for Address lt a gt but no valid data entered data again Length lt l gt defined in message A Length lt l gt entry has been made in Specify a Length area to an entry but no length area selected Length is larger than the maxi mum allowed values the Message Data dialog but the length has not been specified for an appropriate entry Link Channel Address length longer than the maximum of 128 words Change the Length so it is within the per missible range demonstrated by the error message Maximum items within message Too many items have been supplied Reconfigure the message data so the data is 96 to the message data items limit is not exceeded Maximum number of communi cati
338. ng times For the CS CJ when the message length reaches the maximum number of bytes under PLC Setup allocated DM area m 9 m 19 For the C200HX HG HE when the message length reaches 256 bytes with no flow control or when the message length reaches 200 bytes with flow control When delimiting factors in the following data terminator constants allow data size recognition Note Constants will be recognized as delimiters only up to 4 bytes When using wildcards always set a terminator If the wildcards are set at the data sizes of consecutively designated vari ables words write Separated by only the first variable word write is effective For example W 1 W 10 is equal to W 1 If the wildcards are set at the data sizes of consecutively designated vari ables words write or variables words read Separated by only the first variable word write is effective For example W 1 R 2 8 is equal to W 1 If s separated by a constant or a check code of less than 5 bytes are des ignated between variables words write the data sizes of which are set as wildcards the constant or the check code is deemed a delimiter For example if 12345ABC5678 is received while W 1 ABC W 10 is set 12345 corresponds to W 1 and 5678 corresponds to W 10 If s separated by a constant or an error chec
339. ngs unchanged Note The display in the Length Field will be as shown below 0 1Byte BIN Conversion type Size Example Default value Note Set the calculation range in the Data Field of the Message Editor Di alog Box Address lt a gt Use the following procedure to set the address The address types are as shown in the following table Drop down list item Constants Constant ASCII pe Consanthexadeeinal E Variable hexadecimal with hexadecimal conversion amp 1 1 Variable reverse 1 1 Variable ASCII with reverse conversion 1 1 Variable hexadecimal with reverse conversion amp 4 1 1 2 3 1 Left click the Address lt a gt Field and then left click the Enter Button or E press the Enter Key The Message Address lt a gt Dialog Box will be dis played The dialog box can also be displayed from the Message Editor Di alog Box Refer to the previous descriptions for the header lt h gt Message Address a Constant ASCII Constant HE eae Variable Variable ASCII Variable HEX Variable Reverse 1 feeb Oro Oana ese l Select an address type from the Type drop down list 2 For Constant ASCII enter characters in the Data Field 247 Creating Messages Channel 248 Section 9 1 For Constant HEX left click the HEX Button to enter hexadecimal values into the Data Field Note For the input methods refer to the previous descriptions for the head er lt h g
340. nit Upload Communica Uploads the communications port settings of the Yes tions Port Settings Board or Unit Download Communi Downloads the communications port settings of Yes cations Port Settings the Board or Unit to the PLC Start Trace Selected when executing the continuous tracing or Yes one shot tracing Stop Trace Selected when stopping the continuous tracing or Yes one shot tracing Upload Trace Uploads the results of continuous tracing or one Yes shot tracing to the project IO Table See note _ Sets or edits the I O table Se Memory See note Monitors or edits the contents of I O memory area of the PLC Error Log See note Displays the error contents and history of the PLC CPU Unit Tools CX Net Used for specifying the settings required for net work communications such as the routing table or data link Customize Customizes the tool bars or commands a e a o E o Cascade Shows windows in cascade status poo Tile Shows windows aid verica o po a S Currently E Makes the selected window active Windows 1 2 3 Help Topics Shows the search topic in CX Protocol s Help About About CX Protocol Protocol Shows the version of CX Protocol y Note Disabled for an NJ series CPU Unit 2 5 4 Pop up Menus When one of the following objects is selected right click or press the Shift F10 Keys and a pop up menu will be displayed according to the hierar chy Pop up Edi
341. nstall CX Server CX Server communications driver Error displaying the IO Table An error has occurred with the Reinstall CX Server CX Server communications driver Error occurred during the A communications error occurred Retry the upload operation upload of Trace data from the while uploading the trace data PMSU Attempting to upload a trace without Check the connections and try again the expected response from the PMSU Error Could not run the com The protocol data selected for down Check the connections and PMSU settings piler for target load could not be compiled prior to and try again download Error No valid compiler for tar The protocol data selected for down Install CX Protocol and try again get load could not be compiled prior to download because of no compiler module in the application folder Expression constant factor A primary expression constant coeffi Enter a valid expression constant coeffi value is outside the permitted cient in variable has been entered cient demonstrated by the error message range exceeding allowed value Failed to connect to the PLC Communications have failed Retry the connection or cancel the dialog and check the PC to PLC communications settings Failed to create the Data Moni An error has occurred with the Reinstall CX Server tor OCX CX Server communications driver Failed to create the Error Log An error has occurred with the Reinstall CX
342. nterrupt notification is used with the CS series Serial Communica tions Board the protocol macro status area within the interrupt data area will not be updated completely when the interrupt notification is received Therefore read the receive data only after the external interrupt task condi tions have been satisfied in order to ensure concurrent data processing The PMCR instruction cannot be executed within the external interrupt task 82 Sequence Attributes Common to All Steps Section 3 2 that has been started using the interrupt notification An execution error will occur 3 2 6 Monitoring Time Users designate the time for monitoring the send or receive process The fol lowing types of monitor time can be designated However Ts send wait time is omitted here because the value is set step by step Set the monitoring time by sequence only as described below in the shaded area Monitoring time Description Commandtype Commandtype Receive Send amp Receive Receive wait Monitors the time from when the receive command of the step in the monitoring time sequence is recognized receive command execution until the first Tr byte header is received When receiving no data in the designated Tr Note 1 the system executes the error process set in the step Receive finish Monitors the time from reception of the first byte to reception of the monitoring time last byte of the data in the step in the sequence When re
343. nversion 40 us hexadecimal conversion 55 us 6 The receive data conversion process time 100 us one byte conversion time x number of conversion bytes one byte conversion time No conversion 15 us ASCII conversion 30 us hexadecimal conversion 15 us Cycle Time Performance Section 4 9 e The Overhead at 1 N Connection When the link word area or the direct addressing area is used the send data is transferred from the CPU Unit at every step therefore time is required before the actual start of the data sending as follows e When the link word area is used The total time of 2 3 in the above figure the link word e When the direct addressing is used The total time of 2 3 in the above figure the direct addressing These times are not required if the event operand addressing area is used because the beginning of sequence only in the send data is transferred from the PLC s CPU Unit 4 9 Cycle Time Performance When using the protocol macro function with the PMSU the cycle time for the CPU Unit of the CS CJ will vary within the ranges shown below In order to fix the cycle time using the fixed cycle time function at the CPU Unit set a fixed cycle time based on the value for the maximum variation time e Serial Communications Board Minimum variation time 0 25 ms common processing time Maximum variation time 0 25 ms 0 001 ms x maximum number of words of send receive data 0 to 500 words 1 3 ms e Serial Com
344. o 1 4 System Configuration 2 PLC setup of the CPU Unit and the PMSU PLC Setup for Connecting the PLC to the CX Protocol Perform the following setups a and b The communications conditions designated in a and b must be coherent a Using the CX Protocol designate a target PLC model and perform communications setup between the personal computer and the PLC b Using a Programming Device for PLC s CPU Unit perform PLC setup according to a connected port e When connected to the peripheral port Communications setup of the peripheral port DM 6650 to DM 6654 in the PLC setup area e When connected to the CPU Unit s built in RS 232C port Communications setup of the RS 232C port DM 6645 to DM 6649 in the PLC setup area For both the peripheral port and the CPU Unit s built in RS 232C port make the default settings start bit 1 bit data length 7 bits parity even stop bit 2 bits baud rate 9600 bps to correspond to 0000 in DM 6650 for the peripheral port and DM 6645 for the CPU Unit s built in RS 232C port respectively PLC Setup for the PMSU Use one of the following methods to perform PLC setup of the PMSU port A B c Using a Programming Device for the PLC s CPU Unit perform the fol lowing PLC setup PMSU PLC setup Port A DM 6555 to DM 6559 in the PLC setup area Port B DM 6550 to DM 6554 in the PLC setup area Example Setting the Default Communications Conditions Communications conditions of Port A 0 indic
345. o Save File Comment The area presently open is displayed A comment can be entered in File Comment if required 2 Select the area to be saved Left click the OK Button to start saving the ar ea Note When deleting PLC data in project select Properties from the Display Menu and perform the deletion from the File Tab Saving as Different File MEM File 1 2 3 1 Select Save to File from the File Menu in the PLC memory window The Save Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Select the area to be saved and left click the OK Button The Save Dialog Box will be displayed Save As Save irr Sq C Protocol File name CS1H omer Save az type Data Monitor Memory merc Cancel 3 Set the file name and location where the file is to be saved Left click the Save Button to start saving the data 12 3 3 Writing Same Data to Successive Addresses Use the following procedure to write the same data to the designated cell line or row 310 I O Memory Display and Editing Section 12 3 Writing Same Data to As an example the procedure for writing FFFF hexadecimal into D0030 is Designated Line given 1 2 3 1 Select and highlight the cell In the following example row D0030 is select ed and highlighted Drag the cursor to the left to select the entire line DOO O CC OOD FFFF 1500 HOG E aT re ec re re ere onean anria Eran eeeselkenuaeerenpanes Raecisea seg ped eateunabeeesneuu
346. o Unit power again restart or auto restart C200HX HG HE Or execute the STUP instruction CIO 268 bit 15 CS Cd only Those settings for which there is an error will return to the default settings Port Port operating CS CJ ClO CS CJ only The communications After pro operation 1906 CIO 1916 port s serial communications mode tocol data words n 6 is set to Protocol Macro Set to 0 is sent N 16 bit 00 OFF when a protocol data error C200HX HG HE Occurs Set to 1 ON in all other None cases 141 Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas Section 3 10 Port Port 1 2 Serial CS CJ Board CS CJ and C200HX HG HE The operation Communications A636 bit 01 02 communications port is restarted operation Port Setting Unit A620 Unit when this flag goes from 0 to 1 or STUP Changes Flag No bits 01 02 instruc Port Restart C200HX HG HE tion exe Flag CIO 289 bits cuted 00 01 Protocol Protocol Macro CS CJ ClO CS CJ and C200HX HG HE Set to Instruc Instruc macro Execution Flag 1909 CIO 1919 1 ON when the PMCR instruction tion exe tion com n 9 n 19 bit 15 sequence is executed Returns to cuted pleted C200HX HG HE 0 OFF if execution fails CIO 289 bits Set to O OFF after sequence is 08 12 completed and all reception data has been written to I O memory Set to O OFF when sequence is com pleted whether sequence is com pleted normally or using Abort See note 2 Protocol Macro CS C
347. o be applied divide the retry into the Send step and Receive step 5 Hold process ON Open command and process OFF Close command of the DTR signal only for the CS CJ protocol macro The DTR signal will turn ON when a sequence execution is started Exe cute the Close command to turn OFF the DTR signal at the desired timing Execute the Open command to turn ON the DTR signal again at the de sired timing When the Open command is executed the DTR signal will be set to ON until the Close command is executed This ON state will continue even after one sequence is terminated and another sequence is started Sequence Another sequence ae A Open Close command command aay SR EANN RRR si oe K 3 ie snares Ea es i 3 S Lo Z se ee fe soi 4 A S i Spe ie Bei ess eres ai ge ree GSi DTR signal f tr o a n u Close Open Close command command command When the transmission control parameter is set to modem control for the conventional protocol macro for the C200HX HG HE the DTR signal will turn ON when a sequence is started and will turn OFF when sequence ex ecution is completed This setting has the following problems e When hanging up the phone in the middle of a sequence execution via a modem it will be necessary to send an escape code for example and an AT command to cut the line to the modem However hanging up the phone can be performed more easily and reliably using elec
348. o the window size of the PLC data table Prompt before closing an active monitor window A prompt message will be displayed when closing the window being monitored Beep on invalid input An alarm is sounded when an inappropriate input is made Fast window update Makes the renewal speed for display data faster Note If the Fast window update setting is enabled the speed at which data is renewed will increase but the display may flicker 2 Select the function and left click the OK Button Settings in File Tab Use the following procedure to edit the comment The file name and comment will be displayed when I O memory data is saved in the file by selecting Save to File from the File Menu 1 2 3 1 Select the File Tab from the Property For New Windows Dialog Box Properties For New Window Display Monitoring General File File Hame E Program Files Urmronila rotocohks 1H m Comment PLC Memory DM EM of L51H LPUBE The comment input when saving the data will be displayed This comment can be edited from this screen Cancel Help 2 Enter comments in the Comment Field 3 Click the OK Button Note With the CX Protocol the Delete Button is not available in the File property 308 I O Memory Display and Editing Section 12 3 12 3 I O Memory Display and Editing 12 3 1 Displaying I O Memory 1 2 3 1 Double click the name of the area to be displayed in the data area work space
349. oard to the position Ctrl V designated Delete Deletes the range designated Da Move Scrolls the steps or matrix case upwards or down wards to the top or bottom View Toolbar Shows or hides the project tool bar e Status Bar Shows or hides the status bar e Project Workspace Moves the cursor to the project workspace Output Moves the cursor to the output window Sa Scrolls the displayed hierarchy portion in the Esc project window to the one upper Switches over the focus among the project work Tab space project window and output window Proto Create Selected when newly creating a protocol list proto col col sequence step message matrix matrix case Upload Protocol List Displays the name list of protocols in Boards or Units Upload Protocols Transfers the protocol of the Board or Unit to the Yes project Download Protocols Transfers the protocol created in the project to the Yes Board or Unit Compare Protocols Compares the protocols in the project with those in Yes a Board or Unit fe ae SS Ss ee _ 52 Outline of User Interface Section 2 5 key PLC Connect to PLC Connects the PLC to online Se ee Operating Mode Switches among the PLC operation modes Se Edit PC PLC Comms _ Sets the PLC model and communications Settings specifications between the PLC and computer Edit Communications Sets the communications specifications of the Port Settings communications port of the Board or U
350. ocess to PLC s O memory into receive frames messages themselves Addresses destina tions or data can be written into the PLC during the receive process Easy realization of rich functions including 1 N communications and switching data write destinations using repetition variables Lets you designate repeat variables for send receive process repeat counter in variables With this function a wide variety of process can be easily real ized for example sending the same data to multiple addresses destinations by switching them during 1 N communications switching write destination addresses in PLC s I O memory during data receive process Execute interrupt program on the PLC while receiving data Enables interrupt program execution on the PLC CPU Unit while receiving data The interrupt function is supported only by the Communications Board for the C200HX HG HE and Serial Communications Board for the CS It can not be used with the Serial Communications Unit for the CS Cu Switch the next process depending on the received data The next process can be switched according to the data comparison with the data registered to the maximum of 15 types The following functions have been added to the protocol macro for the CS CJ Error check code only for the CS CJ protocol macro LRC2 2 s complement of LRC and SUM1 1 s complement of SUM have been added to the error check codes Features Section 1 2 Wait command to kee
351. ocol data is transferred with the password protection input a pass word prior to uploading protocol data A message indicating that protocol data is being transferred and the progress will be displayed on the status bar When transfer is completed the message Decompiler Compiled OK will be displayed Left click the OK Button 288 Transferring and Reading Protocol Data between the Computer and PMSU Section 11 1 The transferred protocol data will be displayed in the project workspace left pane with date and time of the transfer displayed after Uploaded Pro tocols FX AMIPLE 1 psw ne B33 EX Protocol List 3 El a TEMP COMM ce Temp comm Sequence ai send Whessage List _ Recelve Message List Be Matrix List Sie ee S Matrix z CAT Protocol List Hi Controller E5_K react i Uploaded Protocols 11713798 7 56 35 PM ASS Trace List i aii NewPLOt Program C081G cPU45 Comparing Protocols in Boards Units with Protocols in Projects This function compares the protocols in one Board or Unit with the protocols in a project It is also possible to compare the protocols of multiple Boards or Units at the same time with the protocols in the project Use the following procedure to compare the protocols 1 2 3 1 Connect online to the PLC 2 Double click the Protocol List Icon in the Project Workspace on the left roo The protocols will be displayed in the Project Workspace on the right 3 Specif
352. oes not support EM banks Information including EM data areas has been supplied for download to a PLC which does not support EM data areas E1052 PLC xxx CPUyy supports zz EM banks Information including EM data areas has been supplied for download to a PLC which supports EM data areas but exceeds number of EM bank E1053 Link Word IN1 is not defined or invalid Link channel 1 is specified in message but not specified in Link channel information or invalid setting in Link channel information E1054 Link Word OUT1 is not defined or invalid Link channel O1 is specified in message but not specified in Link channel information or invalid setting in Link channel information E1055 Link Word IN2 is not defined or invalid Link channel I2 is specified in message but not specified in Link channel information or invalid setting in Link channel information E1056 Link Word OUT2 is not defined or invalid Link channel O2 is specified in message but not specified in Link channel information or invalid setting in Link channel information E1058 Area xxx Channel yyy out of range Channel address is out of range for target PLC E1060 Check code lt c gt LRC2 not supported on this unit CS CJ protocols only error The Check Code type is invalid for PSB E1061 Check code lt c gt SUM1 1byte not supported on CS CJ protocols only error The Check Code type is invalid this unit for PSB E1062 Check code lt c gt SUM1 2 byte not suppo
353. oftware to OMRON within the above warranty period OMRON will replace the defective media without charge If OMRON is unable to replace the defective media or correct the Software the liability of OMRON and the User s remedy shall be limited to a refund of the license fee paid to OMRON for the Software LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY 1 THE ABOVE WARRANTY SHALL CONSTITUTE THE USER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AGAINST OMRON AND THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT WILL OMRON BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR OTHER INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF USE OF THE SOFTWARE 2 OMRON SHALL ASSUME NO LIABILITY FOR DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE BASED ON MODIFICATION OR ALTERATION OF THE SOFTWARE BY THE USER OR ANY THIRD PARTY 3 OMRON SHALL ASSUME NO LIABILITY FOR SOFTWARE DEVELOPED BY THE USER OR ANY THIRD PARTY BASED ON THE SOFTWARE OR ANY CONSEQUENCE THEREOF XVI Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE THE USER SHALL NOT USE THE SOFTWARE FOR A PURPOSE THAT IS NOT DESCRIBED IN THE ATTACHED USER MANUAL xvii Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS The software specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements or for other reasons EXTENT OF SERVICE The license fee of the Software does not include service costs such as dispatching technic
354. oject Window Standard system protocol project window Title bar Cx Protocol Paw ee fe Menu bar File Edit wiswi Pencnenl PLE Teanls Wtindrw Help Tool bar S E e SUPINE eI ele a H System Frotocols 5 x FZ zs Mew Frotocol List ETE T Controller ESK read T Temp Controller ESZE read e sae is abe F aa oe Hayes modem 4T sommands ig 552 Password verify a SeN SCAN p pe Trace List ca bos Data sendt ecewe os Set scan LU sec E hewPLC Offline OS1H GPLUS7 ce 554 Escape mode Scan 10 sec B cee 555 On hook command aa Ss Scan 10 sec Project workspace es ce BGO Modeminitidize MDS4Fe1OW 9 Set Scan 10 sec E g3 561 Dia MD24 FEN Ov Set Scan co sec z3 562 Initdize da AD24FB10 ae Set Scan CO sec E z 570 Modeminitidize MADI 44FE5W Set Scan 10 sec Ks g3 571 Cid MD144Fe6 W Set Scan CO sec i fi cae BT Initaize da MDI 44 FES vi men Set Sc an CO Sec a 37 580 Modem initidize ME1414B2 EEJ Set Scan 10 sec gt Prajects hal system s4 Help 4 3 581 Did MEI 41468 aes Set Scan CO sec SE c 582 Initidize da ME141 452 Set Scan CO sec eel ce elie Se m a z Z Project window Status bar For Help press F Project tab System tab Project Window The contents of the data highlighted in the project workspace is displayed By double clicking the icon on the left edge of the screen the contents of the data
355. om and write to the I O memory of PLC and utilize repeat counter variables 1 Format Designate in the form of X Y X Effective address Designates where to read from or write to in the I O memory the lin ear expression including N or the wildcard One of the following can be used to designate items Communication Message Attributes Section 3 4 1 2 3 Note Variable a Both the read write options and the first word the linear expression including N b Linear expression including N c Wildcard Note Wildcard can be designated only in the receive message y Data size CS CJ 1 to 1000 C200HX HG HE 1 to 255 Designates the number of bytes to read or to write when the data are not converted Designates 1 when reading the value of N Designates the number of bytes on the transmission when the data are converted The number of bytes on I O memory are as follows Data size on the I O memory amp Hexadecimal ASCIl ASCII Hexadecimal R Read from the PLC gt Send Y 2 bytes Y x 2 bytes W Receive Write to the PLC Y x 2 bytes Y 2 bytes One of the following can be used for designate items 1 Linear expression including N 2 Wildcard Note Wildcard can be designated only in the receive message 3 Both the read option and first word the linear expression including N when using C200HX HG HE series PLCs Note Reads bits 0 to 11 of the word as 3 digit BCD When using CS
356. on Left click the Copy Icon on the toolbar or press the Ctrl C Keys Alternatively right click to display the pop up menu and select Copy from the menu It can also be selected from the Edit Menu Select the sequence or display in the project window the step list where the copied step is to be pasted Left click the Paste Icon on the toolbar or press the Ctrl V Keys Alterna tively right click to display the pop up menu and select Paste from the menu It can also be selected from the Edit Menu The pasted step will be positioned at the end of the sequence and the next step number available will be given to that step 237 Step Editing Section 8 2 238 SECTION 9 Setting and Editing Messages and Matrix Lists This section describes details of the setting and editing of messages and matrix lists Ik Creatine Messages esi wets ae eee BR SE SEE Ae eee Rs 240 Orlel Creating a New Messac t os 2ccuxgcN ert esate us tate 240 9 1 2 Messdve Setting Screen si 86 5b4tee be hewe eee eeotersedeceas 241 9 3 GContents Ol Messaces n t nasa oor eda ote ewe ute ee bate boo es 241 J Mata Cedok 6 age e bien t uo edna bd che Se rk ae See eh es BA 254 9 2 1 Creating a New Maik sccihad cite cio ete kw te aketees 254 9 2 2 Creating a New Matrix Case cevis cetris osre ren 254 9 2 3 Editing a Message in the Matrix Case 00008 299 9 2 4 Defining the Next Matrix Case Process 0004 255 9 3 Message
357. on Port B The Instruc tion Execution Flag is ON 28908 is Port A 28912 is Port B Communica 28304 is ON Port A or 28312 is ON tions with the Port B connected devices is impossible PMCR instruc ER Flag 25503 is ON tions are not executed The step is executed the error pro cess during the sequence because the receive message does not match with the expected receive message The communications error occurred during the message receive This error occurred due to an abnor mal communications route to the con nected devices or by a communications condition setting fail ure The details are registered as error codes 28300 to 03 Port A 28608 to 11 Port B This error occurs by the instruction operand setting failure Search the error cause and add the appropriate process Confirm the communications route to the connected devices e Restart the problem port or initialize each relay by executing the RXD and PMCR instructions e Confirm the communi cations route e Check the communica tions condition setting Check the instruction operand 4 8 Communications Response Time Performance The response performance of communications with the external devices using PMCR instruction which varies according to the definition of the Protocol Macro is divided in the following four modes e Use the event operand addressing areas e Use the interrupt mode for the response
358. on 7 us hexadecimal reverse conversion 7 us 6 The receive data conversion process time 2 ms one byte conversion time x number of conversion bytes One byte conversion time No conversion 1 us reverse conversion 4 us ASCII conversion 8 us ASCII reverse conversion 9 us hexadecimal conver sion 17 us hexadecimal reverse conversion 17 us Communications Response Time Performance Section 4 8 e The Overhead at 1 N Connection When the link word area or the direct addressing area is used the send data is transferred from the CPU Unit at every step therefore time will be required before the actual start of the data sending as follows e When the link word area is used The total time of 2 3 in the above figure the link word The total time of 2 3 in the above figure the direct addressing These times are not required if the event operand addressing area is used because the beginning of Sequence only in the send data is transferred from the PLC s CPU Unit 4 8 2 C200HX HG HE e When the direct addressing is used e Communications Response Time Using the Event Operand Addressing Area Illustrated below is the data flow when the communications area addressed by the second and the third operand of the PMCR instruction is used CPU Unit Board External device PMCR 1234 D0000 D0000 D1000 PMCR Send data Eoo a instruction c
359. on 2 5 To switch over the focus between these two windows press the Tab Key or select Swap Focus from the View Menu or left click either of the screens Focused Frotocol System Protocols Edt View Ptocol PLO Tools Window Help ster Provocals Fe EXAMPLE psw H Sy 8 Systen Protocols i St Py System Protocols H Controller E5_K reach 00 ACL eee H Qontroller E5_K write 4 Temp Controller ESZE read H e Temp Controller ESZE write i 101 Toe eee read el set f Temp Controller 65 ce 102 Output variable read ee Set H Controller 3100 a ce 109 5et mes temp output var read Set B Intell Sisnal Processor K3T ce 104 Propo band Inte Deri time read ae Set H Bar Code Reader 500 W520 gg 105 Control period read n a Lazer Micro Meter Z4 cg 106 Output mode read a Set Visual Inspe SystF200 300 350 cg 107 Alarm mode read Set Selecting Elements in Use the mouse Up Down Left or Right Key or Function Key to select the Projects elements in projects pox Trace list gt The following operations are available without the mouse e Use the Up or Down Key while the focus is in either of the screens To scroll up or down on the tree in the project workspace To scroll up or down the rows of the tables in the project window e Press the Esc Key or the Backspace Key to shift to the next higher level e Press the Page Up or Page Down Key to scroll up or down by a whole screen
360. on 4 1 4 1 4 1 1 152 Applicable Range of the Protocol Macro Function CS CJU Using the Protocol Support Tool allows users to create several communica tions sequence or protocol compatible with communications control modes discussed in this section However they are not compatible with communica tions control modes such as the synchronous communication frame synchro nous mode HDLC High level Data Link Communications etc Half duplex or full duplex Synchronizing mode Start step synchronization mode Transmission control mode Contention mode Point to point connection Polling selecting mode Point to multi point connection Modem control mode Flow control mode Software flow Xon Xoff flow control Hardware flow RTS CTS flow control Delimiter control LRC LRC2 CRC CCITT CRC 16 SUM SUM1 SUM2 mode Message format Header Address Length Data Check Code Terminator or Header Address Length Data Terminator Error Check Code e The maximum message length can be set to a desired value in a range from 200 to 1 000 bytes based on the allocated DM area of the PMSU The default is 200 bytes A message exceeding 1 000 bytes cannot be sent or received When using a wildcard for the data length the maximum receive mes sage length will be the same as this length setting 200 to 1000 bytes e Data calculation functions are available only for the calculation of seven kinds of error check codes calcu
361. on in Using CQM1H Serial Communications Board When using CQM1H Serial Communications Board with either of the commu nications ports set to NT link 1 N you cannot transfer protocol data to the other port by using CX Protocol When you want to transfer protocol data to the Serial Communications Board set its serial communications port to any of the settings other than NT link 1 N before transfer and set it to NT link 1 N after transfer before using the Serial Communications Board Note The following restrictions exist when using the CX Protocol to create and edit protocol macros transferring data between the Board and personal computer or performing other functions for the CQM1H System Configuration Section 1 4 e Always turn ON pin 8 on the DIP switch on the front on the CQM1H CPU Unit When pin 8 is ON you will not be able to connect the peripheral port built in RS 232C port or serial communications ports on Boards mounted in the CPU Unit to the CX Programmer or other Support Soft ware running on a personal computer e Set the device type to C200HG and the CPU type to CPU43 e Other than these restrictions functionality will be the same as for the C200HX HG HE PLCs 1 3 3 Supported Personal Computers Refer to the CX One Setup Manual Cat No W463 for the supported per sonal computers 1 4 System Configuration 1 4 1 Connecting the CX Protocol and the PLC For the CS CJ Connect the peripheral port on
362. on or press the Enter Key The Next Process Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Select Next Process on the Jump Field If Goto is selected enter a se quence step number that will be referred to 4 Left click the OK Button to confirm the setting or Cancel Button to cancel the process 9 3 Message and Matrix Editing 9 3 1 Displaying Messages within the Protocol Use the following procedure to display all the messages within the protocol G 1 2 3 1 Left click the protocol in the project workspace to highlight the protocol or double click the Protocol Icons containing a sequence in the project win dow 2 Double click the Send Message List Icon or Receive Message List Icon on the project window to display all the messages contained in the mes sage list 9 3 2 Renaming a Message Use the following procedure to rename a message in the send or receive message lists Messages belonging to System protocols cannot be changed 1 2 3 1 Left click the Message Name Field to be renamed from the message list Alternatively select Message Name and press the Enter Key 2 Type in a new name for the message and press the Enter Key The new message name must not exceed 10 characters Note The name given to a send message cannot be used for the receive message within a protocol 255 Message and Matrix Editing Section 9 3 9 3 3 Copying a Message Use the following procedure to copy a message within a protocol or between protocols
363. on sequences already cre ated The protocol limit of sequences has been reached Reconfigure the project to ensure the prob lem is not encountered in the future For instance move sequences to another pro tocol Maximum number of protocols The project limit of protocols has Reconfigure the project to ensure the prob already created been reached lem is not encountered in the future Maximum of 300 messages per protocol able within this protocol No sequence numbers avail able within this protocol The protocol limit of Send Receive messages has been reached A name has been supplied to a set ting which is identical for an existing setting The protocol limit of sequences has been reached The sequence start and sequence Reconfigure the project to ensure the prob lem is not encountered in the future For instance create a new protocol for the additional messages Specify a different name in the specified protocol If required reconfigure the project to ensure the problem is not encountered in the future For instance move sequences to another protocol Increase the range of the sequence start end of a protocol does not permit the and sequence end for the protocol and try addition of new sequences again Increase the sequence end first No valid header data setting Header lt h gt dialog has been selected Enter valid data header data type to NONE but no valid data en
364. on to any provided within the PLC to ensure safety Software Operating Procedures N WARNING Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Observe the following precautions when using the CX Protocol Confirm safety before transferring the I O memory area state to the CIO area of the PLC using the PLC memory window function of the CX Protocol Not doing so may cause malfunction in devices connected to the I O Units regard less of the operating mode of the CPU Unit Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a protocol to another node or editing the I O area Doing either of these without confirming safety may result in injury Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before changing the present value of any word in memory Not doing so may result in an unex pected operation Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before changing the operating mode of the CPU Unit Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before force setting force resetting any bit in memory Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before transferring the communications port A B settings to the Protocol Macro Support Unit PMSU Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation Check the user protocol for proper execution before a
365. ons software terminal software Before performing the operations given below connect a personal computer to the modem As an example the operating method will be explained for OMRON s ME5614E modem 1 2 3 1 Turn ON the power supply for the modem 2 Start the personal computer communications software 3 Setthe baud rate and communications format for the communications soft ware in the following way e Set the same baud rate as that of the PLC e Set the communications format to one of the following When serial communications mode is host link Data length 7 bits 271 Modem Connections Section 10 4 Parity even Stop bit 2 bits When serial communications mode is toolbus Data length 8 bits Parity none Stop bit 1 bit Note When the above settings are made and communications are per formed OMRON s ME5614E Modem will automatically recognize and record the settings If a modem without this feature is used make the above settings using AT commands 4 Make settings for the modem by sending AT commands as shown below Example for ME5614E AT amp F Enter ok AT CO N3 amp K3S0 1S30 60X4E0 amp D0 amp Y1 Enter ok AT amp W1 Enter ok e The Enter indicates where the Enter Key should be pressed e The ok means that the modem has accepted the command Meanings of AT Commands and S Registers Used in the Previous Example Command _Settingem Senngs ATF froum factory seting
366. onsists of several steps and allows the user to iterate branch or end these steps according to the result of the process Note 1 In the following section the Communications Board for the C200HX HG HE Serial Communications Board for the CS and CQM1H and Serial Communications Units for the CS CJ are referred to as the PMSU 2 The CJ series protocol macro function of the CJ series Serial Communi cations Unit is used even for the system configuration described below which uses a CP series CPU Unit with a CJ series Serial Communications Unit The CJ Series is thus specified in descriptions unless there is infor mation unique to the CP Series T CX One ZC Protocol creation transmission CPU unit PMSU Specifies sequence number specification Protocol Sequence No 060 099 Command execution Send Receive or Send amp Receive PMCR sequence No RS 232C or RS 422A 485 General purpose external device PLC area Program I O memory ming Shared memo Device a ae 1 2 Features 1 2 1 Features of the Protocol Macro Function Support for a wide range of communications protocols Supports communications with almost all external general purpose devices that have RS 232C or RS 422A 485 ports and support half duplex or full duplex mode full duplex is for CS CJ only and start stop synchronization Features Section 1 2 mode refer to 4 1 Applicable Range of the Protocol
367. onversion Process process lt gt lt gt External 1 3 device rocess gt D1000 Received Received data data writing conversion process EEC ERES wis comers lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt 7 6 5 4 The communications response time is the total time from 1 to 7 in the above figure 193 Communications Response Time Performance 194 Section 4 8 Number Function __ Time Required PMCR instruction pro cess time Send data conversion process time Send data transmission time Received data transmis sion time Received data conversion process time 4 External device process time About 40 to 70 us Depends on the number of conversion bytes Number of data characters x one character bit transmission rate Depends on the external device process Number of data characters x one character bit transmission rate Depends on the number of conversion bytes The time from the start of PMCR instruction to the end of the data transfer The time required for the send data conversion based on the specified conversion mode which finishes at the start of data sending to the external device The time required for the send data transmission to the external device Use double the calculated time because idle time exists between send characters The time required for the external device process according to the PLC s command which finishes by the start of the response data
368. operating parameter setting Controller Protocol for controlling an E5LIK Digital Controller via the PMSU Procedures for writing set points E5_K write and operating parameters Temp Controller Protocol for controlling an E5ZE Temperature Controller via the PMSU Procedures for reading E5ZE read measured temperature and operating parameter setting Temp Controller Protocol for controlling an E5ZE Temperature Controller via the PMSU Procedures for writing E5ZE write control temperatures and operating parameters Temp Controller Protocol for controlling a E5LJ Temperature Controller via the PMSU Procedures for writing set E5_J points reading output amounts and reading writing operating parameters Controller ES100_ Protocol for controlling a ES100_ Temperature Controller via the PMSU Procedures for writing adjustment parameters reading operation amounts and writing reading operating parameters Intelligent Signal Pro Protocol for controlling a Digital Panel Meter via the PMSU Procedures for writing comparison val cessor K3T_ ues and reading display values are set Bar Code Reader Protocol for controlling a Bar Code Reader via the PMSU Procedures for controlling the Bar Code V500 V520 Reader in remote mode reading the data that has been read by the Bar Code Reader and reading writing operating parameters Laser Micro Meter Protocol for controlling a Laser Micrometer via the PMSU Procedures for controlling the L
369. or Section 12 4 Example Data Memory Monitor Screen Note If monitoring is performed the data read from the PLC will be over written with the edited data displayed on the screen For this reason if there is edited data in the PLC data table a save confirmation mes sage will be displayed when monitoring is executed 12 4 2 Address Monitor The address or I O name can be designated in the address monitor table to monitor the data This function is convenient in the following cases Monitoring the data in bits or words of multiple areas in a single table for the purpose of debugging Monitoring the data in bits or words that are not adjacent in the same area e g the data in D00001 and D1000 1 2 3 1 Left click the Address Tab in the data area workspace Z x CSlH PUG 2 Double click here Ey Monitor Se hdernory Address 1 Click here 314 I O Memory Monitor Section 12 4 2 Double click Monitor The following Address Monitor table will be displayed Address Monitor Eje x 3 Input the address or variable and press the Enter Key The data in the designated bits or words will be displayed Example Address Monitor Eel E o Symbol Address Yasue Attribute Properties Format Ma ET 14765 BOO ms Decima Note Set the monitor refreshing cycle in the Monitor Tab by selecting Preferences in the View Menu Force set reset in Address Se
370. or Unit exchanges with external devices can be traced if the PLC is the C200HX HG HE Transmission or reception data and signals of a maximum of 1 700 characters can be traced if the PLC is the CS Cu By tracing the transmission or reception data and signals the contents of each message transmitted or received per step can be checked and com pared with the preset sequence The results of tracing can be saved as data in project files or printed The following types of data can be traced Data type Display Send message Character strings Send and receive messages Hexadecimal data of a maximum of 670 characters with Receive message Character strings C200HX HG HE and a Hexadecimal data maximum of 1 700 characters with CS CJ 0 to 999 CS CJ only Control signal ON OFF transitions of RTS CTS DTR and DSR signals Communications Parity error P framing error F and overrun error O error CS CJ only CS CJ Tracing Screen Res Dust ul Trace Number Z A a A 2 Z 2 2 2 2 Z 2 Z 2 A oeng Message T 0 D F I 4 T E HEX 40 30 30 ae 55 a4 ae ZA OD Receive Message F B Fa 7 T HEX 3F 06 26 2F Ob O68 26 4F eee 338 3386 336 336 326 336 336 J36 336 336 336 336 336 326 J36 336 J3 Step Number 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 D 0 g S Q D D D RTS CTS DTR DSR Comm Error F P F PF P PF gt l 298 Tracing Transmission Lines Section 12 1 C200HX HG HE Tracing Screen Send Message a 0 2 Fi A 0 HE 47 Go 32 amp bb DD FW M
371. or the next receive operation Transmission Clear timing Receive data Character Timing chart example mode for receive trace buffer Half duplex Just before Between Everything Cannes execution of completion of during trace tions sequence communica send operation execution tions Sequence and Poren aner Just after completion of cearo i execution of A operation or Send roves command between completion of send operation pace and just before trace execution of send operation Receive Receive t I 4 t t t i 1 Full duplex Only just before Everything Everything Communica see note 1 execution of during during trace tions sequence communica sequence execution tions sequence execution Bala see note 2 Receive data Character trace Note 1 The full duplex can be used with the RS 232C or the RS 422A 485 1 1 and 4 wire type It cannot be used with the RS 422A 485 1 N or 2 wire type 2 Clearing of receive buffer is performed with the Flush command and will clear the buffer with the desired timing 3 Although data received up until the completion of send operation will be lost it will still be reflected in the character trace 73 Protocol Macro Outline Section 3 1 Note When performing send operation in half duplex mode with the CS Cu there Time lag 74 will be a time lag refer to the table below between completion of processing for sending data and completion of the
372. ork Type O00 Settings made via PLCOOO Comment Cancel By making the above settings PLCOOO becomes the gateway for communica tions with PLC100 To make an online connection right click PLC100 in the project workspace and select Connect to PLC or select Connect to PLC from the PLC Menu Note CX Net PLC Network Configuration Tool is used for performing construction debugging and applications for OMRON PLC networks It is used for the fol lowing e Connecting a PLC to a network e Routing table settings e Data link table settings e Network Support Board NSB settings e Communications Unit software switch settings For details about CX Net refer to Section 13 PLC Network Configuration Tool in the SYSMAC WS02 CXPC1 CX Programmer Operation Manual W344 10 3 Online Connections and Mode Changes 10 3 1 Online Connection Method Use the following procedure for online connections H 1 2 3 1 Right click the PLC Icon and select Connect to PLC from the pop up menu or select Connect to PLC from the PLC Menu 2 When the establishment of online connections is successful the PLC mode RUN PROGRAM or MONITOR will be displayed next to the PLC Icon in the project workspace i e the left pane of the window 268 Online Connections and Mode Changes Section 10 3 Ex AMPLE 1 psw A Ex Protocol List amp TEMP COMM lt 3 Temp comm Sequence a send Message List a Receive
373. p is executed for the number of times set in the repeat counter control is not shifted to the destination designated for the next process After the step is executed the designated number of times the control shifts to the designated destination for the next process e Use the repeat counter variable N for designating a send receive message address or data enables the following Example If the same send message is to be sent to multiple N connected external Units include the repeat counter variable N in the send message address PMSU Send message t Header Address Data N 1 AddressO Address 1 Example If different addresses for different steps are to be designated to store receive messages include the repeat counter variable N in the data in the receive message CPU Unit PMSU Receive message ee Header Address Data amp W N 1 2 amp W N 1 2 Two byte receive data is converted from ASCII to hexadecimal and stored at the address of the fourth operand third operand for the C200HX HG HE des ignated address repeat counter variable N 1 word of a PMCR instruction Note The repeat counter variable N will be as follows depending on the initial value setting 1 Reset 5 times N 0 to 4 2 Hold 5 times N 4 to 8 For Hold the repeat counter value updated in the previous process will be used The set value and process value of the repeat counter in the above examples a
374. p the next process on standby until a synchronous signal is input from the PLC only for the CS CJ protocol macro During the send receive sequence step the next process can be kept on standby until a synchronous signal is input from the PLC CPU Unit This enables computation processing such as data processing on the CPU Unit during the send receive sequence Supports half duplex and full duplex transmission mode only for the CS CJ protocol macro The conventional protocol macro provides only the half duplex macro With the half duplex macro the receive buffer is cleared right after the send opera tion thus the received data cannot be used With the full duplex mode all the data received within the sequence can be used and data can be sent and received at the same time Note The full duplex mode can be used with the RS 232C or four wire setting It cannot be used with the 1 N or two wire setting Only for models with the RS 422A 485 Clear data using Flush command within the receive buffer at any time only for the CS CJ protocol macro With the full duplex mode the receive buffer is cleared only right before exe cuting the send receive sequence If any reception error occurs the received data can be cleared at any time using the Flush command receive buffer clear Turn the DTR control signal ON and OFF using the Open Close command only for the CS CJ protocol macro When connected to a modem device DTR signal is used to ind
375. parately within the step When changing it will be necessary to correct the step and resend Protocol Macro Outline Section 3 1 Using Operand designated I O Memory Area in a PMCR Instruction Operand Designation Creation of send messages and storage of receive messages is performed with the memory address designated by operands 3 and 4 2 and 3 for the C200HX HG HE in the PMCR instruction CPU Unit PMSU eS t PMCR 3rd operand 1 During PMCR execution e ii operand 2 If the With Without Response Type setting that is set for each step is Yes and the receive process is I O memory executed the time required for the data to be reflected in I O memory will depend on the response Send data type setting i e whether it is the Scan Notification Method Interrupt Notification Method fixed number or Interrupt Notification Method receive case number Example Reading variables C1 Communications Port No Example R 2 4 The 4 bytes 2 words from address D00102 C2 __ Sequence No D00100 2 will be read S DM00100 First word number of send data D DM00200 First word number of receive data storage Send message D D00100 as D001 st For reading D00103 __ __ 2 Writing variables Example W 2 4 The 4 bytes 2 words from address D00202 D00200 2 will be written message D 900209 _ poo202 Tron For writing DOO203 67 Protocol Ma
376. path Read from DM0000 Reverse direction ASCII Hexadecimal conversion Users can set the following contents on the X and Y of variable X Y 2 Contents of X and Y 101 Communication Message Attributes How to set X and Y How Reading Word to set 102 writing the I O memory writing the I O memory reading Reading Word writing Operand address ing Link word address ing Direct address ing Operand address ing Link word address ing Direct address ing Specification Ra First word Lin ear expres sion includ ing N Read option Read from the first word yN x word j First word Linear expression including N Write option Read from the first word yN x word R 1 1 The system reads one byte from the third operand for CS CJ or second operand for C200HX HG HE of the PMCR instruction 1 location to send it with no conversion R O1 5 2 The system reads 2 bytes from the 5th word in the link word s output area 1to send it with conversion to ASCII form R DMO0000 3 The system reads 3 bytes from DM 0000 to send it with con version to ASCII form W 1 1 The system writes one byte of receive data to the fourth operand of the PMCR instruction 1 th word for CS CJ or the third operand of the PMCR instruction 1 th word for C200HX HG H
377. pecified to be 00 the whole area remains as the initial value of 0000 hexa decimal As the result of Receive processing received data starting from the desig nated first offset word is stored in this receive buffer except the begin ning The stored data is compared with the expected message If the response is not written the received data is kept in the receive buffer and is not stored in the CPU Unit If the response is written the received data except at the beginning in the receive buffer will be stored in the I O memory area starting from D 1 The number of words including D itself to the maximum position of the 163 Ladder Programming Method Section 4 4 CPU Unit PMSU 164 Receive buffer Receive buffer stored data is stored in D The number of words within D is updated every time data exceeding the maximum position is stored 5 The previous steps 3 and 4 are repeated until the protocol macro com pletes its operation Value changes Number of words of this value i g I O memory This number of words is stored to update the value Response writing is designated Receive data is stored Right after PMCR is executed Internal processing to clear the buffer Storing starts from the t MACEVE designated word Overwrites the received data Offset 2 5678 FFFF AAAA Received data Sequence Error Termination Process If the End is set
378. pends on the number of conversion bytes One cycle time maximum The time from the start of PMCR instruction to the end of the instruction notification to the PMSU The time required for the send data transfer based on the PMSU request The time required for the sent data conversion based on the specified conversion mode which finishes at the start of data sending to the external device The time required for the data transmission to the external device Use double the calculated time because idle time exists between send characters The time required for the external device process according to the PLC s command which finishes by the start of the response data sending The time required for the received data transmission from the external device Use two to five times the calculated time because idle time exists between the receive characters The time required for the received data conversion from the external device based on the specified conversion mode which finishes at the end of data The time required for the received data transfer to I O memory Note Although the data conversion process times of 2 and 6 vary according to the PLC operation status the maximum values can roughly be estimated by the following calculation formula 2 The send data conversion process time 10 000 us one byte conversion time x number of conversion bytes one byte conversion time No conversion 15 us ASCII co
379. peration Confirmation Tracing the Transmission Line and I O Memory Monitor of the PLC func tions are available with the Protocol Support Tool to confirm the operation of the created protocol macro e Tracing the Transmission Line Trace the transmission data and the control signals flowing on the trans mission line RS 232C or RS 422A 485 With this function users can confirm the data and signals flowing on the transmission line even if they do not have the protocol analyzer Trace display for send message receive message step number and control signals Personal Computer Send message 40 30 32 52 Receive message Step No RTS ee ee Ov Saw ka LEE y Aa a Sa a T r Me Oe Bp External general purpose device t Tracing the send receive message or control signals that runs through the transmission line 173 Operation Confirmation Section 4 6 e O Memory Monitor of the PLC Monitor or edit the I O memory areas on the PLC With this function users can set or edit the send data or receive data designated in the 3rd and 4th operands of the PMCR instruction 2nd and 3rd operands for the C200HX HG HE monitor the receive data and monitor the contents of data in the auxiliary area Personal Computer Adress O 1 2 0000 0000 0002 ooo3 0010 B3B4 0000 mom 0000 External general purpose device Displays I O memory area of the PLC When an error occurs while t
380. perature leftmost 1 digit s Measuring temperature rightmost 4 digit s P rig 9 l Channel 7 16 Measuring temperature leftmost 1 digit offset Contents Data tormay Daa 0 No of receive data words 0017 hexadecimal 2 digit 1 CHO Measuring temperature Differs depending on the rightmost 4 digit BCD 4 digit temperature measuring model Refer to the E5ZE Operation CHO Measuring temperature leftmost 1 digit BCD 1 digit Manual F denotes minus CH7 Measuring temperature Differs depending on the rightmost 4 digit BCD 4 digit temperature measuring model CH7 Measuring temperature Refer to the E5ZE Operation iai ini Manual leftmost 1 digit BCD 1 digit enn igit igit F denotes minus Settings of the PMCR Instruction Use communications port number 0 and serial port number 2 with a destination unit address E1 Inner Serial Communications Board Execution start es a __ __ PMCR Set 0065 in hexadecimal because the sequence number of the measured value 191915 A20200 02E1 reading is 101 Protocol Commu Macro nications E 0065 Execution Port J doo000 Flag Enabled F oo Set the address for storing the data to be Flag j D00100 transmitted to the PMSU Set the address for storing the data to be returned from the PMSU This example sets D00100 so that the mea surement data will be stored on and after Set with the 2nd digit
381. perature controller or Write the set value of temperature controller becomes a se quence Send Send A Normal Protocol Creation Process Error e Disassemble into steps Send amp Receive Send A Receive Error Receive B Receive Section 4 2 Disassemble sequences into squares steps as shown below Error end B Next Error process process Next Error Next Error process process process process Send amp Receive Matrix Send A C Matrix Receive B Receive C Receive D Receive others Error Vv Vv y Vv Vv Next process Next process Next process Next process Error Process Receive Matrix D Next process Next process Next process Matrix Receive B Receive C Receive D Receive Other Error y y y y y Next process Error Process 155 Protocol Creation Process Section 4 2 Example 1 Step No 00 Send message Send amp Receive Error Send data
382. port number internal logic port O to 7 hexadecimal S First word number of send data Set the first word of the word area where data required for sending is stored 123 Executing a Created Communications Sequence CS CJ Section 3 8 124 Note Note Note When there is no send data be sure to set to 0000 In S the number of words starting from S that contain valid send data is stored In S 1 onwards the actual send data is stored S S No of send data words lt How many words are valid including S S 1 Send data Number of valid words y D First word number of storage area for receive data Set the first word of the word area in which the receive data is to be stored When there is no receive data be sure to set to 0000 In D the number of valid word numbers from D 1 is stored In D 1 onwards the initial data that was in the receive buffer before execution of the send receive sequence and the received data is stored gt D No of valid words How many words are valid including D D 1 Receive data Number of valid words A The function of the receive data storage area the data stored in the area starting with D and continuing for the number of words indicated in D before the PMCR instruction is executed differs to the function of the area after wards Before execution of PMCR instruction The receive data storage area functions as
383. pt notifica tion Only for the Serial Communica tions Board Interrupt notification was designated for the Unit Only for the Serial Communi cations Unit More than 30 write attributes were set for one message Send receive message length was set to 0 bytes Send receive message length exceeded the maximum send receive bytes Message was not registered for the matrix reception Both the RTS CTS flow control and Xon Xoff control were designated as transmission control Errors at the Protocol Execution 4 7 2 C200HX HG HE Section 4 7 OO o o Poen O O OO ase O S SUS PMSU does The RDY indicator turns OFF PMSU is abnormal Replace the PMSU and not operate reconnect the power System error 26800 is ON PMSU is abnormal Replace the PMSU and FAL9C reconnect the power occurred 26801 is ON and the RDY indicator turns OFF 26802 is ON System errors 26815 is ON and the RDY indicator FAL9C and flashes FAL9B occurred System error 26811 is ON Port B or 26812 is ON FAL9C Port A occurred when the PMCR instruction is executed Instruction Error codes Error code 1 Execution Flag 28608 to 11 Port A is not set to 28612 to 15 Port B ON 28908 is Port A 28912 is Port B This error occurs when the RS 232C port is not recognized when the power is turned ON due to abnormal hardware PMSU protocol data is abnormal e The PMSU system setting DM 6550 to DM 6559 has i
384. r connected Execution Flag in words are set to 1 execution timing is the allocated data ON not correct area n 9 n 19 As a PMCR Programming As aPMCR does not turn ON instruction error instruction Set bits 11 to 08 execution condition bit 15 Protocol Macro Execution Flag in the allocated data area n 9 n 19 is set to normally open ER Flag one of the condition flags is ON AER Flag one of the condition flags is ON C1 data range of PMCR instruction is illegal number of words in S or D data exceeds 250 or Communications Port Enabled Flag is OFF Access prohibit area Is designated in S or D of PMCR instruction execution condition set bit 15 Protocol Macro Execution Flag to normally closed Check if C1 S and D operands of PMCR instruction are properly set Check if S and D operands of PMCR instruction are properly set 175 Errors at the Protocol Execution Serial communications mode setting Serial communications mode is set to protocol macro 176 Problem Indicator display SDLI RDLJ COML indicators are not lit Electrically not connected Status information Although PMCR instruction is executed bit 15 Protocol Macro Execution Flag in the allocated data area n 9 n 19 does not turn ON Bits 00 to 03 error codes in the allocated data area n 9 n 19 are set to 2 hexadecimal Sequence number error Bits 00 to 03 e
385. r CS CJ by setting the PLC model to the CS CJ Series and setting the target for the protocol to the CS CJ Serial Communications Board Unit The I O memory area will be converted to one for the CS CJ Refer to the fol lowing section for further details about conversion lf C200HX HG HE Protocol is used as CS CUJ Protocol there will be limitations in the use of EM expanded data memory It is recommended that CS CJ Protocol be used from the start The CS CJ Protocol can be transferred to the Communications Board for C200HX HG HE by setting the PLC model to the C200HX HG HE and setting the target for the protocol to the Communications Board The I O memory area will be converted to one for the C200HX HG HE Refer to the following section for further details about conversion lf CS CJ Protocol is used as C200HX HG HE Protocol there will be limitations in the use of commands and I O memory area It is recommended that C200HX HG HE Protocol be used from the start 11 4 2 Converting the I O Memory Area The I O memory area will be converted as shown below when the CS CJ Pro tocol is converted into the C200HX HG HE Protocol or vice versa CS CJ Protocol C200HX HG HE Protocol H Holding relay HR Holding relay W Internal auxiliary relay LR Link relay A Special auxiliary relay AR Auxiliary memory relay D Data memory DM Data memory E Expanded data memory EM Expanded data memory When converting the CS CJ Protocol into
386. r already exists in a mes sage this button cannot be used A terminator can be inserted before the check code unless there is data after the check code If a terminator is to be inserted or if it needs to be modified left click the Edit Button to display the Terminator lt t gt Dialog Box and then enter or edit the terminator A check code can be inserted into a message by left clicking the Insert Button on the Check Code Field If a check code already exists or if an attempt is made to insert the check code before the header this button cannot be used If a check code is to be inserted or if it needs to be modified left click the Edit Button to display the Check Code lt c gt Dialog Box and then enter or edit the check code An address can be inserted into a message by left clicking the Insert Button on the Address Field If an address already exists or if an at tempt is made to insert the address before the header or after the ter minator this button cannot be used If an address is to be inserted or if it needs to be modified left click the Creating Messages Section 9 1 Edit Button to display the Address lt a gt Dialog Box and then enter or edit the address A length can be inserted into a message by left clicking the Insert But ton on the Length Field If a length already exists or if an attempt is made to insert the length before the header or after the terminator this button cannot be used If an address is to be ins
387. r the send data transfer based on the PMSU request The time required for the sent data conversion based on the specified conversion mode which finishes at the start of data sending to the external device The time required for the data transmission to the external device Use double the calculated time because idle time exists between send characters The time required for the external device process according to the PLC s command which finishes by the start of the response data sending The time required for the received data transmission from the external device Use two to five times the calculated time because idle time exists between the receive characters The time required for the received data conversion from the external device based on the specified conversion mode which finishes at the end of data The time required for the received data transfer to I O memory Note Although the data conversion process times of 2 and 6 vary according to the PLC operation status the maximum values can roughly be estimated by the following calculation formula 2 The send data conversion process time 10 ms one byte conversion time x number of conversion bytes Reverse conversion 5 us ASCII reverse conversion 4 us hexadecimal reverse conversion 7 us One byte conversion time No conversion 1 us reverse conversion 5 us ASCII conversion 10 us ASCII reverse conversion 4 us hexadecimal con versi
388. r the one to one communications between PLCs via modems The modem control mode is held by the instructions from terminals PLCs and the modems responses to the instructions Those instructions AT commands and the responses result codes consist of a character string delimited by delimiters CR and CR LF For the modem control the RTS CTS flow control or the Xon Xoff flow control can be set as a flow control However these flow controls are not set in this example because the communication messages are short Note 1 For the details of the setup method for the transmission control modes refer to 3 2 Sequence At tributes Common to All Steps 350 Creating the Protocol Applications Appendix A 2 The protocol is created by the Hayes compatible AT mode in this example The AT mode and V 25bis mode are also available for modem control Setting Monitoring Time If the monitor time send finish monitoring time Tfs receive wait monitoring time Tr and receive finish monitor ing time Tfr has been set the error will be detected and the process can be switched to the error process or the retry process immediately before the step finishes in the send or receive step when the send or receive process is not executed within the monitor time If used in the combination with the retry process the step can be re executed without any description of the error process and protocol or the ladder program description can remarkably be simplified
389. racter is being trans mitted or received are not sampled The ON or OFF state of the CTS or DSR signal may differ depending on whether the transmission has been completed or not 2 Provided that the PLC is the CS CuJ the screen will display as both the sequence number and step number when a message is received before the execution of the sequence 3 If the PLC model is the CS CuJ the displayed position of the sequence or step number may shift forward or backwards or may be displayed in stead when transmission and reception data and signals are traced ata baud rate of 19 200 bps or higher This is due to the data collection perfor mance of the tracing function 12 1 1 Tracing Method The following two tracing methods are available Continuous Traces The trace is executed until stopped When the PMSU trace buffer becomes full during tracing data will be discarded starting from the oldest data 299 Tracing Transmission Lines Section 12 1 One shot Traces The trace is terminated when the trace buffer becomes full The entire trace data from the start of trace remains in the PMSU trace buffer 12 1 2 Trace related Bits Trace related flags are listed in the following table n 1500 25 x Unit No words CS CJ Flag Porn Etectveaddress Swe O lt Continuous Port 1 190001 The continuous trace starts on the rising edge and the trace is Trade Start Stop Word n bit 01 terminated on
390. re 0501 to 0505 for example 1 and 0501 to 0505 for example 2 88 Step Attributes 3 3 4 Commands Send Receive Send amp Receive Wait Flush Open Close Note Execution of Open Close command Section 3 3 Set the Send Receive Send amp Receive Wait Flush Open or Close com mand Sends a send message Set in a step Handles a receive message in a step or receive message in a matrix as an expected message and receives data note 1 After sending a send message set in a step handles the receive message set in a step or receive message in a matrix as an expected message and receives data note 1 Keeps the step on standby until the Wait Clear switch changes from OFF to ON See note 2 Clears the data within the receive buffer See note 2 Turns ON the DTR signal See note 2 Turns OFF the DTR signal See note 2 1 Compares an actually received message and set receive expected mes sage and if they match goes to the next process If they do not match control is shifted to the error process for the receive message and for the matrix to the next process designated with Other other than the set re ceive message group 2 Only for the CS CJ protocol macro 3 Generally when a command is sent and a response is received set Send amp Receive 4 Send amp Receive allows retry to be designated At retry transmission wait cannot be applied If a transmission wait at retry is t
391. re not set 348 Creating the Protocol Applications Appendix A Constant Addressing In the constant addressing communications message CR or CR LF will be set at the end of the initialization command send data SendOk receive result code etc Example of the Initialization Command Setting ATEOV0X4 V2 N3 CO CO K1 CR or CR LF AT command Terminator Example of the Send Data SendOk Setting SENDOK CR or CR LF SENDOK Terminator Message Example of the Result Code Setting 1 CR or CR LF Result code Terminator Operand Addressing For the operand addressing communications data the communications data must be stored in the area set by the PMCR instruction after PMCR instruction designation both the first word numbers of the send data storing and the received data storing are determined The configuration of the operand addressing communications data used in this example is as follows Example of the Dial Command Setting e The send message content to be described in the step numbers 00 to 02 of the sequence number 001 for the PLC which sends SendOK message R 1 16 CR or CR LF a Terminator Number of bytes to be sent The first word to be sent CH DM0010 1CH addressed by the second operand of the PMCR instruction Read option non conversion forward direction e Actual data sent and stored in the addressed word DMO0010 DM0011 DM0012 DM0013 DM0014 DM0015 DM0016 DM0017 DM0018 67
392. re several per sonal computers i e the communications ports are separate Therefore when SYSMAC CPT or SYSMAC PST is running and connected online to a PLC it must be made offline before making online connection to the CX Pro tocol Similarly when the CX Protocol is connected online to a PLC it must be switched to offline before making online connection to SYSMAC CPT or SYS MAC PST 10 3 2 Changing to Offline Use the following procedure to set the CX Protocol from online i e PRO GRAM MONITOR or RUN mode to offline aD Right click the PLC Icon and select Disconnect from PLC from the pop up menu or select Disconnect from PLC from the PLC Menu 10 3 3 PLC Operating Mode Changes Before transferring protocol data or communications port setting data be sure to set the PLC to PROGRAM mode by using the following procedure nm Right click the PLC Icon select Operating mode and select PROGRAM mode Alternatively select Operating mode from the PLC Menu and select the PROGRAM mode N Caution Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before changing the operating mode of the CPU Unit Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation 10 4 Modem Connections 10 4 1 Outline 270 Online connection can be made to a remote PLC via telephone line using modems Note This type of connection is not supported for an NJ series CPU Unit Telephone line i Modem for per Modem for PLC sonal compu
393. rea the data area Communications Port Settings Communications have failed Retry the connection or cancel the dialog download failed and check the PC to PLC communications settings Compare Error Communications have failed Check the connection to the PLC and try again Contention Send Request Code The Contention Send Request Code Enter the Contention Send Request not valid has been selected but not entered CX Server failed to initialize CX Protocol could not initialize the Exit the application and try again If the fail communications driver CX Server ure continues reboot the computer and try Cannot open create another and cannot function properly again If the failure persists reinstall CX Protocol 330 Troubleshooting Section 14 Error Message Symptom Causse aeon Delimiter send code not valid The Delimiter Send Request Code or Enter the Delimiter Send Request or Delimiter receive code not valid Delimiter Receive Request Code has Delimiter Receive Request code been selected but not entered End Sequence number must be The sequence end value must be Enter a sequence end value greater than greater than the Start greater than the sequence start the sequence start value Sequence value Error displaying the Data Moni An error has occurred with the Reinstall CX Server tor CX Server communications driver Error displaying the Error Log An error has occurred with the Rei
394. rea Se foo joonan Primary Expression GyM x jooon bl foo01 Select the address type Channel 11 12 O01 O2 or Operand from the drop down list If Channel is selected as the address type select an area CIO WR CS CJ only LR C200HX HG HE only HR AR DM or EMxx from the Area drop down list Input a value in the Channel Note If EMxx is selected from the Area drop down list be sure to input a bank number in the EM Bank Field The maximum value that can be input in the EM Bank Field varies depending on the PLC used The parameters for the Primary Expression yN x Fields define the channel offset Input the parameter x Change the settings as necessary provided in the following and select the OK Button to accept the settings from the Channel Dialog Box or the Can cel Button to leave the settings unchanged Select the OK Button to accept the settings from the Channel Dialog Box or the Cancel Button to leave the settings unchanged Set one of the following commands for step execution Send Sends the send messages set in the step Receive Receives the receive messages that were set in the step or messages that were sent based on the receive matrix Send amp Receive After sending the send messages that were set in the step receives the receive messages that are set in the step and the messages that were sent based on the receive matrix 231 Step Setting Section 8 1 Open for CS CJ protocol mac
395. red 1 Stored 01 to FF hexadecimal 01 to FF hexadecimal 1 Sequence end completed 0 Sequence end not completed 1 Sequence abort completed 0 Sequence abort not completed 1 Step error processing com pleted 0 Step error processing not completed 137 Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas Type Trace Execu tion Flag each port Trace Continuous Trace Start Stop Switch each port Short Trace Start Stop Switch each port Forced Abort Switch each port Abort Forced Abort Generated Flag Wait Sequence Waiting Flag each port Wait Release Switch each port Transfer Section 3 10 CS Serial CS CJ Serial Com C200HX HG HE Communica Contents Communica Communica mon tions Board tions Board tions Unit Allocation Area Special Auxiliary Area Auxiliary Special Auxiliary Area Port1 Port2 Port1 Port2 al oe word word word word eon CIO CIO n 19 CIO 01 1 Executing 1909 1919 286 0 Stop CIO CIO n n CIO CIO 03 0 to 1 Start 1900 1900 bito1 bit 09 289 289 1 to 0 Stop Only Bit 01 Bit 09 used with CX Pro tocol ClO ClO ClO 04 ClO 05 O to 1 Start 1900 1900 ii 02 i 10 289 289 1 to 0 Stop Only Bit 02 Bit 10 used with CX Pro tocol ClO ClO ClO 11 ClO 15 Set from 0 to 1 for 1900 1900 289 289 forced abort Depending on the timing the opera tion may not abort and the sequence will complete ClO ClO n 1
396. reely change the destina tion of the message or During retrying the send wait time is ignored Therefore the send wait time be provided by an error process for Send or Receive 85 command Step Attributes Parameter Send wait time Send message Receive message including matrix With With out Response Writing operand address ing Next process Error process 86 Description Sets the wait time Ts as waiting time for data sending to start Sets the send message when the command is Send or Send amp Receive Sets the expected receive message when the command is Receive or Send amp Receive For details refer to 3 4 Communication Mes sage Attributes When setting a matrix to switch the next process according to several expected receive messages specify the matrix name from here For details refer to 3 5 Creating Matrices Sets whether received data is to be written Valid only when the receive data are stored using the oper and addressing mode Sets the next transit step when the step ends normally Sets the next transit step when the step ends abnormally Receive Receive Section 3 3 Command Send amp Wait Flush Open Close Set a send wait time when the communica tions partner cannot receive data immedi ately With the CX Protocol a send message name created in the send message list is referred to or a send
397. rial Communications Board received data cannot be stored in the EM area using the interrupt notification If this is attempted a protocol macro syntax error A42410 will occur 3 Interrupt Notification Method Receive Case Number With the CS this method is applicable to the Serial Communications Board and with the C200HX HG HE it is applicable only to the Communications Board For the CS Cu it cannot be used for the Serial Communications Unit Writes the data in the receive buffer into the I O memory immediately after it is converted according to the designated method When all the data has been written into the I O memory the external interrupt task number for the CS CJ or the subroutine number for the C200HX HG HE will be calculated based on the step number executed according to the following procedure and the case number and the interrupt task will then be performed for the CPU Unit Also when all the data has been written into the I O memory and when the sequence has terminated the Protocol Macro Execution Flag will be turned OFF Interrupt process for the CPU Unit will take place when the notification is received Received data will remain in the receive buffer without performing any write process for the CPU Unit The Protocol Macro Execution Flag will be turned OFF after the sequence has terminated 81 Sequence Attributes Common to All Steps Section 3 2 Serial Communications Board CPU Unit or Communications Board
398. rm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before force setting force resetting any bit in memory Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation 12 5 1 Precautions for Transfer of Data to PLC The following tables list the available PLC modes and I O memory areas for data transfer to the PLC 317 I O Memory Transfer and Comparison Section 12 5 Note Before changing the operating mode make sure that the change will not affect the installation I O memory Operating mode PROGRAM MONITOR RUN Data memory D extended Transfer sup Transfer sup Transfer not data memory E ported ported supported All other memory areas Transfer sup Transfer not Transfer not ported supported supported 12 5 2 Data Transfer Connect the PLC online before transferring I O memory data Downloading Personal Use the following procedure to transfer the data of the PLC data table from the Computer to PLC personal computer to the PLC 1 2 3 1 Inthe data area workspace display the PLC data table by double clicking the name of the area to be downloaded When downloading part of the PLC data table specify the range of the area to be downloaded The range can also be specified in step 2 Transfer to PLC Setting the range to be downloaded All Everything in the areas selected in the box above will be transferred Selection The range of data set in step 1 PLC data table in one area Download Cancel MeO
399. rmed Version 1 5 Upgrade Information The changes that have been made from version 1 4 to version 1 5 of the CX Protocol to support the upgraded functionality of CS CJ series Serial Communications Boards Units with unit version 1 2 are explained here Version 1 5 Improved Functionality from Version 1 4 Compatible PLCs Serial Communications Board Unit Version Upgrade Compatibility CX Protocol version 1 5 supports the following CS CJ series Serial Communications Boards Units with unit version 1 2 CS Series Serial Communications Board CS1W SCB21 V1 CS1W SCB41 V1 Serial Communications Unit CS1W SCU21 V1 Serial Communications Unit CJ1W SCU21 V1 CS1W SCU41 V1 CX Protocol version 1 5 supports the following new CPU Units Series CPU Unit mode CI Seres CHF CPUGTH XX Xxll Communications Port Settings for Serial Communications Boards Units The communications port settings for CS CJ series Serial Communications Boards Units with unit ver sion 1 2 can be set using CX Protocol version 1 5 in the Communications Port Settings for Boards Units The following Communications Port Settings Dialog Box will be displayed Communications Port Settings 21x or D t S600 v e Baud Rate Peau Soul Parity E er z ANE Data Length 7 Bi z Stop Bits 2 Bit z Host Link Non procedural Protocol Macro Serial Gateway I CTS Enable Delay o 20000 D 10ms ost Lint aN j 3 Writ 0 3 0 Frame Format Def
400. ro Turns ON the DTR signal Close for CS CJ protocol macro Turns OFF the DTR signal Flush for CS CJ protocol macro Clears the data within the receive buffer Wait for CS CJ protocol macro Sets to a standby state in the step and keeps that state until the Wait Clear switch turns from OFF to ON The following table lists the items that can be set for each command Setting item Receive Send amp Close Receive Sequence Transmission Yes control pwo s Yes Receive wait time Tr Receive finish Send finish SAELE D D D IE an Step Repeat Retry count Send wait time Send mes Receive mes With Without Yes response writ ing 1 2 3 1 Left click the Command Field Example CS CJ O O Cc gt uai pla U fab 02 U fab D d2 Command Ret send Command Type pend amp Receive Oper 2 Left click an appropriate command on the drop down list 232 Step Setting Retry Count Retry Factors Note 1 2 3 Send Wait Time Ts Note 1 2 3 Section 8 1 The retry can only be set when the command is set to Send amp Receive When the retry occurs the current step will be executed again If the retry occurs again after the step is repeated the number of designated times a processing error will occur Effective retry factor O to 9 0 Retry will not be executed e The send finish time has been reached e The receive wait
401. roject win dow 2 Right click the Matrix List on the project workspace or right click in the project window to display a pop up menu Point at Create on the pop up menu and select Matrix Create can also be selected from the Protocol Menu 9 2 2 Creating a New Matrix Case Use the following procedure to create a new matrix case in a matrix on 1 2 3 0 1 Double click the Matrix Icon on the project window 2 Right click in the project window to display a pop up menu Point at the Create on the pop up menu and select Matrix Create can also be select ed from the Protocol Menu 254 Message and Matrix Editing Section 9 3 9 2 3 Editing a Message in the Matrix Case Use the following procedure to set a receive message oa 12 30 1 Double click the Matrix Icon on the project window TRR 2 Left click the Receive Message Field on the Matrix Case 3 When setting an existing receive message left click a desired receive message on the drop down list When creating a new receive message right click the Receive Message Field and then left click New Message When editing a set receive message right click the Receive Message Field and then left click Edit Message 9 2 4 Defining the Next Matrix Case Process Use the following procedure to edit the next process 222 1 2 3 1 Double click the Matrix Icon on the project window s gt s 2 Left click the Next Process Field on the Matrix Case and then left click E the Enter Butt
402. rols the next process Flush Clears all data in the receive buffer Open DTR ON Holds the DTR signal even after the sequences has ended only under modem control Close DTR OFF Turns OFF the DTR signal Si the oiei control Receive 256 bytes 2 5 Kbytes buffer per port Receive Starting point send stop 200 bytes 2 Kbytes buffer request to the destination flow device RTS signal OFF control RTS CTS Xon Xoff on PMSU side 37 Differences between Protocol Macros Section 1 13 tem C200HX HGIHE CSIC Ending point send When shifting steps 0 5 Kbytes resumption request to the destination device RTS signal ON Maxi Number of bytes that can be 256 bytes max 1 000 bytes max send Number RTS CTS flow 200 bytes max Possible to set between 200 and 1 000 receive of bytes Xon Xoff flow bytes Mes that can Note sage be When receiving data data within the length received receive buffer will be retrieved for each forone Others 256 bytes max maximum length Receive process ing Maxi RTS CTS flow Xon Xoff flow 200 bytes max As shown above mum delimiter control Possible to set between 200 and 1 000 receive bytes mes Default 200 bytes sage length whena Others 256 bytes max wildcard is used for data length Designa When Maximum send 127 words max Not including the 250 words max Including the send tion of operand data send data word area d
403. rom the Board Unit for comparison An indicator will be displayed in the status bar while the data is being read The comparison can be canceled at this time by clicking the Stop U L Button When the comparison ends the Compare Result Dialog Box will be dis played The possible causes for a comparison to fail are given in the following table Cause Correction The option to include the source code was Clear the option to include the source selected but the source code is not code and repeat the procedure from included with the protocols in the Board step 6 Unit The option to include the source code was Select the option to include the source not selected but the source code is code and repeat the procedure from included with the protocols in the Board step 6 Unit Printing Protocols Section 11 2 Cause Correction The number of protocols selected in step 3 Perform the procedure in 11 1 2 Dis does not agree with the number of proto playing Protocol Data within the PMSU cols in the Board Unit and check to see if the number of pro tocols is the same The names of the protocols selected in step Perform the procedure in 11 1 2 Dis 3 do not agree with names of the protocols playing Protocol Data within the PMSU in the Board Unit and check to see if the names of proto cols are the same The sequences steps or messages in the Perform the procedure in 11 1 3 Trans protocols are different ferring
404. rovements from Version 1 6 to Version 1 7 The following functionality has been added in upgrading the CX Protocol from version 1 6 to 1 7 New Units Supported The following Serial Communications Units are now supported Serial Communications Unit CS1W SCU31 V1 Serial Communications Unit CJ1W SCU31 V1 The following PLCs are now supported Series GPU Units Models CP1H series CPU Units a XA e X and CP1H Y NSJ Series NSJ Controller LI B G5D E E E Protocol Comparisons e The CX Protocol can now be used to compare the protocols in the project with those in the PLC Improvements from Version 1 5 to Version 1 6 Installing the CX Protocol from the CX One FA Integrated Tool Package The CX Protocol could be installed only indepen The CX Protocol can be installed as one of the func dently tions of the CX One Integrated Tool Package CX Programmer Startup Method The CX Protocol could be started only from the Win The CX Protocol can also be started by right clicking dows Start Menu one of the following Serial Communications Boards Units in the I O Table Window opened from the CX Programmer that was installed from the CX One and selecting Start Special Application from the pop up menu CS1W SCULILI V1 CS1W SCBLILI V1 e CJ1W SCULILI V1 Note When the Start with Settings Inherited Option is selected a new project will be created and the device type setting will be automatically perfo
405. rror codes in the allocated data area n 9 n 19 are set to 3 hexadecimal data read write range over error Bits 00 to 03 error codes in the allocated data area n 9 n 19 are set to 4 hexadecimal protocol data syntax error Communications Port Enabled Flags A20200 to A20207 are OFF unable to exe cute As a PMCR instruction execution condition the Communications Port Enabled Flag A20200 to A20207 is set to normally closed Bit 0O port operation in the allocated data area n 6 n 16 is set to O port stop Sequence number designated in C2 of PMCR instruc tion is set toa value other than 000 to 3E7 hexadecimal 000 to 999 decimal Communications sequence number that does not exist in the protocol data is designated When storing or reading data from I O area of CPU Unit designated area range is exceeded Protocol data in the PMSU is faulty SEND RECV CMND or other PMCR instruction is being executed using the same communications port number Programming error Either protocol data is being transferred or SUM value error has occurred Section 4 7 Set C2 of PMCR instruction to 0000 to 03E7 hexadecimal 000 to 999 decimal Check if communications sequence number is correct Designate another area or reduce the send receive data size Using the CX Protocol rewrite the protocol data Use another communications port not used for SEND R
406. rted on CS CJ protocols only error The Check Code type is invalid this unit for PSB E1063 Header lt h gt found after Terminator lt t gt Error by protocol imported from PSS PSS allows to create the message prohibited by CX Protocol E1064 Header lt h gt not at the start of the message Error by protocol imported from PSS PSS allows to create the message prohibited by CX Protocol E1065 Terminator lt t gt not at the end of the message Error by protocol imported from PSS PSS allows to create before check code lt c gt the message prohibited by CX Protocol WO0006 Protocol will be converted A CS CJ protocol will be downloaded to a C200HX HG HE PLC or a C200HX HG HE protocol will be downloaded to a CS CJ PLC 336 SECTION 15 Help This section describes the online help services 337 Help Section 15 Help by Topic Using the Help Tab Using the Help Icon hi 1 2 3 Searching by Keyword 1 2 3 Using the Help Screens 338 Procedures for using the CX Protocol and protocol macro functions can be verified using the online help Use either one of the following procedures to access the online help Using the Help Tab The desired help screen can be displayed by left clicking the Help Tab or the Help Menu and choosing from the help items that appear in the project workspace Using the Help Icon Left click the Help Icon on the toolbar or press the F1 Key to display a help screen
407. s The time required for the received data conversion from the external device based on the specified conversion mode which finishes at the end of data transfer The time required to finish received data transfer to O memory Note Although the data conversion process times of 2 and 6 vary according to the PLC operation status the maximum values can roughly be estimated by the following calculation formula 2 The send data conversion process time 10 ms one byte conversion time x number of conversion bytes Reverse conversion 5 us ASCII reverse conversion 4 us hexadecimal reverse conversion 7 us One byte conversion time No conversion 1 us reverse conversion 5 us ASCII conversion 10 us ASCII reverse conversion 4 us hexadecimal con version 7 us hexadecimal reverse conversion 7 us 6 The receive data conversion process time 2 ms one byte conversion time x number of conversion bytes One byte conversion time No conversion 1 us reverse conversion 4 us ASCII conversion 8 us ASCII reverse conversion 9 us hexadecimal conver sion 17 us hexadecimal reverse conversion 17 us 186 Communications Response Time Performance Section 4 8 PMCR 01E1 0000 D0000 D1000 e Communications Response Performance Using the Interrupt Notification Mode Illustrated below is the data flow when the event area operand address ing is used and the response type is the interrupt mode Th
408. s selected Faste Ctrit Delete Del Data Input Left click each item in the table within the project window or left click and then a either left click the Enter Button or press the Enter Key to input data of each item displayed in the dialog box P 00 RSET 001 Either click the Enter button or press the Transmission Wait Time Enter Key Value Time Unit o ox E Fa jio millisecond Cancel 2 5 2 Control Menu C Protocol PSW Restore S EE L Close Control Menu More a E cose alee Minimize Minimize Masmize Close Alt F4 Closes the CX Protocol Restore Project Move Window Control ala Menu Minimize Maximize Close Ctrl F4 Closes the Project Next Chrl F6 51 Outline of User Interface Section 2 5 2 5 3 Menu and Short cut Keys key C open Opens the existing project selected lomo s Close Cwsesteproetworean gt bo Save As Saves the project fle worked on as anew fle Print Prints the protocols or trace selected omP s Print Preview Displays the image of print output b Print Setup Sets the printer model paper size and printing direction Recent File 1 2 3 4 Displays a maximum of four files recently used Se Se Exits CX Protocol Sa Cut Cuts and transfers the range designated to the Ctrl X clipboard Copy Copies and transfers the range designated to the Ctrl C clipboard Pastes the contents of the clipb
409. select an variable Channel 11 12 01 O2 or Operand from the Address drop down list in the Data Field If Channel is selected select an area code CIO WR LR HR AR DM or EMxx from the Area drop down list Set a value in the Channel Field a b 249 Creating Messages Section 9 1 c Designate an offset from the top word designated in the above Data Field in the Primary Expression yN x Field Input y and x d Press the OK Button to confirm the Channel Dialog Box or Cancel Button to cancel the process Note If the EMxx option is selected from the Area drop down list be sure to input the bank number 0 to18 hex in the EM Bank Field The maximum number of the EM bank that can be designated in the EM Bank Field depends on the selected PLC N Caution If you attempt to access EM banks OD to 18 hex from any Unit other than the CJ1W SCU22 32 42 a Data read data write area exceeded error will occur in the protocol status This will occur even if EM banks OD to 18 hex are sup ported by the CPU Unit Message Address a gt Address Setting Examples Variable Left click the button Length Left click the button 3 Press the OK Button to confirm the setting or Cancel Button to cancel the process 250 Creating Messages Section 9 1 Data Use the following procedure to edit the message Name Message lt a gt gt Delete Message Data Constant Hex zj Edit eer
410. send operation Therefore if the response of the destination device is fast and data is sent back in half duplex mode from the time of sending the data communications commands etc to completing the send operation the data received during that interval cannot be received If such a situation seems possible use full duplex mode Send operation Data transmission processing 12 150 us Fast response Timing see the table below Data cannot be Data reception Hour eo A Reception buffer cleared Sequence Attributes Common to All Steps Section 3 2 Note The time lag is provided to ensure that when using in half duplex 2 wire mode the receive operation will be performed after the last stop bit of the send data has entered the circuit Half duplex Full duplex CPU Unit PMSU CPU Unit PMSU Receive buffer All data received during Receive possible during sequence execution Depending on execution of receive receive process process used as receive message Depending on receive process used as receive message Comparison with expected message switching for next process Comparison with expected message switching for next process Writes to CPU Unit Writes to CPU Unit Data received during sending will not be All data received during sequence execution includ used as receive data Data received when ing data received when not executing the receive not sending will be sent to
411. serial communi cations mode of the serial port designated in C1 is set to protocol macro Set the serial communications mode to protocol macro 02 hexadecimal 05 hexadecimal Response has not been Check if the serial communi returned from the destination cations mode of the serial device and the monitor time port designated in C1 is set has timed out to protocol macro Set the serial Communications mode to protocol macro 11 hexadecimal 06 hexadecimal No corresponding A number not registered in communications sequence _ the PMCR instruction C2 number communications sequence number has been designated Using the CX Protocol register the communications sequence 22 hexadecimal 01 hexadecimal Impossible to execute An attempt is made to because protocol macro is execute the PMCR being executed instruction while protocol macro is being executed Change the bit 15 Protocol Macro Execution Flag in the allocated data area n 9 n 19 to normally closed and modify the ladder program to execute the PMCR instruction 24 hexadecimal 01 hexadecimal There is no registered table One of the following e Protocol macro communi cations sequence data has not been registered e Protocol macro communi cations sequence data is being registered trans ferred e Protocol macro communi cations sequence data has SUM value error Using the CX Protocol transfer correct protocol macro communications seq
412. sh Size lt Area type OUT Starting address Size lt Area type Starting address Size 5 Area type OUT Starting address Size 5 Area type 3 gt 78 Sequence Attributes Common to All Steps Section 3 2 Area Type and Size CS CJ C200HX HG HE Area type and address subject to link ClO 0000 to 6143 CIO see note 000 to word addressing WR 000 to 511 511 HR 000 to 511 WR 00 to 63 AR 000 to 511 HR 00 to 99 DM 00000 to 32767 AR 00 to 27 EM 00000 to 32767 DM 0000 to 6655 Note EM banks cannot EM 0000 to 6143 be designated for link Note CIO indicates I O words area IR area and SR area Number of link words setting Sum of 114 12 01 02 Sum of 11 12 014 02 must be equal to or less must be equal to or less than 500 words than 128 words Example Read and write part of data assigned in the above in a message CPU Unit PMSU Designation in a message Pink 5 f 3 Link on n E Send message C100100 i words Soe Refresh o 20 lt L gt CIO 105 is read and built in the data in a words send message C100119l N IN Receive message DM0
413. sion 7 us hexadecimal reverse conversion 7 us 6 The receive data conversion process time 2 ms one byte conversion time x number of conversion bytes One byte conversion time No conversion 1 us reverse conversion 4 us ASCII conversion 8 us ASCII reverse conversion 9 us hexadecimal conver sion 17 us hexadecimal reverse conversion 17 us e Calculation Example of the Send Finish Monitoring Time Tfs The send finish monitoring time Tfs is set so as to perform monitoring from the time the leading byte start character is sent to the time the last data byte end character is sent Therefore in consideration of number 3 send data transmission time number of data characters x number bits in one character transmission rate in the table the send finish monitoring time is Tfs gt Number of data characters x number of bits in one character x 2 transmission rate Example 5 hexadecimal data of 5 words CRC CCITT BIN 2 bytes CR 15 characters 120 bits 1 1 10 2 1 15 One character equals 12 bits under the following condition Start bit 1 bit Data 8 bits Parity Yes Stop Bit 2 bits Therefore 15 x 2 180 bits 180 9 600 0 01875 seconds In practice however it must be set to a value double the calculated time because an idle time exists between characters sent from the PMSU as shown below 0 01875 x 2 0 0375 seconds Since the unit of the monitoring time is in the range of from 0 01 seconds 10 ms
414. smission to the external device Use double the calculated time because an idle time exists between send characters The time required for the external device process according to the PLC s command which finishes by the start of the response data sending The time required for the received data transmission from the external device Use two to five times the calculated time because idle time exists between the receive characters The time required for the received data conversion from the external device based on the specified conversion mode which finishes at the end of data transfer The time from the response interrupt notification to the end of the received data transfer to I O memory Note 1 When interrupt notifications are issued consecutively a time lag of 2 ms will occur between notifications A time lag of 2 ms is provided between in terrupt notifications issued consecutively through the ports 1 and 2 2 Although the data conversion process times of 2 and 6 vary according to the PLC operation status the maximum values can roughly be estimated by the following calculation formula 2 The send data conversion process time 10 ms one byte conversion time x number of conversion bytes Reverse conversion 5 us ASCII reverse conversion 4 us hexadecimal re verse conversion 7 us One byte conversion time No conversion 1 us reverse conversion 5 us ASCII conversion 10 us ASCII reverse conversion
415. so be necessary to perform an error resetting oper ation from a device such as a Programming Console Additional Notes and Precautions 148 Time Delay When a half duplex send operation is performed CS CJ only there is a time delay see t7 Timing List below between when the actual data transmission processing is completed and the send operation is completed If the response from the remote device is early that is if the response is received in between the time that the data is transmitted using a communications command and when the send operation is completed with the half duplex system the data received in this interval the response cannot be received In this case set to the full duplex system If the wiring to the device uses a 2 wire RS 422A 485 system both transmission data and reception data will be sent along the same wires so in order to separate the transmission paths to send and receive a timing of t2 150 us will be necessary Accordingly if a 2 wire sys tem connection is used and a high speed response device is connected so that data is returned within t1 t2 take measures to slow down the data response from the remote device Send operation Data transmission processing t1 t2 150 us Fast response i Timing see the table below Data cannot be Data reception B I ies leas during A Reception buffer cleared Timing List t1 Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas Section 3 10 Error
416. stem increments the value of the repeat counter by 8 times repeat edly Each time the repeat counter is incremented the following contents will be changed e The word number of the Temperature Controller designated by N 1 in the send message changes in a range from 0 to 7 127 Executing a Created Communications Sequence C200HX HG HE Section 3 9 e The DM area storing the measured temperature designated by amp W 2N 1 in the receive message changes as follows D00101 D00103 D00105 D00107 D00109 D00111 gt D00113 D00115 6 When the system ends the execution of the sequence the Protocol Macro Execution Flag 191915 will turn OFF 3 8 5 Confirming the Operation When the process variable is not stored successfully confirm the following points e INNER continuation error e Confirm that the System Setup is set correctly e Bit 191914 Step Error Processing Flag is ON e Confirm that the System Setup is correct In particular check that port 1 and port 2 are not designated conversely e Confirm that the wiring is correct refer to the CS CU series Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Unit Operation Manual W336 for the wiring method e Confirm the communication rate frame and unit number of the E5ZE e No error but data is not stored e Confirm that the RUN indicator of the E5ZE is lit For details refer to the E5ZE Operation Manual H076 Note When trace opera
417. sy receiving in the allocated data area n 7 n 17 is ON destination busy Bit 09 Sequence Wait Flag in the allocated data are n 9 n 19 is ON sequence wait Bits 03 and 11 forced abort switch in the allocated data n are set to the forced setting Sequence was subjected to abort termination Sequence is being executed and cannot be terminated data receiving state Allocated data area n 5 n 15 system settings with port settings are different from those of the destination device Send wait time set for each step of the communications sequence is extremely long RTS CTS flow control of trans mission control parameter is set to Yes and the CTS signal from the destination does not turn ON Wait command cannot be cleared The forced abort switch is set to the forced setting Protocol macro data is not properly set System settings such as baud rate or frame format are different from those of the destination Protocol macro data is not properly set System settings such as baud rate or frame format are different from those of the destination device Bits do not match due to baud rate exceeding the permissible range mismatching stop bits etc Section 4 7 Using the CX Protocol check if the send wait time is prop erly set Clear the busy state of the destination so that the local CTS signal turns ON Review the program so that bits 00 an
418. t For the Variable types left click the Variable and Length Buttons to com pose variables X Y The Channel Dialog Box will be displayed Creating Messages Section 9 1 Setting of Variables X Y Editing Length Y Type R Byte unit een Type yN x Type See note 2 Variable Type R W te 3 Word unit ype R W see note 3 Top address Data Linear expres sion including N Address l yN x When selecting l words Designate Designate y and x the area CIO LR For CS CJ HR AR DM EM see note 1 and the y 0 to 1000 word x 0 to 1000 Ss ais aah For C200HX HG HE o designation when 11 12 O1 or y 0 to O2 is selected x 0 to 255 No designation when an operand is selected Example Direct designation R CIO 0000 N 1 Link word designation R 11 2N 1 Type yN x For CS CJ y 0 to 1000 x 0 to 1000 For C200HX HG HE y 0 to 255 x 0 to 255 Type see note 3 Note 1 Area codes for word designation CIO I O relay internal auxiliary relay and special auxiliary relay WR Internal auxiliary relay For CS CJ only LR Link relay For C200HX HG HE only HR Holding relay AR Auxiliary memory relay DM Data memory EM EM area 2 Cannot be selected in the address setting or send message 3 Cannot be selected in the send message Setting Channel Dialog Box Select Read R Write W yN x or in the Type Field If Read R or Write is selected in the Type Field
419. t At reception designate expected data A constant or variable can be designated A constant and a variable can be combined as a string Designating a variable allows the I O memory word data to be used as part of data at sending read at reception write Furthermore using the repeat counter variable N for the variable allows data to be changed for each send and receive Select the data type constant variable and enter data Type Constant ASCII data RXO Type Variable hexadecimal data amp N R 1 Type Constant ASCII data 00 Screen display RX0 amp N R 1 00 97 Communication Message Attributes Section 3 4 3 4 6 Error Check Code Example Note 3 4 7 Terminator Example Note Designate the error check code when data is sent LRC LRC2 CRC CCITT CRC 16 SUM 1 byte 2 byte SUM1 1 byte 2 byte and SUM2 1 byte 2 byte can be designated As the data type BIN or ASCII can be selected The data size default and swap between high byte and low byte can be designated Type LRC data type ASCII data size 2 bytes initial value O screen dis play LRC H parity 0 2 Byte ASCII 1 The error check code range is set in the Message Editor dialog 2 SUM2 CRC 16 and swap between high byte and low byte are possible for the C200HX HG HE only when the Communications Board is the C200HW COML IL EV1 For the CS CJ they are possible with any PMSU and SUM 1 1 b
420. t 1 bit os Datalengn 0 7bits t 8bits o2 Stopbt 0 2 bits tot OOO i e U CONNECTA 03 to 00 Baud rate bps 0 Default 9 600 3 1 200 4 2 400 5 4 800 9 600 7 19 200 8 38 400 bg ar mode 0 Half duplex 1 Full duplex Note When using standard system protocol be sure to set to O half duplex 14 to 00 Reserved 15 to 00 Maximum number of bytes of send receive data 00C8 to O3E8 Hexadecimal Note When using standard system protocol be sure to set to O3E8 Hexadecimal 1 000 bytes PLC Setup and PMSU Settings Appendix B C200HX HG HE With the C200HX HG HE PLC PLC Setup settings for using a Communications Board in protocol macro mode are made in the PLC Setup settings of the PSB Settings Related to the RS 232C Port Wordnumber Bt Function initial values factory set DM 6645 00 to 03 RS 232C port communications conditions settings 00 Standard settings initial values Start bit 1 bit Data length 7 bits Parity even Stop bit 2 bits Baud rate 9 600bps As set for DM 6646 1 04 to 07 CTS control enable disable settings 0 Without initial value 1 With 08 to 11 Area used for 1 1 link 0 LROO to 63 initial value 1 LROO to 31 2 LROO to 15 Maximum PT number for NT link 1 N connection 1 to 7 BCD for C200HE 1 to 3 12 to 15 RS 232C port mode settings 0 Host link initial value 1 No RS 232C procedure 2 1 1 link for Slave 3 1 1 link for Master 4 NT link 1 1 5
421. t Menus Selected object Pop up menu or submenu Project Create Protocol List Close 53 Outline of User Interface Section 2 5 Selected object Pop up menu or submenu Protocol List Delete Create Protocol Print Create Sequence Matrix Send message Receive message Print Print Print preview Printer settings Communication Sequence Send Message List Create Send Message Create Receive Message ut ut Matrix List Create Matrix ut t Case Move Top One up One down py C py 54 Outline of User Interface Section 2 5 Pop up Operation Menus in Online Operation PMSU icon Trace 1 A 2 B Start Trace Continuous Trace One shot Trace Communications Port 1 A 2 B Download Communications Port Settings 2 5 5 Tool Bar Icons e Standard Tool Bar e Trace Tool Bar These icons are for the operation of These icons are for the operation of trace related functions project related functions alsa le erk Selle e Protocol Tool Bar e PLC Status Bar These icons are for the operation The PLC modes such as offline program and monitor modes of protocol related functions and corresponding PLC models are displayed EXAMPLE psw NewPLCt C51 GPU45 Program tft Fd Fas 55 Outline of User Interface Section 2 5 List of Tool Bar Icons Tool bar Corresponding Tool bar Corresponding menu Standard tool Protocol tool bar Download
422. t click the Header lt h gt Field and then left click the Enter Button or press the Enter Key The Header lt h gt Dialog Box will be displayed Cancel Select a header type from the Type drop down list refer to Code ASCIl and Hexadecimal in the following section and set the Data Field This dialog box can also be displayed by left clicking the Data Field and E then left clicking the Enter Button or pressing the Enter Key to display the Message Editor Dialog Box where the Header lt h gt Dialog Box can be displayed by left clicking the Edit Button in the Header lt h gt Field 2 Left click the OK Button to accept the settings or the Cancel Button to leave the settings unchanged None If None is selected from the Type drop down list no data will be set to a header Code 1 2 3 1 Select Code from the Type drop down list 2 Left click the Edit Button The Code Entry Dialog Box will be displayed 242 Creating Messages Code Entry Section 9 1 3 Select Special Code Up to four special codes may be entered Select the codes from the drop down list and left click the Insert Button to input the code indicated Note Five or more special codes cannot be input Left click the Clear But ton to clear all the special codes and input them again from the be ginning Left click the Delete Button to delete the special code where the cursor is located Left click the lt lt or gt gt Button to move the cur
423. ta the sys tem executes the error process The received data can be written to the I O area of the CPU Unit Error check At the send process the check code of the send message frame is auto Automatic variable LRC code matically calculated according to the setup and appended to the mes _RC2 SUM SUM1 1 sage frame to be sent SUM2 CRC CCITT CRC 16 At receive process error checking that compares the check code or No Check received with the check code locally calculated from the received data is 4 Only for CS CJ protocol executed macro When both check codes are different the control will go to the error pro cess Terminator Marks the end of a message frame Constant only e When sending a message the system will finish a frame of the message sending after it sends the terminator If the terminator is not set the sys tem will finish the sending when it sends the data set at the end of the send message e When receiving a message the system will finish receiving when it receives the terminator If the terminator is not set the system will finish the receiving when it receives the data set at the end of the receive mes sage e If the number of bytes of data set at the end of the receive message is Wildcard the system will finish receiving when the buffer becomes full CS CJ 2 500 bytes C200HX HG HE 256 bytes However if flow con trol X on X off RTS CTS is set the system will send t
424. tart e The following window will be displayed on completion of the search op eration Force Status Not Monitored Miel x Forced Forced Forced e If Refresh is selected from the Force Status Menu the search oper ation will be performed again and the bits that have been force set re set will be displayed 12 5 I O Memory Transfer and Comparison Note N WARNING Caution Caution AN Caution Caution The following description provides information on how to transfer edited data from the PLC data table to the PLC transfer data from the PLC to the PLC data table and compare data in the PLC with data edited in the PLC data table This operation is not supported for an NJ series CPU Unit Confirm safety before transferring the I O memory area state to the CIO area of the PLC using the PLC memory window function of the CX Protocol Not doing so may cause malfunction in devices connected to the I O Units regard less of the operating mode of the CPU Unit Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before transferring data to the PLC Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation Confirm that the PLC is connected online before transferring or comparing the data Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before changing the present value of any word in memory Not doing so may result in an unex pected operation Confi
425. ter Personal computer OX Protocol Boe The modem can be connected to the PLC s peripheral port built in host link port or PMSU Connection can also be made to other PLCs on the network by using the PLC directly connected to the PLC PLC modem as a gateway The setting procedures required to make connections to a remote PLC using modems are shown below Modem Connections Section 10 4 Settings at the PLC side e Setting the modem at the PLC side e Connecting the PLC to the modem e Making settings for the PLC connections port Settings at the personal computer CX Protocol side e Setting the modem at the personal computer side made in Windows e Connecting the personal computer to the modem e Making settings for the CX Protocol includes set ting the telephone number Online connection Make the settings so that the following conditions are satisfied e Baud rate Set the same baud rate for the PLC communications port and the personal computer communications port e Serial communications mode host link SYSMAC WAY or toolbus e Communications conditions When serial communications mode is set to host link Data length 7 bits Parity even Stop bits 2 bits When serial communications mode is set to toolbus Data length 8 bits Parity none Stop bits 1 bit 10 4 2 Settings at the PLC Side Modem Settings Make settings for the modem to be connected to the PLC using personal com puter communicati
426. ter After the settings have been made direct online connection is made between the Programming Device and the PLC and the settings are transferred As an example the setting procedure for a CS CJ series PLC using a CX Programmer is shown below For details refer to the CX Programmer Opera tion Manual 7 i op w gt a 3 O d pas 09 A I U oD DTR 273 Modem Connections 274 Section 10 4 Connecting the Built in Host Link Port to the Modem Settings for the host link port are performed in the PLC Settings Window of the CX Programmer as shown below Set the serial communications mode to Host Link or ToolBus With the CS CJ Series when making connections with the toolbus connections cannot be made via the modem using automatic recognition of the baud rate Connections must be made using the toolbus settings in the PLC system settings Set pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front side of the CS CJ series CPU Unit to OFF to follow the PLC system settings and set the serial communications mode for the RS 232C port in the PLC Settings to ToolBus J PLC Settings NewPLC1 5 x File Gptions Help Select baud rate Startup CPU Settings Timings SIOU Refte Set to a baud rate less link Port Pernpheral Port Peripheral 4 r than the maximum baud rate for the modem Communications Sethngs Standard 9600 7 2 E elect custom settings to allow setting the baud rate Note
427. ter re Level 1 parameter re 3 Level 2 parameter re 3 Level 2 parameter re c General purpose reat E Send Message List Receive Message Lis zi Ed M Matrix List s 333 Matrix Lf Trara lie Es EXAMPLE 2 psw ere ee Next Process 152 OE Other End 22 Main Screens of the CX Protocol Section 1 8 Display of Trace Data Displays the send and receive messages in chronological order up to the maximum of 1 700 bytes characters for the CS CJ and 670 bytes charac ters for the C200HX HG HE Trace Number 2 z z 2 2 2 2 2 z Z 2 2 send Message a gQ g F L 1 Fi l HEX 40 30 J0 g2 55 a4 oe 2A OD Receive Message E Fi HEX aF O86 25 oF OD sequence MWumber 338 336 338 336 338 338 336 338 338 338 338 338 338 336 Step Number O G 0 D 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 D 0 RTS CTS DTR DSR Comm Error 4 23 Overview of Project Creation Section 1 9 1 9 Overview of Project Creation Menu Operation Icon Operation Project creation from scratch PLC model change Pada Siete as PLC Setup Protocol creation addition to list Protocol sequence number range setting sequence start number sequence end Designate the following Protocol name number target Sequence realon a aaa aa aca Designate the following link word transmission control parameter response type and monitoring time Tr Tfr Tfs Y
428. tered No valid terminator data set ting terminator data type to NONE One or more of the PMSUs are The scope of the download port set not fitted to the currently selected PLC Not all selected communications port settings will be downloaded One or more of the PMSUs are The scope of the upload port settings Clear the error message CX Protocol will not fitted to the currently selected PLC Not all selected communications port settings will be uploaded 332 N Name already in use Choose another name or ESC to cancel edit No sequence numbers avail Terminator lt t gt dialog has been selected but no valid data entered Enter valid data Clear the error message CX Protocol will tings command includes one or more continue and download port settings to the PMSuUs that are not fitted command includes one or more PMSuUs that are not fitted PMSwUs that are fitted continue and upload port settings to the PMSwUs that are fitted Troubleshooting Section 14 Error Message Symptom Causes aeon Only 100 Matrices are allowed Only 16 Steps are allowed PMSU does not support Proto The protocol limit of matrices has been reached The limit of steps for a sequence has been reached The selected PMSU does not support the Protocol Macro function The selected PMSU does not support the Protocol Macro function or CX Protocol does not recognize the PMSU An
429. the PLC data table is active Selecting from Menu Select Display from the View Menu Grid Window Help Always On Top Toolbars Status Bar Data Area WorkSpace Decimal Fa I Ctri PgD see i ape signed Decimal oom Out Ctrl PgUp 100 Floating pomt Hexadecimal Resize Columns Text Selecting from Pop up Right click a cell in the PLC data table and select the display format from the Menu pop up menu n e A m Hina ks JOSE8 Fill Data Area Decimal o anes OSES i signed Decimal w OSES Clear Grid e Floating point 3E e aa Hexadecimal O3E8 Copy Text B O3E8 Paste UE O3E8 von DIEB OBER OSES Properties Selecting from Toolbar Text Hexadecimal Floating point Signed decimal Decimal Binary coded decimal Binary Note The default data display format in the PLC data table can be changed by selecting the new default data display format from the Display Tab in Prefer ences in the Display Menu 305 Outline of PLC Memory Window Section 12 2 12 2 6 PLC Memory Window Settings Properties such as the default data display format and monitor refresh cycle of the PLC memory window can be changed Displaying Properties Dialog Box 1 2 3 1 Select Preferences from the View Menu Properties For New Window Display Monitoring Genera File Word Liispley Format Bit Lisplat fornia Bray Tat On off Bria y Cured Deci tal C Mumeric 140 Dec
430. them using the CX Protocol In Communications Port Settings Edit set the Mode in the Communications Port Settings Dialog Box of the PMSU to Host link For details refer to 10 6 PMSU Communications Port Set tings and 10 7 Transfer of Communications Port Setting Data to PLC Toolbus connection is not supported by the PMSU Transferring the Settings After the communications conditions for the port have been set transfer the settings to the PLC Make direct online connection to the PLC to be connected to the modem and transfer the settings in the following way Using the CX Programmer e In the PLC Settings Window select Options Transfer to PLC e In the I O Table Window select Options Transfer to PLC Using the CX Protocol e For details refer to 10 6 PMSU Communications Port Settings and 10 7 Transfer of Communications Port Setting Data to PLC 10 4 3 Settings at the Personal Computer Modem Settings 1 2 3 1 2 3 This section explains how to make the settings for the modem to be con nected to the personal computer As an example the setting procedure for the OMRON Modems ME5614E ME5614C are given ME5614E 1 Connect the modem to COM1 or COM 2 of the personal computer using a straight cable 2 Turn ON the power supply for the personal computer Windows will recognize the modem and the Wizard will be displayed 3 Make settings according to the instructions given by the Wizard On completion of the above the
431. this Flag is not always useful as the Error Termination Flag for the whole system 2 Use the Forced Abort Flag while keeping the following points in mind The Instruction Execution Flag will change from ON to OFF when the user program changes the Forced Abort Flag from OFF to ON Therefore the abort process will not be executed if the Forced Abort Flag in turned OFF when the Instruction Execution Flag turns OFF Set the Forced Abort Flag to OFF after the minimum period CPU Unit cycle time 15 ms of the ON held When the Instruction Execution Flag B bit is the PMCR instruction execution condition the PMCR instruction will be executed during the forced abort process and cause the FAL9C error Therefore execute the PMCR instruction after the minimum period CPU Unit cycle time 15 ms after the Forced Abort Flag is changed from OFF to ON Example The Forced Abort Flag is turned ON the 30 ms period is elapses the Forced Abort Flag is turned OFF and simultaneously the PMCR instruction interlock is released Instruction Forced Abort Input condition Execution Flag Flag 00000 28908 28911 PMCR The condition to allow the abort TOOO 0003 28911 Forced Abort Flag The condition to allow the abort x A ne oa 30 ms 1 cycle TOOO ie g Forced Abort Flag a a 28911 i Instruction execution flag 28908 170 Calculation Method of Monitoring Time Section 4 5 4 5 Calculation Method of
432. time has been reached e The receive finish time has been reached e A transmission error occurred during receive processing For the CS CJ Transmission error of the following address causes a retry e Serial Communications Board Bit 15 of word 1908 or 1918 e Serial Communications Unit Bit 15 of word n 8 or n 18 n 1500 25 x Unit No For the C200HX HG HE The bit 04 of word 283 or bit 12 communications error of word 283 causes a retry e A message excepting the message set in receive messages is received e An error occurred in the Error Check code For retries send processing is executed regardless of the wait time 1 Left click on the Retry Field or select the Retry Field and press the Enter Key 2 Input the number of retries 0 to 9 and press the Enter Key Sets the time to be waited until a send message is sent for send processing The accuracy of the Ts is 10 ms maximum The send wait time setting range is from 0 to 99 0 No wait time The setting unit can be selected from the following four units 10 ms 0 01 s 00 to 99 100 ms 0 1 s 00 to 99 When 00 is set as the value waiting will not occur 1 Left click the Send Wait setting for the step and then left click the Enter Button or press the Enter Key The Transmission Wait Time Ts Dialog Box will be displayed Teenie cn Wat line El Ea Value Time Unit o o E Fi fio millisecond Cancel 2 Enter a value for the wait time in the V
433. tion Example Command Step 1 Receive aa nmnmeeeaea nee eaeaee e es enduuwas m processing Step 2 Wait Step 3 Send Computation processing General purpose device If used in combination with a matrix it is possible to set up the system so that when certain data is received the send receive sequence will be put on standby and computational processing e g data processing will be per formed at the CPU Unit before proceeding to the next communications pro cess Step No 00 Receive A Receive B Error Step No 01 Abort Step No 2 Standby Wait Computational proces sing e g data proces sing performed at the CPU Unit To step No 3 Wait cancel switch OFF gt ON 71 Protocol Macro Outline Section 3 1 3 1 3 Transition Stage Between Steps Following execution of a command within a step the next process will switch in the following way depending on the result of the send or receive process Process Conditions for error process Conditions for next process Send not completed within send monitoring time Receive message Receive The actual received message and the set expected message do not correspond Other errors with data communications For details refer to 3 3 9 Next Process Error Pro cess Error with data communications Contents of error pro cess or next process Goto Goes to a designated step Next Goes to the next step E
434. tion If 0 End command Execute the line disconnection If not 8 retry Receive the result code lf 8 end Receive the result code Note Information about the AT commands to be sent to the modem i e the initialization command dial com mand escape code sending line disconnection command etc and result codes response is described in the manual of the modem in use The modem used in this example is MD24FB10V made by OMRON AT commands and result codes supported by the modem are listed in the following tables 342 Creating the Protocol Applications Appendix A List of Commands Used in this Example Setting item C CSettings O Modem initialization Not available ATEOVOXAVANS CO COXI Result code display forma Speed display when connection has Available been completed Busy dial tone detection Available Display of error corrections and com Available pressed data when connection has been completed Line offcommandaTHO ine SSS List of Result Codes C C e ooo o y oone fComecion compe SSS S C e E T C E a T 6 NODIALTONE S S S Noiahtone detection 6 y INO ANSWER anger detection oS SEINE E Disassembling of the Process Contents into the Sequences and the Steps Editable by the CX Protocol First the above communications sequences are disassembled into the following sequences by the process block Sequence No 000 Modem initialization 001 Dial operation 002 Send message Rece
435. tion is executed from the CX Protocol from that point the Serial Communications Board performs a trace on chronological data in the send receive message up to 1 700 bytes Using this it is possible to confirm what kind of messages are sent and received at each step For details about traces refer to SECTION 12 Tracing and Monitoring 3 9 Executing a Created Communications Sequence C200HX HG HE This section describes how to execute the communication sequence described so far using a C200HX HG HE PLC It is necessary to transfer the protocol that was created to the PMSU in advance However the previously mentioned communication sequence is registered in sequence number 101 of the incorporated standard system protocol so the following describes the pro cedure for executing Sequence number 101 Note It is assumed that the standard protocol is under the initial status When the sequence is changed for example by the CX Protocol return to the original sequence before execution 128 Executing a Created Communications Sequence C200HX HG HE Section 3 9 3 9 1 Device Connection It is assumed as an example that a C200HX PLC C200HW COMO6 EV1 Communications Board and E5ZE Temperature Controller are connected as follows C200HX PLC C200HW COMO6 EV1 Temperature input 8 channels POZE Port A of the Communications Board Eight points of measured temperature are assumed to be stored to DM101 to DM 116 Measured temper
436. tions Response Time Performance Section 4 8 Number Function __ Time Required PMCR instruction process time Send data conversion process time Send data transmission time Received data transmis sion time Received data conversion process time Received data writing process time 4 External device process time 15 ms two cycle time maximum Depends on the number of conversion bytes Number of data characters x one character bit transmission rate Depends on the external device process Number of data characters x one character bit transmission rate Depends on the number of conversion bytes Board One cycle time maximum Unit Two cycle time maximum The internal process time from the start of PMCR instruction to the end of the data transfer to the Board Unit The time required for the send data conversion based on the specified conversion mode which finishes at the start of data sending to the external device The time required for the send data transmission to the external device Use double the calculated time because idle time exists between send characters The time required for the external device process according to the PLC s command which finishes by the start of the response data sending The time required for the received data transmission from the external device Use two to five times the calculated time because idle time exists between the receive character
437. to 99 minutes users can set the Tfs to 0 04 seconds after which the system executes the error process or the retry process e Example to Set Up the Receive Wait Monitoring Time Tr The receive wait monitoring time Tr sets the monitoring time from the sys tem s recognition of the received command in the applicable step and to the receiving of the beginning one byte the start character In the above table it refers to a total of 4 5 for the beginning character and it can be set in the range where the following equation is satisfied The receive wait monitor time Tr gt 4 5 for the beginning character 172 Operation Confirmation Section 4 6 When this time is up the system executes the error process or the retry pro cess e The Receive Finish Monitoring Time Tfr The receive finish monitoring time Tfr monitors the receiving time from the receipt of the beginning one byte the start character to the receipt of the last one byte data the end character In the above table it refers to 5 As in the case of the send finish monitor time an idle time exists between receive char acters and depending on devices to be connected the time varies Therefore it is recommended that the time be set to two to five times of the calculated time It can be set in the following range The receive finish monitor time Tfr gt 5 x 2 to 5 When this time is expired the system executes the error process or the retry process 4 6 O
438. to C Constants Refer to previous 0000 to 03E7 hexa 0000 to FFFF description decimal 0 to 999 binary data Index Registers Direct Index Registers JRO to 15 See note Indirect 2048 to 2047 IRO to 15 DRO to 15 IRO IRO to 15 JRO to 15 IRO to 15 Note The EM area cannot be designated for the receive data with the interrupt noti fication function for the Serial Communications Board If such a designation is attempted the Protocol Macro Syntax Error A42410 will turn ON Contents of send receive data word allocation to read the process value in sequence No 101 of the standard system protocol Temp Controller E5ZE read are as follows Read the process value and store the result in the designated address e Send data word assignment third operand of PMCR instruction Send data 0 No of send data words starting address 1 Indeterminate Unit No Contents Data format Data 0 No of send data words 0002 fixed hexadecimal 2 digit 1 Unit No hexadecimal 2 00 to OF digit 125 Executing a Created Communications Sequence CS CJ Section 3 8 e Receive data word assignment fourth operand of PMCR instruction Receive data 0 No of send data words storage address 1 Measuring temperature rightmost 4 digit Channel 2 Measuring temperature leftmost 1 digit Measuring temperature rightmost 4 digit gene ig of Channel 1 4 Measuring tem
439. tored in DM 0010 number of words including DM 0010 DM0010 Number of effective words How many words including DM 0010 are effective DM0011 Eifective Receive data is stored in words successive words beginning Receive data from DM 0011 and the number of effective words is stored in DM 0010 3 Execute the PMCR instruction Procedure 8 Confirmation of Operations Refer to SECTION 12 Tracing and Monitoring 1 2 3 1 Traces the transmission lines Trace the data in the send and the receive messages and the control sig nals flowing on the transmission line RS 232C or RS 422A 485 2 Monitors the I O memory Monitor the send and the receive data and the status of flags 1 12 Specifications 1 12 1 Protocol Macro Specifications Number of protocols Can be created and registered by the CX Protocol Number of sequences 1000 max Per Sequence 60 max protocol count Message 300 max count Matrix count count 100 max Number of Marix count per 16 max sequence Sequence execution Designated by the PMCR instruction on the PLC s CPU Unit by giving a sequence number condition Half duplex or full duplex can be designated Full duplex is only for the CS CJ protocol macro Synchronization method Start stop synchronization non synchronization method 33 Specifications Section 1 12 pote scription Transmis Sequence content sion control common parameters parameter Response Mode for writing r
440. trical signals without requiring a modem monitor timer 89 Step Attributes Section 3 3 With the CS CJ protocol macro the phone can now be hung up at the desired timing by turning OFF the DTR signal e With the conventional protocol macro for the C200HX HG HE the phone line cannot be set to be active for more than one sequence With the CS CJ protocol macro the DTR signal can be retained even after a sequence has terminated and can be applied in the following way 1 2 3 1 Make a call using the protocol macro from the PLC to a host computer Programming Device CX Programmer 2 When the line is connected change the serial communications mode from protocol macro to host link using the STUP instruction DTR signal is re tained 3 Execute remote programming monitoring from the Programming Device side Personal computer 3 Remote programming monitoring 1 Dial up PLC Modem Modem RS 232C 2 Change the mode to host link using the STUP instruction Setup with the CX Protocol Command Type pend amp Recewe Open Note When set to modem control mode the DTR signal will turn ON when the sequence is started and will turn OFF when the sequence ends If the DTR signal is turned ON using the Open command under the modem control mode the DTR signal will remain ON even after the sequence has ended 90 Step Attributes Section 3 3 3 3 5 Retry Count When the retry count of the Send amp R
441. trol parame ee _ flow receive modem control ter Response type Receive wait monitoring time 10s Tr Receive finish monitoring time Tfr Send finish monitoring time Tfs Sip len o pm Reycounter b b p Sendwaitime o s he o ee Send Header lt h gt E message Enorcheckeode lt os ooo e mws o Message editing ATEOVOXA V2IN3 C0 COX1 amp MO S26 1 0 lt t gt Data Bree lt Initial R2 gt lt Initial R3 gt Header lt h gt o es O Error check code lt c gt OOOO Length lt I gt Se Address lt a gt Message editing 0 lt t gt L Data 117 Example of Communications Sequence Section 3 7 3 7 Example of Communications Sequence Shown below is an example of sequence to read process values from a 8CH type temperature controller E5ZE 3 7 1 Sequence Setup Content Sequence No 101 Link word Transmission Response type Monitor time Tr Monitor time Tfr Monitor time Tfs control mode Modem control _ Scanmode ss s bs 3 7 2 Step Setup Content Create a process flow as follows Step No 00 Retry possible Send the read command for process value up to 3 times Send amp Receive Receive the response gt Error occurrence Normal Current value of Repeat Counter N 8 y End Abort Normal The system sends the read command for a process value and waits the response from the Temperature Controll
442. try again Protocol size xxx capacity of the PMSU PMSU Memory Size yyy Cannot edit PC PLC comms Attempting to change PLC settings Close CX Net and retry settings while CX Net is open which CX Net is active The current CX Protocol session has Close one or more projects and try again project The maximum number the maximum number of projects of projects are already open open Cannot perform trace operation The selected port is not correctly set Set the port setting to Protocol Macro using PMSU configuration up for Protocol Macro operation mode for the selected port Cannot proceed connected to The connected PLC does not match Select a different PLC Wrong PLC the PLC settings Cannot set a repeat count of The Repeat count specified is invalid Enter a valid value Zero Channel number is larger than A Channel Number has been entered Enter a valid Channel Number the selected data area size for the Repeat Counter that is outside the range for the selected Channel area Check Code lt c gt defined in A Check Code lt c gt entry has been Specify a Check code area to an entry message but no check code made in the Message Data dialog area selected but the check code has not been specified for an appropriate entry Combination of address and Attempting to specify a Length or an Enter valid data length extend beyond the effective address that is larger than selected data a
443. ts the next process according to message expected to be received up to 15 types Retry count The number of times for retrying the command when some retry factor such as an error arises Send wait time Wait time for starting data sending for a Send command With Without Designates whether to write Response Writ received data ing operand addressing Next process Designates the next step to which control will go to when the system ends normally Error process Designates the next step to which control will go to when the system ends abnormally Note For CS CJ protocol macro only 3 Message structure and content Messages to be sent and received are generally structured as follows 1 Messages containing header and terminator 59 Protocol Macro Outline Section 3 1 Error Check Terminator End of the message Error check code Content of the message Sending Data to be sent or Receiving Data expected to be received according to the command Destination of the message Beginning of the message The check code and the terminator can be replaced with each other Note With the C200HX HG HE possible only when the C200HW COMLILJ EV1 Communications Board is used Header Terminator Check code 2 Messages containing header and data length Error check code Content of the message Sending Data to be sent Receiving Data expected to be received Length of the message To be calculated a
444. u 3 For C200HX HG HE Note For converted variables When the frame format of instructions commands that the partner Unit can translate is configured by ASCII code the numeric hexadecimal data in the O memory has to be converted to hexadecimal data by before it is sent and the numeric ASCII data has to be converted to hexadecimal data by amp before it is received When converting data hexadecimal data in the I O memory into ASCII code before sending Example Convert a 6 digit numeric value 3 bytes in the I O memory for DM 0000 into ASCII in the reverse direction Communication Message Attributes Section 3 4 15 0 DMoo000 5 6 7 8 35 36 37 38 31 32 1 2 On the p 6 v7 ng ta I tou transmission path How to designate R DMO0000 6 Number of bytes in the transmission path after ASCII conversion Read from DMO000 Reverse direction Hexadecimal ASCII conversion When converting the numeric data ASCII data from the external device into the hexadecimal data and receiving and writing it Example Converting a 5 digit numeric data 5 bytes in ASCII data into hexadecimal and writing it from DM 0000 in the reverse direction amp i 2 a 4 p On the transmission path How to designate amp W DM0000 5 Number of bytes in the transmission
445. ue 4 digits Scaling lower limit to BCD upper limit e PMCR Instruction Operand Setting Contents In this case the Unit No 03 E5LIK process value is read received and stored in the DM 0201 C Control data Centr as o cla o 0 10 ra 1 Port A 000 Sequence No S The first word number of the send data S DM0100 3 S DM0100 00 02 Number of send data words 2 s 1 DM0101 L001 03 unit No 03 D The first word number of the receive data storage D DM0200 15 0 D DM0200 Number of send data words 2 D 1 DM0201 Process value is stored BCD 4 digit Process value 167 Ladder Programming Method Section 4 4 e Example of the Ladder Program Creation The following example shows that the protocol name Controller E5_K read Sequence No 000 Process value read is executed by the PMCR instruction and the read process value is transferred to another word at the normal completion of the sequence Input condition Instruction flag 00000 28908 The Instruction Execution Flag 28908 is cleared from ON to OFF 00100 changes from OFF to ON Step error process execution flag remains unchanged to be ON during 1 cycle 00100 28908 28909 If the Step Error Process Execution Flag 28909 is FAL 06 00 ON when 00100 is ON sequence termination the FAL instruction Failure Alarm instruction will be executed as the sequence error termination When the input condition 00000 is ON and the Instru
446. uence data 180 Errors at the Protocol Execution Countermeasures for Bits 00 to 03 of Protocol Macro Error Codes n 9 n 19 a eae ee O hexadecimal Po Normal 1 oe m ee the system 2 keno No indication Sequence number A number not error registered in the PMCR instruction C2 communications sequence number has been designated 3 hexadecimal ERC flashes and ERR Data read write range When storing or ALM flashes over error reading data from the CPU Unit designated area range is exceeded Section 4 7 e Correct the communications sequence number e Using the CX Protocol register the designated sequence number In case of operand addressing Check the contents designated in S and D operands of PMCR instruction In case of link word direct addressing Using the CX Protocol check the designated range 181 Errors at the Protocol Execution C Enor code Indicator Description Cause acron ERC flashes and Protocol data syntax Some codes could not Check and correct the 4 hexadecimal 182 ERR ALM flashes error be executed during protocol execution Section 4 7 following items e Total of the areas O1 O2 11 and 12 designated by the link word exceeded 500 words The same area designated by the link word was used for ports 1 and 2 Writing was desig nated for the param eter designation EM area read write was designated for the interru
447. ut Window E1013 Check code lt c gt SUM2 2 bytes not supported on The target unit does not support message data that this unit includes a SUM2 2 byte Check Code lt c gt E1014 Overlap in sequence range with protocol A sequence s start and end settings conflict with another protocol which is being compiled E1022 Communication Sequence contains no step data A sequence exists but has no steps E1026 Step contains invalid command Invalid command setting in step E1035 Link Channel out of range Alpha protocols only error The Link Channel setting is out of range E1037 Repeat Counter contains invalid channel Alpha protocols only error The Repeat Counter contains a channel out of range E1042 Length part primary expression constant out of Alpha protocols only error Part of the Length primary range expression is out of range E1043 Object code too large The amount of data to be downloaded is too large E1044 Matrix Goto out of range The GOTO setting within a matrix is out of range E1045 Matrix next statement out of range The Next setting within a matrix is used by the last step ina communication sequence E1048 Protocol contains no message data A protocol contains no message data E1049 Protocol contains no communication sequences A protocol contains no sequences E1050 Step contains invalid message matrix reference A message has not been specified in a step requiring a message E1051 PLC xxx CPUyy d
448. utomatically Destination of the message Beginning of the message Data attributes Header Beginning of mes sage Address Message destina tion Length message enon ooo Daa fmessageboy Jo lb Checkcode Eroreheck code O e Input the constant in the header and terminator e Either the constant or variable can be input in the address and data By including variables in the address and data the address or data can be retrieved from the designated area of the I O memory and the transmitted or received data can be written in the designated area of the I O memory 60 Protocol Macro Outline Section 3 1 3 1 2 Construction of Send Receive Outline of Construction The construction of send and receive messages with the protocol macro func tion is shown below CPU Unit PMSU Sequence No A Send buffer Send message PEN assembly To transmission line Sends when the send process is executed Comparison with expected message a i z Next process From transmission line switching Half duplex Receives when not performing send process Full duplex Receives throughout execution of the sequence Process for writing to I O memory oo Unit Internal process Buffer O O S Following Sain Following send process Send command The send message moves to the PMCR Send amp Receive command data from I O transmission line via the send buffer instruction memory is converted under the designated
449. ve window To switch between the standard system protocol project workspace and the user s project workspace either left click the System Tab or Project Tab or directly click the project window The following are the basic operations required to create edit and download protocols e Double click the icon on the project workspace or project window to shift from the highest level to the lowest level Press the Esc Key to shift from the lowest to the highest level e To create a new object such as a protocol sequence step or message right click to display the pop up menu and select Create A new object will be displayed in the project window e To input data into the list in the project window left click the cell input field or click the Down arrow Icon to display the settings dialog box and input set values into the dialog box e The pop up menu is used for setting the communications port of the PMSU uploading protocols tracing data or downloading trace data Right click or press the Shift F10 Keys to display the pop up menu The pop up menu that is displayed when the right mouse button is clicked is a useful feature of the CX Protocol Different pop up menus will be displayed depending on where the right button is clicked These pop up menus are effi cient because they include almost all the main functions such as creating new protocols sequences messages matrices and matrix cases setting the communications port of the
450. which have been executed will be set to 1 ON in order of execution Cleared when either the sequence starts executing STUP is executed or the PMSU is restarted 142 Auxiliary Area and Allocated Data Areas Section 3 10 Type Address Tmin Initial ization Sequence Execution CS CJ CIO 1911 CS CJ and C200HX HG HE Recep Matrix When monitor Completion CIO 1921 n 11 tion matrix case numbers 0 to 15 0 sequence Matrix Case No n 21 bits OO to to F hexadecimal for which recep starts code 03 tion is completed will be set C200HX HG HE Cleared when either the sequence CIO 287 CIO starts executing STUP is executed 288 bits 00 to 03 or the PMSU is restarted The Execution Completion Matrix Case Number is only stored when the matrix has been designated by the Receive Send amp Receive com mand It will be cleared to O if there is no matrix or another command is executed Execution Com CS CJ CIO 1912 CS CJ only Each bit corresponding Matrix When pletion Matrix CIO 1922 n 12 to matrix case No O to 15 bits 00 to sequence Case No Storage n 22 bits 0O to 15 for which reception is complete starts Flag 15 will be set to 1 ON C200HX HG HE Cleared when either the sequence None starts executing STUP is executed the PMSU is restarted or step is executed After the matrix Receive command either the WAIT command can be executed or the sequence com pleted and the matrix case number
451. without going to standby Simultaneously the wait cancel soft switch will be turned OFF Wait cancel switch a On standby after Wait command EEE E TENS TAE Wait cancel switch 4 OFF ON Wait cancel Switch OFF Step Step wait Step re By ladder program By Wait command ON Wait cancel switch OFF By Wait command ee we oe w e m Wait Flag OFF Ladder program Ladder process Wait cancel Switch ON T Step wait By Wait command see note ON Wait cancel switch OFF ON Wait Flag OFF i t t 1 i I b i No standby status No ladder process p Ladder program Note If the Wait command is executed while the wait cancel switch is ON the sequence will not wait but the Wait cancel Flag will be turned ON Note 1 The wait cancel switch is turned from OFF to ON using the SET instruction in the ladder program When setting temporary manual setting with the Programming Console the protocol macro standby may not be able to turn the wait cancel switch from ON to OFF because ON will be held for a mo ment while the key is depressed 2 Ifthe receive buffer may become full during wait standby e g with full du plex use in combination with flow control 70 Protocol Macro Outline Section 3 1 3 Wait command can be used to set the system to proceed to the next step after allowing the CPU Unit to complete processing such as internal com puta
452. y DIED ChEALIOM j essaie re iaaa Designate the following repeat counter command retry count send wait time send message note receive message note with without response writing next process and error process Y Message creation 222ee ee eres ee Matrix creation Protocol transfer from personal computer to PMSU Header terminator check code length address message edit including data Note 1 Select New from the File menu Display after creating new project Select Edit PC PLC Comms Settings from the PLC menu Designate target PLC model Personal Com puter lt gt PLC Communication Settings Double click the PMSU icon Designate setup items for each of ports 1 A and 2 B Right click Create Protocol Right click Create Sequence Right click Create Step Right click the Send Message or Receive Message field in the step list and select New Message from the pop up menu Right click Create Matrix and Create Matrix Case name in the send message list 2 A receive message in a step can be designated by choosing its message name in the receive message list or matrix name in the matrix list 3 Therefore you can create a message part during step creation more easily by choosing a message name of the desired send message receive mes sage or matrix that you have created in advance 24
453. y received message However with the CS CJ the following operation that combines length desig nation and matrix will be possible Not possible with C200HX HG HE With case number 00 the message is opened up using the length designation and is compared with case numbers 00 to n Even if the message lengths for the cases 00 to n are different the comparison will be performed correctly Example of Matrix As an example the following matrix is used Case No 0 lt h gt lt I gt W W 1 Case No 1 lt h gt lt I gt R W 1 Case No 2 lt h gt lt I gt C W 1 lt h gt If 5W01234 is received it will match with case number 0 W 1 01234 If 8R01234567 is received it will match with case number 1 W 1 01234567 If 3C012 is received it will match with case number 2 W 1 012 Error check code or terminator can be appended Via the host link SYSMAC WAY change over the process according to the response PROGRAM MONITOR RUN mode for the status read command 113 Creating Matrices Section 3 5 Host link MS command PLC Issue an MS command Trae vere Transmission message 00 MS LRC 2A0D expected Receive a response Receive message Matrix Case No 00 00 MS 00 00 LRC 2A0D Next process Go to 01 Program mode code End code Address Host link command Case No 01 00
454. y the protocols to compare with the protocols in the Board or Unit When selecting more than one protocol hold down the Shift Key to select a range or hold down the Ctrl Key to add protocols It is also possible to select more than one Board Unit at the same time Note Select all of the protocols in the Board Unit being compared If the number of protocols does not match the number selected the com parison will fail 4 Select Protocols Compare Protocols from the menu bar or click the Protocol Comparison Icon 2 in the toolbar The Protocol Compile Com pare Dialog Box will be displayed 289 Transferring and Reading Protocol Data between the Computer and PMSU Section 11 1 290 Note Perform the operation to compare protocols in the Board Unit only af ter selecting the protocols Protocol Compile Compare x w Protocol password protection Password Confirm T Include Source Information Compile IE top Compier Compare Stop UL led Compared 3 scup o0z onoz If the source code was also transferred with the protocols the last time the protocols were transferred to the Board Unit select the Include Source In formation Option Click the Compile Button Errors warnings and other information during compilation will be displayed in the Output Window at the lower left If compilation ends normally the Compare Button will be enabled Click the Compare Button The protocols will be read f
455. ype is 2 bytes Conversion Reverse Order Data Type Binary ASCII Length lt l gt None 1 byte 2 bytes O to 255 if Type is 1 byte 0 to 65535 if Type is 2 bytes Binary ASCI Address lt a gt Type None Constant ASCII Constant Hexadecimal Variable Variable ASCII Variable Hexadecimal Variable Reverse Variable ASCII Reverse Variable Hexadecimal Reverse One of ASCII Hexadecimal or Variable Data Message Order Order setting lt h gt lt t gt lt c gt lt I gt lt a gt Type data Data code ASCII Hexadecimal Variables Note 1 For the CS CJ protocol macro only Use either one of the following procedures to create a message 241 Creating Messages Section 9 1 e Set each attribute header terminator error check code address using its respective setting screen and display the Message Editor Dialog Box from the Data Field to edit the message Data can be created only in the Message Editor Dialog Box Example lt h gt lt a gt lt c gt lt t gt Edit the following order using the dialog box Input data from this dialog box e Display the Message Editor Dialog Box from the Data Field and perform all the settings header terminator error check code address from there before editing Header lt h gt Use the following procedure to set the header data that indicates the begin ning of the message Select one of the following data types ASCII Hexadec imal or Code 1 2 3 1 Lef
456. yte 2 bytes and LRC2 are also possible With reception of this code data reception is completed When data is received without this code data reception will be completed when the data that corresponds to the length of the message set in the reception message inside the step is received With sending of this code data sending is completed When data is sent without this code data sending is completed at the time when the last data is sent Only a constant can be designated Select the terminator type ASCII hexadecimal control code according to the communications specification of the device of the communication partner and enter the data Type hexadecimal data 2AOD screen display 2A0D Even if there is no designation for the header it is possible to take the mes sage item out of the receive buffer if the length or the terminator is designated and process it as the receive message 3 4 8 Message Item Data Attributes Constant Variable 98 Users can set the following constants or variables as message items Can be set for the header address data or terminator Designating method ASCII data Designate between double quotation marks 12345 as in 12345 Hexadecimal data Designate between square brackets as in 5A2B 5A2B Control code Designate by selecting the special code from OD for CR the list such as CR LF or STX Can be set for the address or data Variables read fr

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"